University of New Hampshire, the Graduate School 1982-83

Call Bulletin of the N5345"«-;fk ^^^^ University of New Hampshire

Graduate Catalog Unmsity of

iihrdrv The Graduate School 1982-83

Map of New Hampshire 2 {^ n^\\ Graduate Programs 3 37? '7^-^

The University of New Hampshire (vj S3H3 and Graduate Education 5 \^9iO.]S'b Research and Support Services 10

Admission and Registration 12

Fees and Financial Assistance 17

Academic Regulations and Degree Requirements 21 Departmental Requirements and Course Descriptions 27

Trustees and Officers of the University 113

Faculty of the Graduate School 114

Campus Map and Key 126

Graduate School Calendar 1982-83 128 Index 130

Volume LXXIV, Number 2, Aug., 1982. The Bulletin of the University of New Hampshire (USPS 077-720) IS published five times a year: in July, August, October, April, and May, by the Office of University

Communications, Schofield House, UNH, Durham, N.H. 03824. Second class postage paid at Durham, N.H. 03824. ( —

CANADA

MAINE

Mt. Washington Montpelier • 1 VERMONT // NEWEW I HAMPSHIRE /\rS^ Portland ft> NEW YORK

Concord Durharni Portsmouth

Albany MASSACHUSETTS

Springfield

Providence! (86T Hartford CONNECTICUT [95) _l ^RHODE ^ ^^J% ISLAND

NEW JERSEY

'New York* N

I Graduate Programs

Master of Arts Master of Public Administration Counseling Economics Certificate Advanced Graduate English of Literature Study Language and Linguistics Counseling Writing Educational Administration and Supervision History Music Doctor of Philosophy Political Science Biochemistry Psychology Nutrition Sociology Botany Spanish Chemistry Earth Sciences Master of Science Geology Animal Sciences Oceanography Biochemistry Economics Biology Organizational Behavior/Labor Botany Engineering Chemical Engineering Signal Processing Chemistry Transport Phenomena Civil Engineering System Design Communication Disorders Theoretical and Applied Mechanics Computer Science English Earth Sciences Genetics Geology History Oceanography Mathematics Electrical Engineering Mathematics Education Entomology Microbiology Genetics Physics Home Economics Plant Science Mathematics Psychology Mechanical Engineering Sociology Microbiology Zoology Music Education Natural and Environmental Resources Forest Resources Hydrology Resource Economics Soil Science Resource Administration and Management Wildlife Ecology Physical Education Physics Plant Science Zoology

Master of Arts in Teaching Elementary Education Secondary Education

Master of Science for Teachers Chemistry English Mathematics Physics

Master of Education Administration and Supervision Counseling Developmental Disabilities Early Childhood Special Needs Elementary Education Reading Secondary Education

Master of Occupational Education

Master of Business Administration i-.'*!!|v Graduate Education and the University of New Hampshire The University Graduate Education

The home of the University is Durham—one The University awarded its first Ph.D. in of the oldest towns in northern New England. 1896, placing it among the first American The town is semirural and still retains traces universities to award that degree. Doctoral of its colonial past. Easy accessibility to Bos- programs in their present form began in the ton's cultural opportunities (65 miles to the 1950s. south); the unsurpassed skiing, hiking, and Graduate education is supervised by a grad- scenery of the White Mountains (60 miles uate faculty of more than 400. The Graduate northwest); and the sandy beaches and rocky School is led by the dean, who implements coast of New Hampshire and Maine (10 miles the policies of the graduate faculty. The Grad- east) make it an ideal location. uate Council is composed of elected faculty The 188-acre campus is surrounded by and student representatives and serves in an more than 3,000 acres of fields, farms, and advisory capacity to the dean. woodlands owned by the University. A 15- Quality graduate education requires devel- acre wooded tract, known as the Ravine, opment of new knowledge and communica- graces the center of the campus, allowing tion of existing knowledge. The faculty, members of the University community some while dedicated to teaching, carry on an active natural quiet midst the 35 classroom, research, research program, which supports graduate and service buildings and 29 residential build- education by developing new knowledge and ings of the campus. providing training opportunities for graduate The University is composed of the College students in residence. As a land-grant and Sea of Liberal Arts, College of Life Sciences and Grant institution, the University is responsi- Agriculture, College of Engineering and ble for conducting research and disseminating Physical Sciences, Whittemore School of information to the public in areas affecting the Business and Economics, School of Health nation's welfare. Studies, Thompson School of Applied Sci- The University of New Hampshire is the ence, Division of Continuing Education, and only university in the state, and is the primary the Graduate School. In addition to these col- institution within the University System of leges and schools located on the University New Hampshire responsible for providing campus, the University System of New graduate programs that meet state and re- Hampshire also includes Keene State, Ply- gional needs. Doctoral programs are offered mouth State, and Merrimack Valley colleges exclusively on the University campus al- and the School for Lifelong Learning. though other units of the University System The University enrolls more than 10,000 offer some master's programs. students, has a full-time faculty of more than 500, and offers 92 undergraduate and 66 grad- Master's uate programs. The student body includes Programs 1,000 graduate students. The University offers master's degree pro- in a variety disciplines. The University of New Hampshire is a grams wide of The land-grant institution made possible by the master's degree can serve either as a profes- Morrill Act of 1862, which aided states in sional terminal degree or as an intermediate developing institutions to serve all the people. degree for those intending to pursue further The institution was founded as New Hamp- graduate study. Master's programs at the shire College of Agriculture and the Mechanic University of New Hampshire have been Arts in 1866 to train young men and women carefully developed and arc reviewed by the for service to the state through agriculture and graduate dean and faculty to ensure their con- technology. In 1893, New Hampshire College tinuing quality. In most programs, students will cither (as it was called at that time) moved from can elect options that permit them Hanover to Durham, as the result of a bequest to study one aspect of a discipline in depth by of lands and funds by Benjamin Thompson, preparing a thesis or to gain a broader mastery and began to develop more rapidly. Univer- of a discipline by electing to take course work sity status was conferred in 1923. In 1980, in lieu of a thesis. UNH and the University of Maine were designated jointly as a Sea Grant College by the National Oceanographic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA). Doctoral Programs The Graduate School

The University offers programs leading to the The staff of the Graduate School is available Doctor of Philosophy in those disciplines to assist students in both academic and per- where it has both faculty and facilities to sup- sonal matters affecting their study at the Uni- port advanced graduate education of high versity. Students are urged to contact the quality. Care has also been taken to ensure office with questions about academic policy, that the programs will make a significant con- financial assistance and University services tribution to the opportunities for doctoral ed- available to graduate students. The offices of ucation in the New England region. Doctoral the Graduate School are located in the Horton education properly focuses upon preparing Social Science Center. the student to contribute to the growth of knowledge through research. However, since Graduate Student Life a large percentage of doctoral students fmd Graduate students play an active role in the employment in higher education, most doc- life of the University community. In most toral programs provide opportunities for stu- departments, students are consulted concern- dents to work as teaching assistants and to ing issues affecting their programs and serve participate in seminars on teaching led by ex- full depart- perienced faculty members. This preparation as voting members on important graduate students for the student's future role as both developer mental committees. Three and communicator of knowledge has enabled are elected by the graduate student organiza- as full voting of the Graduate recipients of the doctoral degree from the tion members Council, the body that advises the graduate University of New Hampshire to obtain at- all concerning tractive teaching and research positions. dean on matters Graduate School policy. Graduate students are also rep- Interdisciplinary resented in the Academic Council of the Stu- dent Senate and Academic Senate and serve Programs on such University-wide committees as the The Graduate School encourages interdisci- Research Council and the Teaching-Learning plinary study within its existing programs and Council. has adopted procedures for faculty to develop interdisciplinary options within established Recreational and Cultural doctoral programs. However, independent, Activities self-designed graduate programs arc not avail- The University offers students a variety of able at the University. Formal interdiscipli- recreational, social, and cultural opportuni- nary degrees are offered in the Genetics ties. With two theaters and two art galleries Program, which involves geneticists from in the Paul Creative Arts Center, the Univer- many departments in both master's and sity is a major cultural resource for the entire doctoral programs; the Engineering Ph.D. state. The Sidore Lecture Series presents pro- Program, which is a cooperative, vocative, well-known speakers each year, interdisciplinary effort of the electrical and while the University's Celebrity Series brings computer engineering, civil engineering, leading concert artists and professional talent mechanical engineering, and chemical engi- to the campus. University students and fac- neering departments; the Natural and ulty also perform in public concerts, recitals, Environmental Resources Program, which and theater productions. brings together resource economists, forest- Approximately 100 student clubs and or- ers, wildlife specialists, hydrologists, and soil ganizations are recognized on campus and scientists within the Institute of Natural and membership in many of these is open to grad- Environmental Resources (INER) to address uate students. Since graduate students are not the problems of our environment; and the required to pay the student activities fee, a Biology Program, which makes the resources nominal charge for admission to some events of the biological science departments available may be required. to students interested in a general master's The Memorial Union Building houses program. An option within the Biochemistry many of the student organizations and also Ph.D. Program allows advanced study in nu- provides lounges, eating facilities, and recre- trition, drawing upon the expertise of ation areas for student use. New Hampshire's nutritionists from the departincnts of public television station, WENH-TV, also biochemistry, animal sciences, and home eco- housed in the Memorial Union, broadcasts in- nomics. Additional interdisciplinary oppor- school programs for 110,000 young people tunities are listed with the individual program and, during evening hours, cultural and edu- descriptions. cational programs. Recreational facilities are also available at Forest Park Apartments: The University the field house for students who purchase owns and operates Forest Park, a complex of recreation passes. The pass entitles the holder 154 studio (efficiency) and one- and two-bed- to use the athletic-recreation facilities during room apartments for students, faculty, and open recreation periods and to participate in staff with families. The development is com- certain club sports, noncredit instructional posed of two- and three-story buildings lo- programs at reduced rates, and the cated on the edge of campus, convenient to faculty/staff/graduate student intramural pro- all University facilities and within walking gram. distance of the Durham shopping area and

The University competes in 13 men's and schools. Residency is not limited to graduate 12 women's varsity athletic programs. student famihes, and the demand for these apartments is great. To be eligible for the Graduate Student Residences University apartments, a graduate student Babcock House: The graduate residence hall must have been admitted to the University is designed to provide housing for full-time and be a full-time student as defined in this graduate students and to provide quiet areas catalog. Students may apply for Forest Park for graduate students to meet informally with before fulfilling the above requirements as one another and with members of the faculty. long as they are met at the time of assignment.

Babcock House is located on McDaniel Drive, Since the waiting time can approach one within easy walking distance of a number of year from date a student files an application major classroom areas as well as the Univer- until assignment, students should apply as sity Library, University theaters, and the Me- early as possible. A brochure with the appli- morial Union Building. Parking is available cation blank and information about Forest on campus. Park is available from: Forest Park Resident The structure, consisting of two six-story Manager, Building 16, Forest Park, Univer- towers connected at each floor by a common sity of New Hampshire, Durham, N.H. lounge, accommodates 180 men and women. 03824. The house also has a large main lounge with fireplace, two recreation rooms, a food vend- Summer Housing: Rooms in Babcock ing room, coin-operated laundry, TV room, House are available to graduate students tak- luggage storage, individual mailboxes, and ing courses during the summer. Students in- optional private room telephones. All rooms terested in summer accommodations should are single occupancy. Each room is furnished contact the Summer Housing Office, Pettee with a bed, mattress, easy chair, desk chair, House, University of New Hampshire, Dur- and built-in dcsk-dresser-wardrobe unit with ham, N.H. 03824 or complete and return the book shelves, mirror, medicine chest, and Summer Housing Application Form in the desk lamp. Residents provide their own bed- Summer Session Bulletin. ding. A full-time residence hall director lives in Off-Campus Housing: The Dean for Stu- the apartment on the ground floor and works dent Affairs office operates the Commuter/ in conjunction with a graduate student House Transfer Center, which assists students in Council to provide cultural and social pro- obtaining off-campus housing. As in most grams for the graduate community. The res- university communities, rents in the Durham idence hall director and five graduate resident area can be high and the supply limited. The assistants carry out the administrative respon- office does have listings of off-campus rentals sibilities of the house and are knowledgeable in Durham and the surrounding area that are about University policies and available per- updated weekly. sonal services. Students are encouraged to make every ef-

The rental charge for Babcock House is fort to come to campus so that the Com- $1,374 per student per academic year. All muter/Transfer Center staff will be able to rental fees arc subject to revision by the Board assist in finding accommodations. The office of Trustees. Following acceptance to the is located in the Memorial Union Building Graduate School, a student will be contacted and is open Monday through Friday. by the Office of Residential Life, Pettee House, University of New Hampshire, Dur- Dining: Graduate students may elect to take ham, N.H. 03824. their meals on a contractual basis with the University dining halls whether or not they live on campus. There are limited cooking facilities in Babcock House, but none in individual rooms. Information concerning meal plans is available from the Office of Residen- Counseling tial Life, Pettee House, University of New The Counseling and Testing Center offers Hampshire, Durham, N.H. 03824. students, without charge, professional assistance in meeting a variety of personal, edu- Health Services cational, and vocational problems. Services This service, located in Hood House, has a include individual and group counseling, vo- well-equipped clinic for diagnosis and treat- cational testing, and information on national ment of student health problems. Services in- testing programs such as the Graduate Record clude: out- and in-patient care, laboratory Examination and the Miller Analogies Test. tests, x-rays, limited mental health care, and Individual clinical testing is available. routine medications. For serious medical The center sponsors a variety ot student- problems, students arc generally referred to oriented activities, e.g., personal skills groups consultants and/or a local hospital. An emer- on such topics as communication, values clar- gency ambulance service is available. ification, and life planning. During the regular academic year. Hood All information about students' visits to the

House is staffed by full-time physicians, Counseling and Testing Center is confidential nurses, and part-time consultants. Regular and cannot be released without the permission clinic hours are held and appointments may of the student. be made upon request. Nurses arc available 24 hours a day and a duty doctor is always on Career Planning and Placement call. Service Hood House operates on a limited basis The Career Planning and Placement Service during holidays, semester breaks, and sum- assists students in planning for professional mer session. careers following completion of their degree Full-time graduate students must pay the work. The assistance available to students mandatory health fee. Part-time graduate stu- includes an on-campus interview program, dents may be required to pay the health fee which brings recruiting personnel to the cam- or pay a fee for services used (see fees, page pus between November and May; a library of 18). In addition, an optional group accident information on employers and career oppor- and sickness insurance policy is available tunities; career and life counseling; placement through Hood House. techniques workshops; and aid in finding summer employment. The service will also update students' records and provide assistance to alumni. Handicapped Student Services The Alumni Association The Office for Handicapped Student Services All recipients of a graduate degree from the assists disabled students with meeting their University are considered members of the

educational, cultural, and recreational needs Alumni Association. It organizes alumni ac- while at UNH. The coordinator invites ques- tivities including educational, cultural, and so- tions from students who are thinking of com- cial programs, both on and off campus. The ing to UNH. For information, write to: New Hampshire Alumnus publishes news of Handicapped Student Services, Room 101, alumni, the University, students, staff, and Huddleston Hall, University of New Hamp- faculty. shire, Durham, N.H. 03824. The New England Center for Campus Minister and Churches Continuing Education A full-time, on-campus minister is funded by The New England Center for Continuing Ed-

the Ecumenical Ministry to the University of ucation is adjacent to campus. This architec- New Hampshire. In addition, several denom- turally striking complex was built with a gift inations have designated chaplains. Places of from the Kellogg Foundation and is spon- worship for many faiths are convenient to the sored by the six New England state univers- campus area. In Dover are a synagogue, ities. The center provides residence and Greek Orthodox Church, and a Friends Meet- conference facilities for a wide variety of adult ing; Protestant, Catholic, Episcopal, and Lat- education programs. A closed-circuit TV sys- ter-day Saints churches are located in tem permits conference programs to be re- Durham. viewed in participants' rooms. Research and Support Services

Research is an essential part of graduate edu- and testing for the state agricultural industry. cation. It sustains a continuing infusion of The Ritzman Animal Nutrition Labora- knowledge, enhances the level of instruction, tory offers specialized research facilities. extends the frontiers of understanding, and makes human progress possible. It provides an opportunity for graduate students to learn Marine Program by working with instructors on independent The University's central location on the projects or as part of research teams. Ulti- northern New England coast near a variety of mately, the goal is to share discoveries and estuarine, coastal, insular, and continental- applications with others in the state, region, shelf environments has fostered a broad range and world. of marine educational and research activities for many years. These varied activities, which Research and Service occur within all of the University's colleges, are coordinated and supported by the Marine Facilities Program. Graduate degrees with marine op- The University has many diversified research tions are offered in the departments of botany projects, ranging from highly specialized in- and plant pathology, chemical engineering, vestigations in the physical and biological sci- chemistry, civil engineering, earth sciences, ences to broad interdisciplinary marine electrical and computer engineering, mechan- studies. Graduate students arc involved in re- ical engineering, microbiology, and zoology. search as project assistants working on re- Other departments involved with the Marine search leading to master's theses and doctoral Program are animal science, biochemistry, dissertations. These projects are conducted in computer science, mathematics, physical ed- individual departments, in University re- ucation, political science, and sociology and search centers, and in larger service units on anthropology. The Institute of Natural and campus. Environmental Resources, the Whittemore The Marine Program, supported by the School of Business and Economics, and the National Sea Grant College Program and state Complex Systems Research Center are also funding, has facilities both on campus and at involved with the Marine Program. the Jackson Estuarine Laboratory. The Application for graduate study should Space Science Center includes highly be made to the department listed above specialized facilities for faculty and graduate which is most closely related to the ap- students to participate in sophisticated engi- plicant's interest. neering and science research projects. Other Marine research by faculty and students specialized groups organized to facilitate in- proceeds on both an intra- and interdiscipli- terdisciplinary research are the Family Re- nary basis and is supported by University and search Laboratory, Marine Systems private funds as well as by organizations such Engineering Laboratory, and Ocean Pro- as the National Science Foundation, the Office cesses Analysis Laboratory. of Naval Research, the National Institutes of The recently established University In- Health, the U.S. Coast Guard, the Woods strumentation Center coordinates the use of Hole Oceanographic Institution, and the Na- many highly specialized instruments and pro- tional Sea Grant Program. UNH and the Uni- vides service to the many researchers on cam- versity of Maine together are a Sea Grant pus using instruments such as mass College. spectrometers, spectrophotometers, nuclear Marine research activities are principally magnetic resonance spectrometers, amino pursued in the neighboring environments of acid analyzers, etc. The University Instru- the Great Bay estuarine system, the coastal mentation Center has established a new elec- zone, the near-shore coastal zone, the Isles of tron microscope facility, which houses a Shoals, and the Gulf of Maine, but also in the transmission electron microscope and electron more remote areas of the world such as the microprobc and a scanning electron micro- North Sea and the Arctic, Antarctic, and mid- scope. The Instrumentation Center also pro- Pacific oceans. Some examples of research vides technical support in the operation and studies include those relating to marine food maintenance of highly specialized equipment. chains; marine biotoxins; trace metals; A Research Computer Center has been es- biological and thermal pollution; marine min- tablished recently with the acquisition of a eral resources; mariculture; marine resource PRIME computer system. management; marine law; environmental The Agricultural Experiment Station, one base-line studies; arctic under-ice systems; of the largest research and service units at the diving systems; submersibles; and buoy sys- University, provides research, information. tems and breakwaters.

10 The Marine Program building houses work ment material available in the University Li- spaces for ocean engineering, physical sci- brary. The library is a U.S. government ences, and other marine activities, as well as document depository, and a full-time docu- the Marine Program Office. The Marmc Sys- ments librarian is available. On-hne data base tems Engineering Laboratory and Ocean Pro- search services are offered at cost through the cess Analysis Laboratory serve faculty and Reference and Branch Departments. students from the four engineering depart- The library serves the University and the ments and others associated with activities town of Durham. A graduate student's spouse supporting projects and applied research in and children may use the facilities, which in- the marine environment. The Jackson Estuar- clude a professionally staffed children's room. ine Laboratory, located on Great Bay about During the regular academic year, the li- five miles from the campus and fourteen miles brary is open seven days a week. On vacations from the ocean via the Piscataqua River, sup- and during the summer, a more limited sched- ports the research of the marine life sciences ule is in effect. and earth sciences departments. Research vessels dock at an adjacent pier. The Diamond Island Ocean Engineering Station, located Computer Services about 40 miles from Durham on Diamond The University of New Hampshire has one Island in Lake Winnipesaukee, furnishes an of the largest and most accessible computer excellent fresh-water testing site for ocean installations of its type in the country. UNH systems. A running-seawater facility at Fort Computer Services operates several large Stark in Newcastle, near Portsmouth, is ncar- computers (two DEC 10s, two VAX 11 /780s, ing completion. The Shoals Marine Labora- two PRlMEs) in support of the combined tory, located about seven miles off the New instructional, research, and administrative Hampshire coast on Appledore Island of the data processing needs of the University. Isles of Shoals, a joint facility of UNH and More than 200 terminals are tied into the Cornell, is principally concerned with marine UNH computer, with three major clusters in life sciences educational and research activi- classroom buildings and one in a residence ties. A near-coast pier facility, situated about hall. Each cluster is staffed by a consultant. ten miles from Durham in Portsmouth, New Other terminals are located in Dimond Li- Hampshire, and two miles from the ocean on brary and dormitories. In addition, the de- Piscataqua River, serves research vessels the partments of mathematics, computer science, up to approximately 50 feet in length and and electrical and computer engineering have commercial fishing boats of the area. The R/V their own mini- and micro-computers and Jere Chase is a 45-foot research vessel equipped computer labs for course and research use. for a wide variety of marine research activities A Research Computing Group channels its in the estuarine and near-coast waters. collective energies and expertise into the support and promotion of research activities on the Durham campus. In addition to providing Library high-level consulting to researchers, the Library than The University houses more group also engages in program investigation than 6,000 periodi- 800,000 volumes, more and acquisition, and exploration and evalua- microfilm audio-tape cals, and substantial and tion of network links; members are familiar and record collections. Specialized subject col- with mini- and micro-computer systems as lections in four branches: are housed they relate to the needs of researchers on cam- engineering and chemistry in Parsons Hall, pus. biological mathematics in Kingsbury Hall, Short, noncredit courses are regularly of- Hall, and physics in sciences in Kendall fered, at nominal charge, to users of the fa- DeMeritt Hall. branches are administered The cilities. Extensive on-line system documen- a physical sciences librarian and a biolog- by tation is supplemented by a physical library ical sciences librarian. Media Services, a de- with a collection of manuals, technical publi- library, offers a large film partment of the cations, trade journals, and textbooks. collection, equipment loans including projec- Publications of Computer Services include tors cameras and monitors, and portable TV a newsletter, On-Line, and other specialized assistance, photographic and graphic design instructional materials. and audiovisual project consultation. Special services offered to graduate students include graduate study areas, with assignable locked book trucks. Graduate students may use the Interlibrary Loan System to supple-

11 . Admission and Registration Admissions

General Requirements 6. Submit any additional material required by Persons holding the baccalaureate degree from individual programs. a college or university of approved standing 7. Submit the Statement of Residence Form and wishing to take graduate level courses at (New Hampshire residents only). the University as part of a graduate degree Applications will not be reviewed until they program must apply for admission to the are complete. It is the applicant's responsibil- Graduate School. Admission to the Graduate ity to make sure that the required application School is both limited and competitive and is materials have been submitted by the appro- based solely upon academic qualifications and priate deadline. potential. All application material becomes part Application procedures are outlined below of the permanent records of the Univer- application materials and are included with the sity of New Hampshire and will not be available at the Graduate School. Specific pro- returned. Access to this material is limited are out- gram information and requirements under the Family Rights and Privacy Act of descriptions of this lined in the program 1974. Applicants who are not admitted, or application for ad- catalog. The completed who are admitted and do not register in the serves as the mission to graduate study also Graduate School, do not have access to their application for new students for assistant- application file. Material received as part of scholarships ships, fellowships, and full-time the application process will not be duplicated School. supported by the Graduate for personal use by the applicant nor for- Applicants to programs leading to the Mas- warded to a third party. Materials received degree meet, ter of Science for Teachers must from applicants who do not complete their requirements, one in addition to the normal application, who are not admitted, or who are admission requirements: of the following admitted and do not register are held for one 1) completion of education courses sufficient year before being destroyed. for certification, 2) three years of teaching experience, or 3) a current full-time teaching position. Applicants from Foreign Applicants may apply to only one specific Countries degree program. All applicants from nonEnglish speaking countries must, in addition to all of the above, Application Procedures provide TOEFL (Test of English as a Foreign Application materials may be requested from Language) scores. A minimum TOEFL score the Graduate School, University of New of 550 is required. TOEFL test scores are valid Hampshire, Horton Social Science Center, for only two years. A financial statement on Durham, N.H. 03824. official University forms is also required. Applications from residents of foreign Applicants for admission must: countries will be considered only for regular admission. 1 Submit the official application form in duplicate. An application file is not started until Application Deadlines the application form is received. Applications must be completed by December

2. Submit a $15 nonrefundable application 1, 1982, for the spring session 1983; by April

fee. 1, 1983, for the summer session 1983; and July

3. Request that two official transcripts from 1, 1983, for the fall session 1983. There is no each college/university attended be sent di- guarantee that applications completed after rectly to the Graduate School. these deadlines can be acted upon in time to 4. Request that three recommendations using permit registration in the desired session. official recommendation forms be sent di- Applicants for financial assistance (assis- rectly to the Graduate School. Letters of re- tantships, fellowships, scholarships) should commendation more than 12 months old are complete their application prior to February not acceptable. (Placement credentials more 15, 1983, to insure consideration for the 1983- than one year old may be accepted as one 84 academic year. letter of recommendation.) Foreign applicants who are not currently 5. Request the official test scores (GRE, residing in the United States will normally be GMAT), if required, be sent by the Educa- considered only for admission for the fall ses- tional Testing Service directly to the Graduate sion (1983) and must have their application School. Test scores more than five years old completed by April 1, 1983. Foreign appli- may not be acceptable. cants currently residing in the United States

12 should have their apphcation completed at action taken. While applicants with bachelor's least four months prior to the session for degrees may apply directly to certain doctoral which they are applying. programs, the Graduate School reserves the Programs that consider applications only right to offer these applicants admission at the for a specific session are noted on the "Instruc- master's degree level. tions for Application for Admission to Grad- uate Study," included with the application Admission Categories materials. Official offers of admission from the Graduate School are made for a specific term and year Incomplete Applications: Applications that in one of the following categories: remain incomplete after the first day of classes of the semester for which admission was de- Regular Admission: Regular admission may sired will be placed in an inactive status. A be offered to those applicants whose academic

written request is required to reactivate an records and supporting documents indicate application. that they are fully qualified to undertake graduate study in their chosen field. Application Review Once an application is complete, it is reviewed Provisional Admission: Provisional admis- by faculty members of the appropriate pro- sion may be offered to applicants whose aca-

gram. All material that is submitted as part of demic records and supporting documents the application receives careful consideration. indicate that they are qualified to undertake

The review is normally conducted by an ad- graduate study, but whose undergraduate missions committee of graduate faculty mem- preparation was not in the intended field of bers, which makes recommendations to the graduate study. Applicants offered provi- Graduate School concerning the admission of sional admission must meet the specific cri- apphcants to the program. Upon receipt of teria, usually undergraduate coursework, the committee's recommendation, the Grad- stated at the time of their admission before uate School carefully reviews the applicant's being admitted to regular graduate-student file. After making the final decision, the Grad- status.

uate School will inform all apphcants of the

13 Conditional Admission: Conditional ad- Special Students: Individuals holding bac- mission may be offered to those applicants calaureate degrees may register for graduate whose academic records indicate deficiencies courses on campus through the Division of but suggest some promise of success in grad- Continuing Education in Verrette House, or uate study. Students offered conditional ad- for graduate courses off campus through the mission must meet the specific requirements School for Lifelong Learning. These individ- stated at the time of their admission before uals are designated as "special students," and the conditional status will be removed. Stu- are not required to file an application for ad- dents on condition are not eligible for assis- mission to the Graduate School and are not tantships, fellowships, and scholarships candidates for a graduate degree. Special stu- offered through the Graduate School. dents are not normally permitted to register as full-time students, (see nine-credit rule on Offers of admission, regular, provisional, page 22). or conditional, to applicants who are in the final year of an undergraduate, or, in some University of New Hampshire Employ- cases, a graduate-degree, program are contin- ees: Members of the University of New gent upon the successful completion of that Hampshire faculty with the rank of assistant degree program. An official final transcript professor or above will not be admitted to the showing grades and the awarding of the de- graduate programs. Full-time staff employees gree must be received by the Graduate School of the University who do not hold academic prior to enrolling for the graduate program. rank will not ordinarily be admitted to doc- Applicants who cannot enroll in the term toral programs in the department in which for which admission was offered may request they are employed. The above regulations to have their admission deferred for up to pertain even to individuals who resign their one year. Such requests must be in writing positions. and will be considered only once. Because enrollments are limited and competition for Honorary Fellow^s: Qualified scholars who admission may vary from year to year, such may temporarily desire the privilege of using requests may not be granted. the library and research facilities of the Uni- versity and who are not candidates for a de- Additional Information gree may, upon recommendation of the Dean Early Admission—University of New of the Graduate School and the approval of Hampshire Seniors: Qualified senior stu- the president of the University, be appointed dents at the University of New Hampshire honorary fellows without stipend. Honorary may be admitted to the Graduate School pro- fellows shall not be required to pay any vided they have followed normal application charges except the cost of unusually expensive procedures; they must have been admitted for supplies or equipment. the semester in which they wish to enroll in courses for graduate credit. A 3.2 cumulative Applicants Not Admitted: Applicants who grade point average is normally required to are denied admission may have their applica- be considered for early admission. Such sen- tions reconsidered only if they furnish signif- iors are normally admitted prior to the start icant additional material that was not available of their last undergraduate semester. Seniors at the time of the original decision, such as who have been admitted under early admis- evidence of further academic achievement, or sion may register for a maximum of two more recent and significantly improved GRE courses for graduate credit (see also dual credit or GMAT scores. Reapplication is not en- on page 22). couraged.

Admission to the 3/2 Program: Under- graduate UNH students may be admitted to Registration one of the approved five-year combined bachelor's degree/Master of Business Administra- Academic Year tion (see undergraduate catalog) programs, Students admitted to the Graduate School which normally commence during the fall se- must have their programs approved by their mester of their senior year. Application to the adviser or the chairperson of their guidance

Graduate School is made during the second committee. Registration is held the first Mon- semester of the junior year. Interested stu- day after classes begin each semester. All tui- dents should contact the assistant dean in the tion and fees are payable at the time of Whittemore School for information. registration. Registration information and the Time and Room Schedule may be obtained from

14 the Registrar's Office, Thompson Hall. Ad- a change is made in the local, campus, and/or mitted students may not register through the mailing address. Division of Continuing Education during the academic year. Summer Session Although many graduate level courses arc of- Continuous Registration: Students who are fered during the Summer Session, the Uni- in residence and using University facilities arc versity does not guarantee that any particular required to register each semester. Master's course will be offered. The availability of in- students who have completed all course re- dividual faculty members to supervise requirements and have previously registered for search or to participate in qualifying the maximum number of thesis or project examinations and final examinations or defen- credits and are on campus completing their ses during the Summer Session varies from master's program must register for Master's year to year. Continuing Enrollment. Doctoral students Course information and registration mate- who are in residence and have completed all rials may be obtained from the Division of course requirements must register for Doc- Continuing Education, Verrette House. toral Research 999 each semester even if the Deadlines for completion of degree require- minimum requirement (two semesters) has ments for the 1983 Summer Session arc listed been met. on page 129 of this catalog.

Full-time Students: Graduate students reg- Maximum Load: The maximum graduate istered for nmc or more credits. Master's load allowed is four credits for a four-week Continuing Enrollment, or Doctoral Research summer session and eight credits for an eight- 999 are classified as full-time students. Stu- week summer session. Only under unusual dents holding appointments as graduate assis- circumstances will a student be allowed to tants or project assistants are also considered exceed these limits, and then only with the full-time and must register for a minimum of recommendation of the student's adviser and six credits. Master's Continuing Enrollment, the approval of the Dean of the Graduate or doctoral research each semester. School.

Maximum Load: The maximum graduate Nonregistration load allowed is 16 credits (12 credits for a find it nec- student on an assistantship). Only under un- Leave of Absence: Students who essary to interrupt their graduate programs usual circumstances will a student be allowed request leave to to exceed these limits, and then only with the may a of absence by writing recommendation of the student's adviser and the Dean of the Graduate School stating the length of, the the approval of the Dean of the Graduate reasons for, and the anticipated School. interruption. Leaves are granted for a specific time, usually not to exceed one calendar year. Dropping and Adding Courses: Graduate Students who are on approved leaves of ab- students may add or drop courses in acccord- sence must notify the Graduate School at least ance with the procedures and deadlines pub- four weeks prior to the start of classes for the re- lished by the Registrar's Office in the Time term in which graduate work is to be and Room Schedule. Deadlines are also pub- sumed. Students who do not return from a their lished in the calendar on page 128 of this leave of absence as approved will have catalog. degree status discontinued and will be required to apply for readmission. Auditing Courses: A graduate student may, from with the approval of his or her adviser and Withdrawal: A student may withdraw the faculty member concerned, audit any the Graduate School during any semester by obtaining a withdrawal from the regis- course at the University. The deadline for reform trar or the Graduate School. This form should questing an audit is Friday of the second week the student's adviser, the of classes. Subsequent requests for change to be signed by Dean audit must be petitioned and be approved by of the Graduate School, and other appropriate the course faculty member, the student's ad- University officials. When completed, the Stu- viser, and the Dean of the Graduate School. form should be filed with the registrar. dents who formally withdraw are required to apply for readmission if they subsequently Change of Address: It is the responsibility their program. of the student to complete a change of address desire to resume academic form in the Office of the Registrar whenever

15 Degree Status Discontinued: Students who Change of Degree do not formally withdraw and do not register An enrolled student who wishes to pursue a during a twelve-month period or do not re- degree program other than the one for which turn from an approved leave of absence are admission was granted originally should file considered inactive and will have their degree an application for a change in degree with the status discontinued. Students are notified by Graduate School. Change of degree requests the Graduate School when this administrative should be filed by the regular admission dead- for action is taken and arc required to apply lines listed on page 128. The Dean of the readmission if they subsequently desire to re- Graduate School will notify the student of the sume their academic program. decision after consulting with the appropriate departments. Administrative Withdrawal for Reasons Students enrolled in UNH master's proof Health and Procedures for Readmis- grams who intend to pursue the Ph.D. in the sion: The Dean of the Graduate School, in same department in which they were admitted consultation with professional University for the master's degree should submit to the Health Services officials, may temporarily Dean of the Graduate School an application suspend a graduate student from the Univer- for a change in degree program. This appli- sity without prejudice for reasons of seriously cation will be reviewed by the Graduate impaired physical or mental health and/or in School, which will notify the student of the consideration of the physical health, safety, decision. If such students do not file a change- and well-being of members of the University in-degree application before receiving the community. Such action shall be taken only master's degree, they will be required to sub- for bona fide health and safety emergencies mit a new application for admission to study and should not be used as a means of exclud- for the Ph.D. degree. ing qualified handicapped students. The dean or designee shall provide the student with a written statement of the reasons for the temporary suspension. The student may request a hearing with the dean or designee to dispute the reasons. The student may be represented at the hearing by a member of the University community. If the student fails to request such a hearing within ten days of beginning the temporary suspension, or if the temporary suspension is upheld at the hearing, the temporary suspension shall be changed to an administrative withdrawal.

Readmission is contingent upon receipt by the directors of counseling and/or health services, or their agents, of a medical release from a licensed attending medical authority; an evaluation by University Health Services; and a personal interview with the Dean of the Graduate School, who, on the basis of the information received, will either approve or disapprove the application.

Readmission: Students who withdraw or who have their degree status discontinued are required to apply for readmission. Readmis- sion forms are available at the Graduate School and must be processed at least four weeks prior to the start of classes for the term in which readmission is sought. Students are not guaranteed readmission.

16 Fees and Financial Assistance

Fees

Tuition and fees vary according to whether England Land Grant Universities. The pro- or not the student is a legal resident ot the gram is designed to provide any admitted stu- state of New Hampshire and/or is enrolled dent at one of the six land-grant universities full or part time. All charges are payable at access to the full range of talent and resources the time of registration. available in the region. Under the agreement, graduate students may, with the approval of New Hampshire Residents the Dean of the Graduate School at UNH and Each graduate student is classified as a resident the graduate dean of the host university, take or nonresident for tuition purposes at the time advantage of courses or other special resources of admission to the University. The decision, not available at UNH. Specific information made by the Graduate School, is based upon about the program may be obtained from the information furnished by the student's appli- Dean of the Graduate School, Horton Social cation and any other relevant information. Science Center, UNH, Durham, NH 03824. All applicants living in New Hampshire are required to submit a notarized statement to Tuition Waiver for Senior the effect that they have been legally domi- Citizens ciled in New Hampshire continuously for at Any New Hampshire resident senior citizen least 12 months immediately prior to regis- who submits evidence of being 65 years of tering for the term for which in-state status age or over, and whose participation is not is claimed. intended for economic improvement, will be Students admitted from states other than allowed to take courses at UNH with the New Hampshire or from foreign countries are tuition waived. Such waivers shall cover the considered nonresident throughout their en- cost of tuition only, and are limited to a max- tire attendance at the University unless they imum of eight academic credits per semester shall have acquired bona fide domicile in New for each eligible individual. Admission into Hampshire. Changes in residency will only particular courses will be granted on a space- occur if the student can clearly establish that available basis, at the discretion of the grad- his or her residence in New Hampshire is for uate dean. All other costs of attendance are to some purpose other than the temporary one be borne by the student. of obtaining an education at the University.

The burden of proof in all cases is upon the applicant. In all cases, the University reserves the right to make the final decision as to resident status for tuition purposes. The Univer- sity Rules Governing Tuition Rates arc fully set forth in the application for admission pack- age; all students are bound by them.

New England Regional Program The University of New Hampshire participates in the New England Regional Student Program administered by the New England Board of Higher Education. Under this program, admitted graduate students from New England may qualify for regional tuition rates (New Hampshire resident tuition, plus 25 per- cent) if the program to which they are admitted is one which is not available at their home state university. Inquiries and requests tor further information may be directed to the Dean of the Graduate School, Horton Social Science ^^^^^^H^*^ Center, UNH, Durham, NH 03824 or to the New England Board of Higher Education, Center School, School Street, Wenham, MA 01984.

Sub-Degree Exchange Program The Graduate School of the University of New Hampshire participates in a Sub-Degree Exchange Program sponsored by the New —

Schedule of Fees The following schedule of fees is in effect each semester of the 1982-83 academic year. Re- quired, nonrefundable fees for all students include a Memorial Union fee, which funds the personnel, programs, and maintenance of this buildmg; a Student Services fee, which partially funds the programs and services available in the Division of Student Affairs, including Handicapped Student Services and the Commuter/Transfer Center; and a health fee, which partially funds Health Services. The services and facilities are available to all the extent to which each student uses them cannot be the factor by which assessment is determined. Financial Assistance tuition scholarships. These awards provide only tor waiver of tuition charges and are General Information subject to the maintenance of a high scholastic There are several forms of financial assistance record in the Graduate School. Application is available to graduate students most of which made to the student's department. are awarded for an academic year commenc- ing in September. To be eligible tor any as- Part-time Tuition Scholarships: Up to 25 sistance, the student must first be admitted to superior students may be granted part-time the Graduate School. The Graduate School tuition scholarships. These awards provide a normally administers and awards the fellow- waiver of tuition charges of $300 and are ship and scholarship programs. Assistantships awarded each semester. Applications are and associateships arc normally awarded by available at the Graduate School Office. Uni- the individual graduate programs. Loans and versity employees or family members who work-study programs arc administered by the arc eligible for staff benefits arc not eligible to Financial Aid Office. The application for ad- receive part-time tuition scholarships. mission with supporting documents serves as the application for new graduate students for Dissertation Fellowships: Dissertation Fel- the fellowship, scholarship, and assistantship lowships with stipends of up to $4,600 for a programs available to them and should be maximum tenure of one academic year are completed by February 15 for the following available." These awards include a waiver of academic year. Separate application forms are the doctoral research registration fee for the required for the loan and work-study pro- period of the award. Applications should be grams administered by the Financial Aid Of- made to the Dean of the Graduate School. fice and arc available at that office in Thompson Hall. The deadline for receipt of Martin Luther King Assistantships: Martin these applications is May 1. Luther King Assistantships provide support for qualitled members of minority groups. A Fellowships and Scholarships letter of application should be made to the University of New Hampshire Fellow- Dean of the Graduate School. ships: A limited number of three-year "Uni- versity of New Hampshire Fellowships" are Summer Fellowships for Teaching Assis- awarded to outstanding doctoral students. tants: A limited number of Summer Fellow- Each recipient is given an opportunity to ships are available for students who have held spend the first year in full-time study, the graduate assistantships involving teaching second year as a teaching assistant, and the during a previous academic year. The stipend third year as a research assistant. The stipends for summer study is $1,000. for this program are $4,200 for the first academic year, $4,400 for the second academic Assistantships year, and $4,600 for the third academic year. Approximately 380 graduate and project as- In addition, the award provides $1,000 sup- sistantships are awarded annually to superior port for each of two summers and waiver of students. Appointments are for one academic tuition. These awards are made by the Grad- year. An appointment may be renewed pro- uate School Student Fellowship Selection vided that funds are available and that the Committee from nominations from the var- student's academic performance, as well as ious programs. performance in carrying out the responsibili-

ties of the assistantship, is satisfactory. Stu- Graduate Scholarships for Merit: A recip- dents normally are involved in assistantship ient of a graduate assistantship or a project activities for 20 hours a week. All graduate assistantship who is newly admitted to a students holding appointments as graduate or Ph.D. program and has outstanding qualifi- project assistants must be admitted on a reg- cations may be awarded a Graduate Scholar- ular or provisional basis to the Graduate ship for Merit. The scholarship will School and must register for a minimum of supplement the stipend to provide a total level six credits (maximum of 12 credits), or Mas- of academic year support of $4,800-$5,100. ter's Continuing Enrollment, or doctoral re- Continuation of a Graduate Scholarship for search during each semester in which they Merit into succeeding years will be contingent hold their appointments. Such students are upon the student's demonstration of superior considered full-time students. A limited num- performance in a doctoral program. ber of newly admitted doctoral students who are awarded assistantships may also receive a Full Tuition Scholarships: Up to 55 supe- Graduate Scholarship for Merit as explained rior students may be granted academic-year above.

19 Inquiries regarding assistantships should ment. Graduate associates receiving $3,000 or be addressed to the chairperson or direc- less per academic year may be exempted from tor of graduate studies of the appropriate the payment of half of their tuition during the department or program. academic year of their appointment.

Appointments arc made in the following cat- Summer Assistantships: Full-time summer egories: employment may be available tor project assistants or graduate assistants. The monthly Graduate Assistants: Most assistants arc in- rate for full-time employment for graduate volved in assisting faculty members in in- assistants ranges from $930 to $1,020. Stu- structional activities. A limited number of dents are normally employed for a maximum appointments involve assisting in research ac- of two months and are not normally permit- tivities in the Agricultural Experiment Sta- ted to register for summer session cour-ses. tion. Stipends for graduate assistants are $4,200 for the 1982-83 academic year ($4,500 Loan and Work-Study Programs for assistants in chemistry, physics, and en- National Direct Student Loans: To be eli- gineering). Doctoral students who have held gible for consideration, a student must be an an assistantship for two years may quahfy for admitted degree candidate carrying at least a stipend of $4,600 per academic year. Uni- one-half the full-time academic load as defined versity-supported graduate assistants receiv- by the University, be a U.S. citizen or a per- ing the full academic-year stipend may be manent resident of the U.S., and establish exempted from the payment of tuition during need for a loan that is to be used for educa- the academic year of their appointment and tional purposes only. the following summer session. University- supported graduate assistants receiving half UNH Loans: To be eligible for considera- the normal academic-year stipend may be ex- tion, a student must be a registered degree empted from the payment of half of their tui- candidate. Financial need must be clearly es- tion in the academic year of their appointment tablished, and if approved, the loan may be and the following summer session. used for educational purposes only. The maximum amount granted to a student is $1,(J00 Project Assistants: These assistants aid fac- during his or her undergraduate and/or grad- ulty members in externally funded research uate work. projects. Stipends for graduate assistants are $4,200 for the 1982-83 "academic year ($4,500 College Work-Study Program: With the for assistants in chemistry, physics, and en- aid of federal funds, the University is able to gineering). Doctoral students who have held provide employment opportunities on cam- an assistantship for two years may qualify for pus or in various off-campus agencies. To be a stipend of $4,600 per academic year. Project eligible for consideration, a student must be assistants receiving the full academic-year sti- an admitted degree candidate carrying at least pend may be exempted from the payment of one-half the full-time academic load as defined tuition during the academic year of their ap- by the University and demonstrate financial pointment. Project assistants receiving half need as determined by the Financial Aid Of- the normal academic-year stipend may be fice. Work during the academic year is usually exempted from the payment of half of their on campus. tuition in the academic year of their appointment. Application material for the above programs may be obtained from the Finan- Graduate Associates: A very limited num- cial Aid Office, Thompson Hall. A May ber of highly qualified graduate students may 1 priority deadline is in effect. be appointed to teaching or research positions as graduate associates. The academic load for Guaranteed Student Loan Programs: Stu- students appointed to these positions will not dents may apply for as much as $5,000 per exceed two full courses or doctoral research year from a bank or other financial institution registration per semester. Stipends are nego- participating in the Guaranteed Student Loan tiable up to $7,000 per academic year accord- Program. Qualified borrowers pay no interest ing to the qualifications and duties of the while attending college. Repayment of prin- student. Graduate associates receiving a sti- cipal and interest begins nine months after the pend of more than $3,000 per academic year student ceases a full-time course of study. may be exempted from the payment of tuition Check with your local bank for further details during the academic year of their appoint- and current interest charges.

20 Academic Regulations and Degree Requirements

It is the responsibility of the student to be- mittee, wishes to recommend that credit be come familiar with the academic regulations given for work completed with a C or C + , and degree requirements of the Graduate the advisory committee shall forward its re- School as well as the special requirements of commendation, with appropriate justifica- his or her own academic program. tion, to the Dean of the Graduate School within one month after conclusion of the course. Normally these courses will be in elec- Academic Regulations tive courses outside the student's major area. Graduate credits may be earned m courses numbered from 700 through 898 and m Mas- Credit/Fail Grades: A "CR" grade is given ter's Thesis 899 and Doctoral Research 999. for complete, approved theses and disserta- The faculty of each graduate program pre- tions, as well as other approved courses and scribes the courses that make up the degree seminars. program. In addition, the Graduate School has general requirements for master's and With the permission of the instructor at the doctoral degree programs. time of registration, a graduate student may elect to take independent study courses on a 800-level courses: are offered for graduate credit/fail basis. Students electing this option credit only and therefore are only open to should ask the instructor to send written no- admitted or special graduate students. tification to the Graduate School and Regis- trar's Office that the graduate student is taking 700-level courses: are advanced-level under- the course credit/fail. The undergraduate graduate courses and may be taken for grad- pass/fail option is not available to graduate uate credit. students.

600-level courses: are advanced-level under- Audit Grades: An "AU" grade is assigned graduate courses, which may be taken for for completion of courses for which audit ap- graduate credit under limited conditions by proval was granted. No credit is earned. degree candidates only, provided the courses are given in a department other than the one Incomplete Grades: An "IC" grade is as- in which the degree is earned and are ap- signed with the approval of the instructor proved by the Dean of the Graduate School. only for excused unfinished work. The work Courses taken off campus at the 600 level will must be completed and submitted to the in- not be approved for graduate credit. structor by the last day of classes of the semester immediately following the one in Graduate credits will not be given for any which the incomplete was granted. A petition 600- or 700-level courses that are open to or requesting an extension of time, approved by have freshmen or sophomores enrolled. the instructor, may be submitted to the Dean of the Graduate School by the last day of Grades classes. An extension will be granted by the The following grades are used at the Univer- dean only under unusual circumstances. An sity: A, A-, B + , B, B-, C + , C, C-, D + , incomplete grade automatically becomes an F

D, D — , F. Graduate credit is normally if not removed or a petition for an extension granted only for coursework completed with approved within the allowed time period. a grade of B— or higher. Individual programs This policy also applies to students who with- may have stricter requirements for major draw from the University or who arc not courses. Grade points and averages are not currently registered. calculated for graduate students. An "lA" grade is assigned for approved continuing courses such as thesis or doctoral AF Grades: An "AF" grade. Administrative research and remains on the record until the

F, is assigned for failure to either drop or course requirements are completed. complete the course. An AF is considered a failing grade by the Graduate School. W Grades: If a student withdraws from school or drops a course prior to mid-semes- C, C+ Grades: The Dean of the Graduate ter, the course(s) will not appear on the stu- School may, under limited conditions, ap- dent's permanent record. If a student prove up to eight credits of C or C+ grades withdraws from school, or for compelling for graduate credit. When a student's advisory nonacademic reasons, submits an approved committee or a student's adviser, in conjunc- petition to drop a course after mid-semester, tion with the appropriate departmental com- a notation of "W" will be shown on the

21 student's academic record, together with the courses at another university for transfer after grade in the course at the time the course is enrolling at UNH should obtain approval of dropped. their adviser and the graduate dean prior to enrolling for the course. Since the doctoral number of Academic Standards degree does not require a specific courses, credits are not normally transferred Any graduate student receiving failing grades onto doctoral students' academic records. in nine or more credits will be dismissed from the Graduate School. Any grade below the B— level, including grades of C or C+ which Special Student Credits may have been approved for graduate credit, Nine-Credit Rule: A maximum of nine will, for the purposes of determining aca- credits earned in University of New Hamp- demic standing, be considered failing grades. shire graduate courses by a special student

Failing grades (below B — ) received in under- may, upon recommendation of the program graduate courses taken while the student is in faculty and approval of the Dean of the Grad- the Graduate School are counted in the cu- uate School, be applied to a student's degree mulative total of failing credits. Students are program. The nine-credit limitation applies advised that this academic standing require- to all courses completed or in process on the ment is the minimum standard required by date when the official letter of admission is the Graduate School. written. Each individual program may set and an- nounce standards for coursework and research Off-Campus Courses achievement that are more rigorous than this Credits earned off campus will be applied to- minimum standard. Thus, students in some ward a graduate degree only if recommended programs may be dismissed if they accumu- by the major department and approved by the late less than nine credits of failing grades Graduate School. UNH courses offered off and/or fail to make adequate progress in other campus that are not hsted in the Graduate Cat- aspects of their graduate program. alog or specifically approved by the Dean of the Graduate School will not be approved for Dual Credit graduate credit. UNH Seniors: University of New Hamp- shire seniors who have been admitted to the 12-Credit Rule: A maximum of 12 credits, Graduate School under early admission (see not including thesis, may be earned in UNH page 14) may, upon recommendation of the courses taken off the Durham campus. Cred- department and approval of the Graduate its earned off campus by a special graduate School, be allowed, for a maximum of two student will be counted as part of the 12 cred-

800-level courses, to count credits toward its. Credits transferred from another univer- both a bachelor's and master's degree. Dual sity will also count as a part of the 12 credits credit forms must be completed and approved allowed. by the Dean of the Graduate School at the beginning of the semester for which dual Exceptions to the 12-Credit Rule: Students credit is sought. Dual credit forms are avail- who are admitted to external graduate degree able at the Graduate School. programs (currently the Executive MBA program) are exempt from the 12-credit rule. Transfer Credit Students who are admitted to all other the Candidates for the master's degree and the graduate degree programs are subject to students Certificate of Advanced Graduate Study 12-credit rule. Exceptions for these (C.A.G.S.) may request that up to six semes- may be granted on a course-by-course basis. of the ter credit hours earned at another institution, Courses taught by regular members faculty of may be approved which is regionally accredited at the graduate graduate UNH 12-credit rule. Grad- level, be transferred to count toward a mas- for exception to the The list of the approved ter's program or C.A.G.S. All courses pre- uate School maintains a sented for transfer must have been completed courses. It is the responsibility of students 12-credit to with a grade of B or better and must have who have reached the maximum if the desired been taken for graduate credit; courses cannot check with their adviser to see toward their degree be transferred for credit if already applied in course(s) can be applied School to see whole or in part toward another degree. program, and with the Graduate exception Transfer of credits must be recommended by if the course has been approved for the program faculty and approved by the to the 12-credit rule. Dean of the Graduate School. Students taking

22 Master's Degree Requirements

General Examining Committee: Examining committees, when required, are appointed by the Credits: A minimum of 30 graduate credits Dean of the Graduate School, upon recom- is required for ail master's degrees. Many pro- mendation of the department or program con- grams require substantially more than the cerned. Normally three members arc minmium 30 credits. Individual program re- required. The Dean of the Graduate School is quirements are outlined in the program dean ex officio member of all examining com- scriptions of this catalog. Graduate credits are mittees. normally earned in courses numbered 700- 899. Master's candidates must earn at least Thesis Option eight credits in courses numbered 800-898 Students who are in a thesis program are re- (Thesis credits cannot be used to meet this quired to conduct independent research and requirement). Up to four credits earned in prepare a scholarly paper for submission to courses numbered 600-599 may be taken for the Graduate School. Each department will graduate credit by master's degree candidates determine the date when the candidate must provided the courses are approved by the submit for approval a statement of the subject Dean of the Graduate School and given in a of the thesis and the date when the thesis must department other than the one in which the be completed. Students writing a thesis degree is earned. should obtain a copy of the Thesis and Disser- tation Manual from the Graduate School. Stu- Residency: A student will normally spend at dents who are in a thesis program may also least one calendar year, or the equivalent, in be required to pass a final examination. The satisfying the requirements for the degree. regulations concerning this exam are the same as those in the nonthesis option above. The Master's Continuing Enrollment: Master's thesis committee will normally also serve as students who have completed all course re- the examining committee. quirements and have previously registered for the maximum number of thesis or project Thesis Credits: A minimum of 6 and a max- credits and are on campus completing their imum of 10 thesis credits may be applied to- master's program must register for Master's ward a master's degree. The exact number of Continuing Enrollment. credits to be applied toward the degree will be determined by the faculty of the individual Time Limit: All graduate work for any mas- programs. No thesis credit shall be given until ter's degree must be completed within six the completed thesis has been approved by years of the time of registration for the first the thesis committee. Satisfactory acceptance graduate work applied toward the degree (in- of the thesis will be recorded as a credit (Cr). cluding special and transfer credits). Progress toward the degree will be carefully monitored Thesis Committee: A master's thesis must by the adviser and the Graduate School to be approved by a committee composed of the ensure that adequate advancement is made to- faculty member under whose direction it was ward the completion of the program and that written and two other members ot the grad- any deficiencies noted at the time of admission uate faculty nominated by the department are removed. chairperson and appointed by the Dean of the Graduate School. Nonthesis Option Students who are in a nonthesis program may Submission of Thesis: Two copies of the be required to pass a final examination. This approved thesis, ready for binding, shall be examination may be oral, written, or both. A submitted to the Graduate School Office as candidate will be permitted only two oppor- soon after approval as possible, but not less tunities to take the final examination for the than two weeks before Commencement. master's degree. The time of final examina- Binding fees will be paid at the Graduate tions will be at the convenience of the de- School. Most programs require an additional partment concerned, except that all such one copy of the thesis. examinations must be given at least two weeks before the Commencement date at which the degree is to be conferred. Further regulations governing the final written examination, when required, will be made by the department concerned, subject to the approval of the Dean of the Graduate School.

23 Certificate of Advanced

Graduate Study program and preparing for the qualifying examination, and will administer the examina- Requirements tion. Requirements for completion of the Certifi- cate of Advanced Graduate Study are found Qualifying Examination: The qualifying under the program descriptions in Education, examination is required and may be written, on page 54. oral, or both. This examination will test: 1) the student's general knowledge in the stu- Doctoral Degree dent's major and minor work and 2) the student's fitness for engaging in research, Requirements particularly in the subject proposed for the dissertation. The results of the examination General will be communicated by the chairperson of

The degree of Doctor of Philosophy is con- the student's program to the Dean of the ferred on qualified candidates who have Graduate School. passed an oral or written examination on the subject matter of their field of study, who Language/Research Tool Requirement: have completed an original investigation in Each doctoral program has its own language this field and have embodied the results in an and/or research tool requirements. These re- acceptable dissertation, and who have passed quirements can be found in the individual pro- an oral examination in defense of the disser- gram descriptions. tation. The degree of Doctor of Philosophy is essentially a research degree. It is not given Degree Candidacy: A doctoral student is merely for the completion of course credits. advanced to candidacy for the degree by the Dean of the Graduate School after the student

Credits: There is no specific number of has passed the qualifying examination, met courses required for the Ph.D. the language or proficiency requirements as are deemed desirable by the student's pro- Residency: All doctoral students must be gram, and declared a topic for dissertation registered each semester that they use Uni- research. versity facilities. A minimum of three academic years of graduate study is required for Doctoral Committee: After the student has the doctorate. Resident graduate work done been advanced to candidacy, a doctoral com- at other universities may be counted toward mittee will be appointed to supervise and pass the minimum requirement upon approval of on the dissertation and administer the final the guidance committee and the Dean of the examination. This committee will be nomi- Graduate School, but one full academic year nated by the department of major concentra- must be in residence at the University of New tion and appointed by the Dean of the Hampshire. In individual cases, the major de- Graduate School. It shall consist of a mini- partment and the Dean of the Graduate School mum of five members, usually three from the may grant permission to pursue the research major department and two from related de- for the dissertation at another institution partments. The Dean of the Graduate School where access to special facilities would be ad- is an ex officio member of all doctoral com- vantageous. mittees.

Doctoral Research: A minimum of two se- Time Limit: All graduate work for the doc- mesters of registration in doctoral research torate must be completed within eight years is required. However, doctoral students using of the beginning of doctoral study, unless the University facilities while engaging in disser- student entered with a master's degree in the tation research must register for 999 each se- same field, in which case the doctorate must mester, even if the minimum requirement has be completed within seven years. The begin- been met. ning of doctoral study is defined as the beginning date of the earliest course applied to the Guidance Committee: A guidance commit- doctoral record. The student must be ad- tee will be appointed by the Dean of the Grad- vanced to candidacy within five years of the uate School upon the recommendation of the beginning of doctoral study, or within four program faculty as soon as possible after a years if the student entered with a master's student has begun study for the doctoral de- degree in the same field. gree. The committee will have the responsibility of assisting the student in outlining a

24 Dissertation: The dissertation must be a con- pies of the approved dissertation, ready for tribution to scholarship in the student's dis- binding, shall be turned in to the Graduate cipHne, embodying the results of significant School Office. Binding, microfilming, and and original research, and a mature and com- copyright fees will be paid at the Graduate petent piece ot writing. Students writing dis- School. Most departments require an addi- sertations should obtain a copy of the Thesis tional one copy of the dissertation. Students and Dissertation Alatiual from the Graduate should consult their advisers concerning dis- School. sertation requirements. Publication of the dissertation by Univer- Final Defense: A copy of the completed sity Microfilms will be required, and the cost dissertation must be made available to the will be assumed by the student. Students are members of the examining committee two urged to protect their research by copyright- weeks before the final examination date. ing their dissertation at the time of microfilming. If the material presented in the The final oral examination is conducted by is it should be desig- the doctoral committee and is intended to give dissertation published, the candidate an opportunity to defend the nated as having been accepted as a doctoral dissertation. A written final examination, on dissertation by the University of New Hamp- subject matter not covered in the qualifying shire. examination, may also be required. This written examination is conducted by the major Graduation department. These final examinations must be Students are required to file an "Intent to completed by the date listed in the calendar Graduate Card" with the Registrar's Office at on page 128. After consultation with the ma- the beginning of the semester in which they jor department, the dean may appoint, for intend to graduate. Specific information con- participation in the final oral examination, ad- cerning graduation is available at the Graduate ditional members of the faculty under whom School or the Registrar's Office in Thompson the student has worked. The doctoral com- Hall. mittee alone shall decide on the merits of the Students should be aware that all course- candidate's performance by a majority vote. work taken prior to the official awarding of the degree will apply only to that degree pro- Submission of Dissertation: As soon after gram. the examination as possible, but not less than Deadlines for 1982-83 graduation are listed two weeks prior to Commencement, two coin the calendar on page 128.

25 26 Departmental Requirements and Course Descriptions

Key Russ

When two course numbers precede a course title and are connected by a hyphen, the first semester of the course, or its equivalent, is a prerequisite to the second semester. If the course numbers are separated by a comma, qualified students may take the second semester without having had the first. The notation "Lab" indicates that laboratory sessions are a part of the course. Each prerequisite for a course is separated from the other prerequisites by a semicolon; e.g., Prereq: Educ 807; Psyc 841. If permission (of the instructor, department, adviser, or committee) is a prerequisite for all students, it is listed among the prerequisites: e.g., Prereq: Educ 807; Psyc 841; permission. If on the other hand, permission may be substituted for one or more of the listed prerequisites, it follows the other prerequisites and is separated from them by a slash mark: e.g., Prereq: Educ 807; Psyc 841; /or permission. If permission may be substituted for only one of the prerequisite courses, it is listed with the course for which it may be substituted: e.g., Prereq: Educ 807 or permission; Psyc 841. Cr/F following the description indicates that no letter grade is given but that the course is graded credit/fail. For up-to-date information about when a course is offered; who teaches the course; the number of recitations, lectures, labs, and such, students are referred to each semester's Time and Room Schedule, which carries a complete schedule of courses for the semester.

Department Abbreviations The following department abbreviations are used. An asterisk indicates those disciplines in which graduate programs are offered. Animal Sciences

Animal Sciences (AnSc) 711. COMPARATIVE ANIMAL GENETICS Chairperson: Thomas P. Fairchild How heredity affects domestic animals, poultry, other mammals, and fish; emphasis on the organ- PROFESSORS: Walter M. Collins; Thomas P. ism and population. Quantitative inheritance; prin- Fairchild; James B. Holter; Samuel C. Smith; ciples of selection; disease resistance; statistical and Richard G. Strout experimental techniques. Prereq: 4 cr. of genetics; ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: William A. /or permission. Mr. Collins. Lab. 4 cr. Condon; Walter E. Hylton; Charles G. Schwab ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: William E. 712. ANIMAL BREEDING AND Berndtson; Roger A. Cady; Ginny W. Darr; IMPROVEMENT Alan H. Parsons; Roger E. Wells Principles of selection and breeding systems as they apply to the genetic improvement of dairy cattle, An applicant admitted to graduate study in ani- livestock, ana horses. Prereq: AnSc 711 or permis- mal sciences is expected to have had sufficient un- sion. Mr. Cady. Lab. 4 cr. (Not offered every dergraduate training in the basic biological sciences year.) to qualify for special work in this field. Students pursuing the Master of Science degree 714. INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRON in animal sciences may select courses in genetics, MICROSCOPY nutrition, physiology, management, and diseases Principles, theory, and methods used in preparing and parasites. A thesis is reauired, and a candidate and examining vertebrate tissues in the transmis- for tne master's degree shall register for six thesis sion and scanning electron microscopes; interpre- credits and pass an oral examination covering the tation of electron micrographs. Prereq: chemistry; graduate courses and thesis. A minimum of two permission. Ms. Darr. 3 cr. Animal Sciences seminars is also required. Doctoral-level study in areas related to animal 715. INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRON sciences is offered through other biological science MICROSCOPY LAB departments. Specifically, an interdisciplinary op- Application of principles and theories presented in tion IS offered by the departments of Biochemistry 714. Students carry out fixation embedding ultra and Animal Sciences leading to the Ph.D. degree microtomy, critical point drying operation of in Biochemistry (Nutrition); and the Ph.D. degree transmission and scanning electron microscopes, is offered in genetics through an Interdepartmental and photographic procedures. Coreq: intro to elec- Genetics Program (see Genetics Program in this tron microscopy. Prereq: permission. Ms. Darr. catalog). 2cr. Opportunities are provided for students to obtain teaching as well as research experience during 795-796. INVESTIGATIONS IN DAIRY, their graduate studies. LIVESTOCK, POULTRY A) Genetics: Mr. Collins, Mr. Fairchild; B) Nu- 701. PHYSIOLOGY OF REPRODUCTION trition: Mr. Holter, Mr. Schwab, Mr. Parsons; Comparative aspects of embryology, anatomy, en- C) Management; D) Diseases: Mr. Hylton, Mr. docrinology, and physiology of reproduction. Mr. Strout, Mr. S.C. Smith, Ms. Darr; E) Products; Condon. Lab. 4 cr. F) Light Horses: Mr. Berndtson; G) Physiology: Mr. Condon, Mr. Berndtson; H) Cell Biology: 702. EXPERIMENTAL Ms. Darr, Mr. Strout. The student may select a ENDOCRINOLOGY OF REPRODUCTION special problem in any of the fields listed under the Discussions of current research literature plus ap- guidance of the instructor. Prereq: permission. plication of laboratory techniques to the study of May be repeated. 1-4 cr. hormone relationships in the reproductive system. Prereq: AnSc 701 and permission. Mr. Condon. 801. ADVANCED STUDIES IN ANIMAL Lab. 4 cr. BREEDING Independent study and research on modern breed- 704. PRINCIPLES OF PATHOBIOLOGY ing methods and newer systems of selection for Principles of disease processes; reactivity of the dis- quantitative traits. Prereq: AnSc 712. Mr. Collins, eased cell, tissue, and organ. Prereq: animal anat- Mr. Fairchild. Hours to be arranged. 3 cr. omy, health, and disease courses; /or permission. Staff 3 cr. 802. MEATS, LIVESTOCK MARKETS, AND PRODUCTS 709. BIOCHEMISTRY OF NUTRITION The essential factors in meat selection, cutting, cur- Intermediary metabolism of nutrients and energy; ing, and smoking; study and discussion relative to metabolism transport mechanisms; biological oxi- the problems of livestock marketing and the pro- dation; interrelationships of carbohydrate, fat, and cedure in the large central markets. Trips are taken protein metabolism; obesity; control of hunger and to various packing plants. Lab. 4 cr. appetite. Mr. Parsons. Prereq: college course in biochemistry. (Also offered as HEc 709.) 4 cr. 803. ENERGY METABOLISM AND NUTRITION 710. ANIMAL NUTRITION Incidental lectures, assigned reading, and labora- Feeding and related management of farm animals tory practice in methods of research with major with special emphasis on dairy cattle; nutrients and emphasis on protein and energy metabolism. Mr. their use, digestive anatomy and physiology, en- Holter. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) ergy systems, forage systems ancl quality, ration balancing (dairy, beef sheep, poultry, swine, and equine), and selected metabolic disorders. Prereq: principles of nutrition or permission. Mr. Holter. 4cr.

28 Biochemistry

804. PROTEIN METABOLISM AND Biochemistry (Bchm) NUTRITION Metabolism of dietary amino acids in the mam- Chairperson: James A. Stewart malian system with emphasis on various aspects ot protein nutrition. Prereq; permission. Mr. Schwab. PROFESSORS: Donald M. Green; Edward J. (Also offered as HEc 804.) 4 cr. (Not offered every Herbst; Miyoshi Ikawa; Samuel C. Smith; year.) James A. Stewart

805-806. AVIAN MICROBIOLOGY An applicant who gains admission to graduate The disease process (acute or chronic) in the intact study in biochemistry is expected to have com- host at cellular levels when invaded by viruses or pleted basic courses in chemistry, biological sci- virus-like agents, fungi, and protozoans. Physio- ences, mathematics, and physics. Otherwise well- logical and cytopathological changes in tissue cul- qualified applicants will be permitted to correct ture. Mr. Strout. 3 cr. deficiencies in undergraduate education by enrollment in the appropriate courses or by independent 807-808. AVIAN HISTOPATHOLOGY study. First semester: general histopathology. Second se- The department offers opportunities for special- mester: the special histopathology of common dis- ization in developmental biochemistry, biochem- eases with emphasis on correlation of light and istry of natural products, physical biochemistry, electron microscopy of tumors and tumor forma- biochemical genetics, and structure and metabo- tion. Prereq: histology or the equivalent. Mr. lism of macromolecules. Opportunities also exist Strout. 3 cr. for interdisciplinary research specialization in marine biochemistry, biochemical nutrition, and cell 810. MINERALS AND VITAMINS IN biology in adjunct facilities on campus. In addition NUTRITION to the graduate courses in biochemistry, courses in Metabolism and function of mineral elements and advanced organic chemistry, radiochemistry, ad- vitamins in higher animals. Prereq: permission. vanced microbiology, and genetics are usually rec- Mr. Parsons. (Also offered as HEc 810.) 4 cr. (Not ommended. offered every year.) Participation of all graduate students will be required in the instructional activities ot the depart- 812. QUANTITATIVE GENETICS AND ment, either in the laboratory, in lectures, or in an SELECTION individual instruction format. These teaching as- Gene frequency, genetic and environmental varia- signments are an essential part ot the graduate action, heritability, fitness, selection, inbreeding, ademic programs of the department and are outbreeding, correlated characters. Prereq: one designed to give graduate students practical teach- course each in genetics and statistics. Mr. Collins. ing experience. Normally one year of part-time 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) teaching will be required ot each student. Master of Science degree candidates will be 851. CELL CULTURE expected to develop a thesis on a basic research Theory; principles fundamental to the culture ot problem or to prepare a report or publication based cells in vitro. Introduction to techniques ol prep- on an applied project in biochemistry. All candi- aration and maintenance ot animal, plant, insect, dates for the M.S. degree will be required to pass and tlsh cell cultures. Application of cell culture to an oral examination based on the thesis or project contemporary research in biological sciences. report and on the graduate courses completed in Prereq: gen micro; permission. Mr. Strout and Mr. the degree program. Minocha. Lab. 4 cr. (Also offered as Micr 851 and Doctor of Philosophy degree candidates will Bot 851.) be required to complete a dissertation on original research in biochemistry. At the end ot the tirst 853. ADVANCED CELL BIOLOGY year of graduate study, a preliminary examination A study of the ultrastructure and function ot cell on organic chemistry, physical chemistry, and gen- organelles followed by an analysis ot various spe- eral biochemistry will be presented to students in cialized animal cells to show how differences in the doctoral program. The results of this exami- form and location of various organelles lead to nation and the student's academic record will be differences in tunction. Prereq: biochemistry; evaluated at this time to ascertain eligibility to pro- physiology; vertebrate anatomy; /or permission. ceed to candidacy m the doctoral program. Upon Ms. Darr. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) completion of graduate courses recommended by a guidance committee and demonstration ot pro- 895-896. RESEARCH IN ANIMAL ficiency in the translation of biochemical literature SCIENCES in either German, French, or Russian, a doctoral Advanced investigations in a research project, ex- student will be required to pass an oral qualifying clusive of thesis project. Elective only after con- examination conducted by the guidance commit- sultation with the instructor. May be repeated. tee. The successful completion ot these require- 1-4 cr. ments and advancement to candidacy tor the Ph.D. degree must occur at least six months prior to the 897, 898. ANIMAL SCIENCE SEMINAR final oral defense of the Ph.D. dissertation admin- A survey of recent literature and research in the istered by the student's doctoral committee.

animal sciences. Staff (May be repeated.) 1 cr. Cr/F. 702. COMPARATIVE MARINE BIOCHEMISTRY 899. MASTER'S THESIS Nutrition, metabolism, and composition of marine Hours to be arranged. 6-10 cr. organisms and relation to phytogeny; marine natural products. Mr. Ikawa. Prereq: general biochcm or equivalent. 3 cr. (Alternate years; offered 1983- 84.)

29 Biology

721. NEUROCHEMISTRY 842. BIOCHEMICAL REGULATORY Biochemistry of the nervous system; metabolism MECHANISMS and alterations of normal brain chemistry by drugs, Nonreplicative functions of DNA; transcription chemicals, nutrition, memory, and learning; and translational control of protein synthesis; quan- pathological changes. Mr. Stewart. Prereq: a bio- titative regulation of proteins; regulation of metab- chemistry course. 3 cr. (Alternate years; offered olism by hormones, allosteric regulation and 1982-83.) repression; regulatory mechanisms operating during development and differentiation. Prereq: a 751-752. PRINCIPLES OF course in biochemistry. Mr. Stewart. 3 cr. (Alter- BIOCHEMISTRY nate years; offered 1983-84.) Fundamental biochemistry; chemistry, metabolism, and biological function of nucleic acids, pro- 850. PHYSICAL BIOCHEMISTRY teins, carbohydrates, and lipids. Prereq: organic Structure, interactions, and physical properties of chemistry; or permission. Mr. Stewart. Lab. 4 cr. biomolecules. Thermodynamic, hydrodynamic, and spectroscopic methods for study of proteins 760. ENZYME CHEMISTRY and nucleic acids. Prereq: physical chemistry and Structure, properties, and function of enzymes; biochemistry. 3 cr. (Alternate years; offered 1983- kinetics and mechanisms of enzyme-catalyzed re- 84.) actions; purification, characterization, and assay of enzymes. Prereq: general biochem or 751. Lab. 897, 898. BIOCHEMISTRY SEMINAR

4 cr. (Alternate years; offered 1982-83.) Prereq: permission. 1 cr.

771. BIOCHEMICAL GENETICS 899. MASTER'S THESIS Mechanisms of storage, replication, transmission, To be arranged. 6-10 cr. transcription, recombination, mutation, and expression of genetic information by cells and vi- 999. DOCTORAL RESEARCH ruses. Prereq: Bchm 751; or permission. Mr. Green. 3 cr. Biology: IntercoUege 772. INTRODUCTORY LABORATORY IN MOLECULAR GENETIC Biological Sciences TECHNIQUES Modern biochemical gene manipulation techniques Organization including the genetic, physical and enzymatic char- Chairperson: Robert A. Croker acterization of gene vectors, gene cloning, con- Chairperson of Graduate Advising struction of genetic probes, and sequencing of Committee: Philip Sawyer nucleic acids. Mr. Green. Prereq: Bcnm 751-752 J. and Bchm 771, Bchm 781, or Micro 804. 2 cr. The Master of Science program in biology is administered by the IntercoUege Biological Sci- 781. THE NUCLEIC ACIDS ences Organization, which is composed of faculty Chemistry and metabolism of nucleic acids; mo- members involved in teaching and research in var- lecular structures, purification and separation, bio- ious biological sciences. Students in the program synthesis, and biological functions. Mr. Hcrbst. consult with the Graduate Advising Committee in Prereq: organic chemistry; biochemistry. 3 cr. planning their individual programs. At present, participating faculty are drawn from the following 789. SPECIAL TOPICS IN BIOCHEMISTRY areas: molecular, cellular, and developmental biology; systematics, ecology, and evolution; phys- Seminars by guest speakers in selected areas of iology, anatomy, and nutrition; genetics, biochemistry. 2 cr. Cr/F. (Not offered every year.) pathobiology. 795, 796. INVESTIGATIONS IN BIOCHEMISTRY Master of Science Subject matter and hours to be arranged, Prereq: This is a general, nonthesis program which is permission. 2 cr. applicable to interests which may not be met in a formal department. Curricula may be individually 811. BIOCHEMISTRY OF LIPIDS designed for persons working tor agencies which Chemistry, metabolism, and function of lipids. require advanced, broad training in the biological Prereq: Bchm 752 or equivalent. Mr. Smith. 3 cr. sciences, or for those who wish to prepare tor (Alternate years; offered 1982-83.) junior or community college teaching. Applicants should have a bachelor's degree in biology, zool- 832. BIOCHEMISTRY OF CARBOHYDRATES ogy, botany, microbiology, or a strong background in biological and physical sciences Chemistry, metabolism, and functions of carbo- including physics, college mathematics, and or- hydrates. Polysaccharides, glycoproteins, and the nature of cell surfaces. Prereq: general biochem or equivalent. Mr. Ikawa. 3 cr. (Alternate years; offered 1982-83.)

30 Bolany and Plant Palliology

ganic chemistry. Requirements for the degree in- 717. GENERAL LIMNOLOGY clude a four-credit research project and successful Special relationships of freshwater organisms to the completion of a final written comprehensive ex- chemical, physical, and biological aspects of their amination on completed coursework. environment; factors regulating their distribution; Persons interested in the biology program should and the primary and secondary productivity of contact the chairperson. Graduate Advismg Com- lakes. Inciividual projects. Prereq: general ecology mittee, for further information. or equivalent. Mr. Baker, Mr. Haney. 4 cr.

719. FIELD LIMNOLOGY Botany and Plant Pathology Principles of freshwater ecology, examined in a variety of habitats; the application of field instru- (Bot) ments and computer methods used to study lakes and interpret data. Occasional Saturday field trips. Chairperson: Subhash C. Minocha Pre- or coreq: Bot 717; permission. Mr. Baker and Mr. Haney. Lab. 4 cr. PROFESSORS: Arthur C. Mathieson; Richard W. Schreiber 721. THE MICROSCOPIC ALGAE ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Alan L. Baker; Survey of phytoplankton and periphyton in local Robert O. Blanchard; A. Lmn Bogle; Garrett marine and freshwater habitats. Identification, sys- E. Crow; Leland S. Jahnke; William E. tematics, and evolution. Class and individual col- MacHardy; Subhash C. Minocha lection trips. Prereq: elem bot or survey of the ASSISTANT PROFESSOR: Thomas D. Lee plant kingdom. Mr. Baker. Lab. 4 cr. ADJUNCT PROFESSOR: Alex L. Shigo ADJUNCT ASSISTANT PROFESSOR: Walter 722. MARINE PHYCOLOGY C. Shortle "Identification, classification, ecology, and life his- GRADUATE PROGRAM COORDINATOR: tories of the major groups of marine algae, partic- Garrett E. Crow ularly the benthonic marine algae ot New England. Periodic field trips. Prereq: elem bot or survey of Students admitted to graduate study in botany the plant kingdom. Mr. Mathieson. Lab. 4 cr. and plant pathology are expected to have adequate (Alternate years; offered 1983-84.) preparation in basic botany courses and in the physical sciences. All applicants must submit scores 723. MARINE ALGAL ECOLOGY on the aptitude and advanced biology portions of Distribution, abundance, and growth of marine the Graauate Record Exammation. plants in relation to their environment. Scheduled The candidate for the Master of Science degree field trips and an independent research project are will meet the Graduate School's requirements for required. Prereq: Bot 722, Zool 715; /or permis- the degree and, in addition, will be required to sion. Mr. Mathieson. Lab. 4 cr. (Alternate years; defend a thesis based on field or laboratory re- offered 1982-83.) search, after passing a comprehensive examination. A student who is working toward the Doctor of 724. FRESHWATER ALGAL ECOLOGY Philosophy degree will be advanced to candidacy Survey of freshwater algal habitats; physiological for the Ph.D. after a successful comprehensive ex- explanation of population models. Individual examination and completion of the following lan- perimental projects. Prereq: Bot 717 or 721; or guage requirement: a reading knowledge of at least permission. Mr. Baker. 4 cr. one foreign language. The guidance committee may request a reading knowledge of two foreign 727. ALGAL PHYSIOLOGY languages, or a reading knowledge of one foreign Survey of major topics in the physiology and bio- language and proficiency in a cognate field such as chemistry of marine and fresh water algae includ- statistics or computer techniques. The student will ing: nutrition, metabolic pathways, reproductive be required to defend a dissertation that is to be a physiology, storage and extracellular products, cell substantial contribution to botanical knowledge. inclusion, growth and development. Prereq: plant All botany and plant pathology graduate stu- physiology and introductory biochemistry or per- dents without professional teaching experience will mission. Mr. Jahnke. 2 cr. (Alternate years; offered satisfy the following departmental teaching re- 1983-84.) quirement: each student will assist a faculty member for one semester in teaching one botany course; 729. ALGAL PHYSIOLOGY a Ph.D. candidate will assist in teaching an intro- LABORATORY ductory course and an additional semester in an Laboratory techniques useful in studying the phys- advanced botany course. Each student will also iology of freshwater and marine algae. Experi- register for a one-semester course in College ments in nutrition, metabolism, pigment and Teaching, Inco 890 (optional for M.S. candidates, enzyme analysis. Small research project required. but required for the Ph.D.). Prereq: concurrent registration in Bot 727 and per- The department's areas for graduate study in- mission. Mr. Jahnke. 2 cr. (Alternate years: offered clude: plant physiology, Mr. Jahnke, Mr. Minocha; 1983-84.) plant ecology, Mr. Lee; systematic botany, Mr. Crow; phycology, marine-freshwater, Mr. Ma- 730. MORPHOGENESIS thieson, Mr. Baker; plant pathology, Mr. Blan- Principles of differentiation; internal and external chard, Mr. MacHardy; plant morphology and factors in cellular and organismic development. anatomy, Mr. Bogle; mycology, Mr. Blanchard; Prereq: plant physiology or permission. Mr. Min- cell biology, Mr. Schreiber; developmental botany, ocha. 4 cr. (Alternate years; offered 1982-83.) Mr. Minocha.

31 Botany and Plant Palholoi>Y

732. CELL BIOLOGY 795, 796. INVESTIGATIONS IN: Structure, behavior, and development of cells; the A) Systematic Botany; B) Plant Physiology; cellular basis of heredity. Prereq: one year of bio- C) Plant Pathology; D) Plant Anatomy; E) Plant logical science and chemistry. Mr. Schreiber. 4 cr. Ecology; F) Mycology; G) Cell Biology; H) Phy-

cology; I) Botanical Teaching; J) Morphology; 742. PHYSIOLOGICAL ECOLOGY K) Cell Physiology; L) Scientific Writing; Physiological responses of plants to the physical M) Microtechnique. Individual projects under fac- environment; energy exchange, light, and photo- ulty guidance. Prereq: permission. 2-4 cr. synthesis, water relations, and mineral nutrition. Prereq: plant physiology or permission. Mr. Lee. 803, 804. TOPICS IN DEVELOPMENTAL Lab. 4 cr. PLANT PHYSIOLOGY

A) Fungal Physiology; B) Photosynthesis I; 747. AQUATIC HIGHER PLANTS C) Photosynthesis II; D) Nitrogen Fixation; Flowering plants and tern relatives found in and E) Morphogenesis; F) Reproductive Physiology of about bodies of water in the northeastern United Plants; G) Photomorphogenesis; H) Plant Hor-

States; e.xtensive field and herbarium work, prep- mones; I) Water and Solute Translocation; J) Stress aration techniques, and collections. Prereq: plant Physiology; K) Genetic Control of Plant Devel- taxonomy. Mr. Crow. Lab. 4 cr. (Alternate years; opment; L) Regulation of Gene Expression; offered 1982-83.) M) Metabolic Control Mechanisms in Plants. A series of seven-week, 2-credit, in-depth modules; 751. PLANT PATHOLOGY two modules per semester (may vary, consult Time Nature, symptomatology, etiology, classification, and Room Schedule). Consult PlSc or Bot depart- and control of important plant diseases. Prereq: ments for future semester offerings. Prereq: per- elem bot or equivalent. Mr. MacHardy. Lab. 4 cr. mission. PISc and Bot staff. 2-26 cr.

752. MYCOLOGY 822. ADVANCED MARINE Parasitic and saprophytic fungi; growth, reproduc- PHYCOLOGY tion, and identification; preparation ot pure cul- Classification, ecology, and life histories of marine tures. Prereq: elem bot or equivalent. Staff Lab. algae considered at an advanced level. Seminars, 4 cr. discussion, assigned reading, and laboratory. Mr. Mathieson. Prereq: Bot 722 or equivalent. 4 cr. 753. FOREST AND SHADE TREE PATHOLOGY 851. CELL CULTURE Principles, symptomatology, etiology, and control Theory; principles fundamental to the culture of of forest and shade tree diseases. Prereq: elem bot cells in vitro. Introduction to techniques of prep- or equivalent. Mr. Blanchard. Lab. 4 cr. aration and maintenance of animal, plant, insect, and fish cell cultures. Application of cell culture to 754. PRINCIPLES OF PLANT DISEASE contemporary research in biological sciences. Mr. CONTROL Strout and staff Mr. Metcalf and Mr. Minocha. Epidemiology of plant diseases and relationship to Prereq: permission. 4 cr. (Also offered as Micr 851 cultural practices, resistant varieties, biological and AnSc851.) control, and chemical control; crop loss assessment, disease forecasting, and disease pest man- 852. METHODS IN MYCOLOGY agement. Lab. Prereq: Bot 751 or 753. Mr. Laboratory procedures employed in various aspects MacHardy. 4 cr. (Alternate years; offered 1982- of mycological research from selection of research 83.) problem to journal publication. Prereq: Bot 752 or permission. Staff. 4 cr. 76L PLANT GEOGRAPHY Distribution of plants, a consideration of vegeta- 853. ADVANCED PLANT PATHOLOGY tion types and floras, and problems of endemism Advanced theories and methods in plant pathology; with emphasis on North America; major influential plant pathogenesis; host/pathogen interactions. factors such as geologic, climatic, edaphic, and Prereq: Bot 751 or 753; permission. Mr. Mac- biotic. Major contributions from Humboldt to the Hardy. 4 cr. (Alternate years.) present time. Prereq: plant taxonomy or permission. Mr. Crow. 4 cr. (Alternate years.) 858. PLANT ANATOMY Anatomy of vascular plants; structure and devel- 762. MORPHOLOGY OF THE opment of basic cell and tissue types and of major VASCULAR PLANTS organs of woody plants. Term project and final Comparative form and structure of the major liv- report. Prereq: intro bot or survey of the plant ing and extinct groups; evolutionary modifications kingdom; permission. Mr. Bogle. 4 cr. of the vegetative and reproductive organs, and the basic life history pattern. Prereq: survey of the 867. ADVANCED SYSTEMATIC plant kingdom. Mr. Bogle. Lab. 4 cr. (Alternate BOTANY years; offered 1983-84.) Principles and rules of plant classification and nomenclature; plant families; field and herbarium 764. MICROTECHNIQUE work. Prereq: plant taxonomy. Mr. Crow. 4 cr. Methods of preserving cell and tissue structure, (Alternate years; offered 1982-83.) embedding, sectioning, and staining plant tissues, and an introduction to microscopy. Prereq: permission. Mr. Bogle. Lab. 4 cr. (Alternate years; offered 1982-83.)

32 Bushtess Adiiiinistratiou

885-886. RECENT ADVANCES The Whittemore School welcomes applicants (A) Systematic Botanv; (B) Plant Physiology; with an above-average academic record in any un- (C) Plant Pathology; (D) Plant Anatomy; (E) Plant dergraduate specialty other than business or com- Ecology; (F) Mycology; (G) Cell Biology; merce. No previous exposure to business courses is expected. previous work in mathe- (H) Phycology; (I) Botanical Teaching; (J) Mor- However, phology; (K) Cell Physiology. Elective only with matics, economics, the behavioral sciences, anci the permission. 2 cr. branches of engineering is particularly useful for graduate study in administration. Because of the 895-896. INVESTIGATIONS IN BOTANY increasing use of mathematical concepts, models, A) Systematic Botany; B) Plant Physiology; and notation in the practice and study ot adminis- C) Plant Pathology; D) Plant Anatomy; E) Plant tration, applicants should normally have success- Ecology; F) Mycology; G) Cell Biology; H) Phy- fully completed one year of college mathematics, including an introduction to calculus. cology; I) Botanical Teaching; J) Morphology; preferably K) Cell Physiology; L) Scientific Writing; M) Mi- Students lacking this background may still enroll crotechnique. Individual projects under faculty in the program provided they obtain adequate sub- guidance. Elective only with permission. 2-6 cr. stitute preparation prior to beginning the program. hi all cases, the applicant's entire educational 899. MASTER'S THESIS background, relevant experience, references, and Six credits required. 6-10 cr. professional aims will be considered in the admissions process. Exceptions may be made to any of 999. DOCTORAL RESEARCH the foregoing requirements by the committee on admissions.

Business Administration Day M.B. A. Program (Admn) The Whittemore School curriculum for day students consists of an integrated sequence ot 18 PROFESSORS: Robert F. Barlow; Stephen L. courses requiring two years ot study, which can be Fink; Russell Haley; James O. Horrigan; started only in the fall semester. During the first Manley R. Irwin; John L. Korbel; Dwight R. year, 10 required courses in the basic disciplines Ladd; Barry Shore; Linda G. Sprague; William (quantitative analysis, economics, and behavioral E. Wetzel, Jr.; Robin D. Willits; Dwayne E. science) and the functional areas of management Wrightsman (accounting, marketing, operations management, ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Dale G. and financial management) are integrated into an Broderick; John M. Burt, Jr.; Fred R. Kaen; overall study of the process of administration. Spe- Richard Martin-Diaz; Richard L. Mills; Melvin cial attention is also given to the study of the mod- Sandler; Starr Schlobohm ern corporation as an economic, legal, and social ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: Richard W. organization by requiring all students to complete Barber; Ahmad Etebari; Francine S. Hall; the course. The Organization and Its Environment. Michael Kole; Duncan LaBay; Richard Lamb; The second year of the day curriculum continues the emphasis on overall management by requiring Michael J. Merenda; Rita Weathersby all stucients to complete Business Conditions and The Whittemore School offers a program leading Economic Forecasting and Business Policy. In ad- to the M.B. A. in formats designed for day students dition, with the help of a faculty adviser, the stu- and practicing executives. The program is designed dent will select the equivalent of six tour-credit to prepare graduates tor professional careers in ad- elective courses with some concentration in an area ministration in both profit and not-for-protit or- of special interest. Students are encouraged to select ganizations in a rapidly changing world. The appropriate graduate-level courses offered by other M.B. A. program is directed toward a broad prep- colleges of the University as well as by the Whitte- aration in general administration through the study more School, and to undertake field studies or in- of 1) the increasing body of relevant knowledge ternships. drawn from the behavioral sciences, mathematics, and economics; 2) the existing and emerging pro- Executive M.B. A. Program cesses and institutions ot the functional fields of administration; and 3) the role of business and other The curriculum for practicing managers contains organizations in a complex and turbulent society. the same course requirements as the day M.B. A. There is a consistent emphasis on developing program, but is tailored to the context and sched- basic analytical skills rather than on developing uling needs of those working full-time at executive extensive technical expertise. Also, the program level jobs. The executive program begins each fall fosters the ability to utilize conceptual and theo- and, because of the cumulative nature ot the pro- retical material in the analysis and solution of prac- gram, participants are expected to stay on schedule tical problems. with their class. The program is offered in Durham Candidates for admission must possess a bache- at the New England Center. The two-year pro- lor's degree from an accredited college or univer- gram begins in September, with a full week ot sity. In addition, all candidates are expected to take classes. Thereafter, classes are held twice each the Graduate Management Admission Test month in all-day Friday and Saturday sessions. (GMAT) given by the Educational Testing Service. Details concerning the dates and locations for these examinations may be obtained from Educational Testing Service, Box 955, Princeton, New Jersey (18540."

33 Business Admiiuslration

702. APPLIED STATISTICS costing, cost-price-volume relationships, distribu- Time series and cross-scctioncd data; regression tion costs, transfer pricing, and capital budgeting analysis; computerized statistical packages. Exper- analysis. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. imental design; surveys; contingency analysis. Prereq: basic statistics; permission. 4 cr. 720. AUDITING The attest function and the responsibility and 705. OPERATIONS RESEARCH professional ethics of the independent auditor in Synthesis and analysis ot basic principles and meth- our society. Audit concepts, procedures, objec- ods of operations research applied to managerial tives, and reports. Operational audits, social audits, decisions. Mathematical programming, networks, and management services. Prereq: Admn 717; /or inventory, queuing, sequencing, scheduling, and permission. 4 cr. Markovian models. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. 722. ACCOUNTING SEMINAR 706. ADVANCED OPERATIONS Special topics. Prereq: Admn 717 or 718, depend- RESEARCH ing on topics; permission. 4 cr. Analysis and synthesis of complex operations research models. Project is undertaken by all stu- 723. TOPICS IN FINANCE dents. Advanced mathematical programming Prereq: financial management. 4 cr. (nonlinear, parametric linear, stochastic, and dynamic), stochastic inventory models, advanced 724. ADVANCED TOPICS IN queuing models, and heuristic programs. Prereq: OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT Admn 705 or permission. 4 cr. Analysis and development of planning and control systems for the operations within an organization. 708. MODELING AND SIMULATION Prereq: permission. 4 cr. Modeling: formulation, data preparation, translation, validation, interpretation, and implementa- 728. STATISTICAL DECISION MAKING tion. Discrete simulation models are developed and Probability and statistics applied to decision prob- applied using a special purpose simulation lan- lems. Bayesian approach to decisions under uncer- guage. Prereq: basic probability and statistics; per- tainty, which explicitly injects priorjudgements of mission. 4 cr. decision makers and the consequences of alternative actions. Prereq: basic statistics; permission. 4 cr. 712. ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGE Process of change in organizations. Change strat- 732. EXPLORATION IN egies; the change agent's role and relation to the ENTREPRENEURIAL MANAGEMENT client system. Bases of resistance to change and Examination of the management of change and problems encountered by internal and external innovation with particular attention to the role of change agents. Theoretical reading material, cases, the entrepreneur in the management of new ven- and exercises. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. tures. Characteristic behavioral, organizational, financial, and marketing problems of entrepreneurs 713. INTERPERSONAL AND GROUP and new enterprises. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. DYNAMICS Dynamics of small groups through the use ot the 741. TRANSPORTATION class itself as an intensive laboratory study group. Problems of American transportation system. Eco- Students examine their own behavior and its effects nomic structure of transportation industries; com- on others through the use of the Laboratory Train- petition among the several modes. Public policy ing Group (T-group) and develop conceptual abil- questions: merger, cost-benefit analysis of facilities, ity and behavioral skills. Readings in group for example. Freight transportation; problems of dynamics, interpersonal relations, and sensitivity passenger transportation, especially in urban areas. training. Prereq: permission. Lab fee. 4 cr. Prereq: permission. 4 cr.

714. CONFLICT MANAGEMENT 742. MANAGEMENT INFORMATION Conflict among individuals, sinail groups, and or- SYSTEMS ganizations. Analysis of cases, readings, simula- Concepts, design, and implementation of systems tions, and roleplays (often using video tape) to provide information and support for managerial develops useful concepts and skills for dealing with decision making. Use of computers, models, and conflict. Students examine their own behavior in behavioral factors from the manager's perspective. coping with conflicts within the class. Field project 4 cr. required. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. 745. INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS 715. THEORY AND PRACTICE OF Issues and problems confronting managers in the GROUP LEADERSHIP international economy. Emphasis on problems of Comparison of and practice in leading task- and working across national borders rather than on process-oriented groups. Student teams design pre- those encountered within the framework of differ- sentations on leadership topics, then study their ent national economies, cultures, and institutions. own leadership-membership issues. Each student For managers working in a multinational enter- also participates in and leads a process-oriented prise. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. group. Prereq: Admn 713 or equivalent; permission. 4 cr. 747. FEDERAL TAXATION Current federal income, estate, and gift taxes and 718. COST AND MANAGEMENT their effect on corporations, partnerships, and in- Effective use ot cost accounting, cost analysis, and dividuals. Tax analysis and decision making. 4 cr. budgeting in planning and controlling operations. Analysis of cost behavior, direct and absorption

34 Business Admiiiislrdluiii

751. ADVERTISING AND PROMOTION 801. QUANTITATIVE METHODS Advertising, pcrsiHial selling, and other promo- Basic mathematical and statistical concepts applied tional tools to help solve marketing problems; ad- to managerial decision making. Probability, statis- vertising as a medium ot communication and as a tics, decision trees, and mathematic models. 3 cr. social-cultural force in the Western world. Prereq: marketing; permission. 4 cr. 803. HUMAN BEHAVIOR IN ORGANIZATIONS 756. MANAGEMENT OF FINANCIAL Understanding ot behavioral science concepts and INSTITUTIONS their use in the analysis of individual, group, and How financial institutions manage their sources leadership relationships in organizations; skills in and uses ot tunds; ettect ot external environmental dealing with others at work. 3 cr. factors upon the operation and performance of financial institutions. Optimal portfolio strategies 804. MANAGEMENT ORGANIZATION for commercial banks, savings and loan associa- Theories ot organization and analysis of contem- tions, mutual savings banks, insurance companies, porary forms and structure. Concern is with de- and pension tunds. Implications ot monetary the- velopment of rational management processes in a ory tor individual financial institution policies; dynamic society. 3 cr. credit analysis; competition among financial institutions; regulation ot financial institutions. Prereq: 806. FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT financial management. 4 cr. Concepts and techniques tor determining the need tor, the acquisition of and the management of, 761. SALES MANAGEMENT financial resources of the business. 3 cr. Principles and methods ot successful salesmanship and management ot the sales function. Selling ex- 808. MARKETING periences in fields of student interest; case studies, Identification, development, and retention of mar- sales presentations; oral and written analyses of kets tor the goods and services ottered by the firm. sales management issues. Prereq: marketing; per- Attention is given to the dynamics of demand and mission. 4 cr. to the blending of the marketing mix. 3 cr.

762. MARKETING WORKSHOP 810. OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT Integrative study of a real marketing situation in Analysis of operational problems in the product a business, nonprofit institution, or government and service sectors, focusing on production system agency. Student teams identity problem, research design and development; emphasis on standards, or collect data, suggest alternate solutions, and sub- capacity, inventory, scheduling, and control. 3 cr. mit a recommended course of action. Prereq: one advanced marketing course; permission. 4 cr. 811. THE ORGANIZATION AND ITS ENVIRONMENT 770. PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION Study ot the modern corporation as a partly eco- Role of personnel administration and human re- nomic, legal, and social organization, including ex- source management in achieving goals in "for- amination of widely held views ot business and profit" and "not-tor-profit" organizations. Func- views of business people about themselves. 3 cr. tions of management; scope, technique, and current issues of personnel administration; organi- 815. FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING zation of personnel activities and staff How Introduction to the accounting methods employed managers relate to personnel administration and in organizations to determine and communicate interact with personnel administration staff and their financial position to interested parties outside services. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. the organization. 3 cr.

780. WOMEN IN MANAGEMENT 816. MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING Issues faced by women managers in complex or- Introduction to various models employed by organizations; problems associated with role expec- ganizations in the financial planning and control tations of women as they move into managerial processes. 3 cr. positions traditionally tilled by men. Prereq; senior or graduate standing. 4 cr. 817. BUSINESS CONDITIONS AND ECONOMIC FORECASTING 795. INTERNSHIP Managerial effects ot historical and forecasted On-the-job skill development through fieldwork movements in interest rates, national income, in- in an organization (business, industry, health, pub- flation, and unemployment. 4 cr. lic service, etc.). Normally, supervision provided by qualified individual in the organization, with 818. MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS frequent consultation by a faculty sponsor. Written An economics approach to the conceptualization, report required. Internships may be part- or t'ull- analysis, and management of revenues, costs, and time, with course credits assigned accordingly. profits. 3 cr. 1-16 cr. 820. BUSINESS POLICY 800. INTEGRATIVE MANAGEMENT A "capstone" course, focused on industries, com- SEMINAR panies, and other organizations in operation, and This course extends throughout the Executive studied through case examples, with emphasis on MBA Program. Material and topics not offered in integration ot materials covered in prior courses. regular courses are ottered here, as are distin- 4 cr': guished speakers from business and government, field trips, issues of immediate concern, etc. 1 cr. To be repeated up to 4 cr. Cr/F.

35 Chemical Elli;iltel'liltl^

830. INVESTMENTS ANALYSIS 896. CONSULTING PRACTICUM Capital market patterns and techniques usctiil tor Field consulting experience as a member ot MBA security analysis. Securities, market institutions, Associates. Development of client relationships, yield series, random walks, intrinsic-value analy- diagnoses and analyses of actual problems, written ses, portfolio management, analysis research proj- and oral reports to clients, and administrative par- ects. Prercq: Admn 806; permission. 4 cr. ticipation in MBA Associates. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. (May be repeated.) 837. ADVANCED FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING 898. TOPICS IN ADMINISTRATION Theory and practice as they contribute to the sig- Special topics; may be repeated. Prereq: consent ot nificance and limitations ot the financial statement. adviser and instructor. 1-4 cr. Prereq: permission. 4 cr.

848. LAW: USE AND APPLICATION IN Chemical Engineering (Ch E) BUSINESS as it applies to busi- Use and understanding of law Chairperson: Stephen S. T. Fan ness judgement and policy decision making; basic legal rules and their application. Contracts, cor- PROFESSORS: Stephen S. T. Fan; Gail D. porations, agencies, partnerships, administrative Ulrich agencies, commissions, and other related business ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Ihab H. Farag; matters. Case-method teaching with outside re- Virendra K. Mathur; Donald C. Sundberg search. 4 cr. To be admitted to graduate study in chemical 850. MARKETING MANAGEMENT engineering, an applicant is expected to have com- Practical application of theories taught in market- pleted a course ot study substantially equivalent to ing. Planning, organization, and control ot mar- that required for the degree ot Bachelor ot Science keting activities in large corporations and small in Chemical Engineering in this University. How- pricing pol- businesses; new product development; ever, students with good undergraduate records icies; selection of channels of distribution; interre- but with deficiencies in certain areas may be ad- marketing, production, lationships between and mitted on condition that they complete specified finance. policy tormulation decision Sound and courses without credit to make up for their defi- of cases and making established through analysis ciencies. simulation. Prereq: a basic marketing computer A minimum of 30 credits, which must include course. 4 cr. Ch E 813, 815, 816, 823, and 832, is required for the Master of Science in Chemical Engineering de- 851. GOVERNMENT REGULATION OF gree. The core-courses requirement can be waived BUSINESS only in special cases with permission from the de- policy as it attects managerial decision Government partment faculty. A candidate for the Master of making. Conspiracy, mergers, unfair monopoly, Science degree must prepare a thesis, for which a practices, discrimination, recent social legisla- and minimum of six credits will be allowed, unless the tion. 4 cr. candidate is specifically exempted by the faculty because of previous research experience. 852. MARKETING RESEARCH For students who are interested in graduate stud- Identification, collection, and analysis ot data tor ies beyond the Master of Science degree, an inter- the marketing process. Strengths, limitation, en- departmental Engineering Doctor ot Philosophy vironment, and evaluation ot research in the mar- program is available, which includes the following keting process. Prercq: marketing and statistics; areas of specialization: engineering system design, permission. 4 cr. signal processing, theoretical and applied mechanics, and transport phenomena. For details refer to 855. ADVANCED BUSINESS FINANCE the section entitled Engineering Ph.D. Program. Analytical tools and practical skills for recognizing Courses numbered between 600 and 699 may be solving business tinance. and complex problems of taken for graduate credit by nonmajors only. Working-capital management; capital budgeting; Permission of the instructor and consent ot the cost of capital; capital structure; dividend policy. student's adviser are required tor enrollment in all Prereq: Admn 806. 4 cr. chemical engineering courses.

861. THE PHILOSOPHY OF 701. INTRODUCTION TO POLYMER MANAGEMENT SCIENCE ENGINEERING Study of management from a systems-analysis Principles of polymer chemistry, polymerization point of view. 4 cr. kinetics, polymer rheology, and material characteristics. Design and analysis of polymer reactors, 895. SPECIAL PROJECTS AND extruders, molding machines, and other forming INDEPENDENT STUDY operations. Lab. 4 cr. Projects, research, and reading programs in areas required concentration. days advance for Sixty ap- 705. NATURAL AND SYNTHETIC proval of the student's plan of study by adviser and FOSSIL FUELS by proposed instructor required. ot 8 Maximum Study of U.S. and foreign reserves of coal, oil, and credits, special permission. iVlaximum ot except by natural gas. Petroleum processing and refining. 4 credits if been taken tor 8 credits. Admn 8% has Coal, oit shale, and tar sand. Gasification and liq- Variable cr. (May be repeated.) uefaction of coal. Lab. 4 cr.

36 Chemistry

712. INTRODUCTION TO NUCLEAR 832. ADVANCED CHEMICAL ENGINEERING ENGINEERING KINETICS Development of nuclear reactors; basic binding- Specialized applied kinetics problems; catalysis; fast energy physics; radioactivity; elements of nuclear reaction and shock tubes; combustion and deto- reactor theory; engineering problems ot heat trans- nation processes; nonisothermal kinetics; heat and fer, fluid flow, materials selection, and shielding; mass transfer in nonequilibrium, chemically react- environmental impacts. 4 cr. ing systems. 3 cr.

751. PROCESS SIMULATION AND 852. ADVANCED PROCESS DYNAMICS OPTIMIZATION Process dynamics for higher order processes and Techniques for computer-aided analysis ot chemi- nonlinear processes. Modeling of complex process cal processing systems. Development ot mathe- by differential equations, linearizing nonlinear ele- matical models to describe process behavior. ments, and adequately controlling the entire sys- Application of optimization techniques. Prercq: a tem. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) knowledge of FORTRAN programming. Lab. 4cr. 890. LITERATURE REPORT histruction in the use of the library for chemical 752. PROCESS DYNAMICS AND engineering research, culminating in the prepara- CONTROL tion of a literature report on a topic of mutual Dynamic behavior of chemical engineering pro- interest to the student and the chemical engineering cesses described by differential equations; feedback faculty. 1 cr. control concepts and techniques; stability and analysis. Lab. 4 cr. 895, 896. GRADUATE INDEPENDENT STUDY 772. PHYSICOCHEMICAL PROCESSES Directed reading or investigation at the advanced FOR WATER AND AIR QUALITY level on topics in chemical engineering. 2-4 cr. CONTROL Origin and characterization ot pollutants. Con- 897, 898. GRADUATE SEMINAR trols, including filtration, sedimentation, coagula- Discussion on topics of interest to graduate stu- tion and flocculation, absorption and adsorption. dents and staff; reports of research progress; invited Applied fluid mechanics, mass transfer, and kinet- lectures by outside speakers. cr. ics. Thermal pollution, chemical treatment, oil spills on water, and aeration. Lab 4 cr. 899. MASTER'S THESIS Original investigations in chemical engineering. 804. RADIATIVE HEAT TRANSFER Variable credit; 6 credits required. Heat transmission in high-temperature operations and interaction of radiative and other transport mechanisms; radiation geometry; application ot Chemistry (Chem) matrix algebra to radiative transfer in enclosures; measurements. zoning methods of temperature Chairperson: Frank L. Pilar Analytical and empirical approximations of engineering use. Quantitative design of several turnaces PROFESSORS: Alexander R. Amell; Kenneth K. systems. cr. and high-temperature 3 Andersen; N. Dennis Chasteen; Clarence L. Grant; Colin D. Hubbard; Paul R. Jones; James 813. ADVANCED FLUID MECHANICS D. Morrison; Charles W. Owens; Frank L. Basic equations describing behavior ot static and Pilar; Albert K. Sawyer; James H. Weber; dynamic fluid systems. The equations of motions Charles M. Wheeler, Jr. and application to laminar and turbulent flow. ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR: W. Rudolf Seitz Momentum and energy equations for advanced ASSISTANT PROFESSORS; Christopher F. problems associated with flow inside conduits. Bauer; Gary R. Weisman; Edward Hou Sen Flow of compressible fluids and boundary layer Wong phenomena. 3 cr. GRADUATE PROGRAM COORDINATOR; W. Rudolf Seitz 815. HEAT TRANSFER Steady-state transient and heat conduction in solids; The Department of Chemistry offers programs heat convection; analytic solutions, similarity re- leading to three graduate degrees: Doctor of Phi- lations, boundary layer methods; radiation. 3 cr. losophy, Master of Science, and Master of Science for Teachers. Entering graduate students (except 816. DIFFUSIVE MASS TRANSFER for those desiring the M.S.T. degree) are expected Physical aspects ot dittusion; theories diffusion of to take proficiency examinations in chemistry to in dilute gases, dense gases, liquids, and solids; assist in starting each new student's graduate work surface diffusion; mixing processes. Simultaneous at the proper level. These examinations will be heat and mass transfer. 3 cr. offered at the beginning of each semester on dates announced in the departmental graduate calendar. 823. ADVANCED CHEMICAL ENGINEERING The faculty of the chemistry department feels THERMODYNAMICS that the experience of teaching is a valuable part of The niulticomponent open system; the volumetric the training of the graduate student. Therefore, all and phase behavior ot pure substances multi- and of graduate students who are Doctor of Philosophy component at physical chemical equi- systems and or Master of Science candidates will obtain some librium, tugacity and activity; properties thermal teaching experience during their tenure. of equilibrium, chemically reacting systems; introduction to statistical thermodynamics. 3 cr.

37 Chemistry

Doctor of Philosophy Degree 763. INSTRUMENTAL METHODS OF CHEMICAL ANALYSIS LABORATORY Admission to this program is based upon supe- Experimental parameters, error analysis, and ap- rior work in the usual undergraduate courses in plications of the methods covered in Chem 762. inorganic chemistry, analytical chemistry, organic Coreq: Chem 762. 2 cr. chemistry, and physical chemistry, as well as the normal supporting courses in mathematics and 830. ADVANCED OPTICAL METHODS physics. This degree requires the completion of a Techniques of chemical identification and analysis research problem presented in the form ot a thesis. utilizing optical instrumentation from the stand- Ph.D. candidates will be expected to demon- point of theory and application. Topics include strate proficiency in reading chemical literature in UV-visible absorption, luminescence, atomic spec- one or two appropriate foreign languages; the an- troscopy, IR, NMR, x-ray methods and mass spec- alytical and physical divisions require German or trometry. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) Russian, the inorganic division requires German only, and the organic division requires German 831. ADVANCED ELECTRICAL plus French or Russian. Candidates will also dem- METHODS onstrate to the doctoral committee that they have Introductory electronics for chemists; theory and a broad basic knowledge of the field of chemistry: applications of important electrochemical tech- 1) by completing certain fundamental graduate niques such as polarography and cyclic voltam- courses; and 2) by means of a series of examinations metry. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) in the major field. The principal emphasis of the last two years will be on the research project that 833. CHEMICAL SEPARATIONS will constitute the dissertation. During this time, The use of various separation techniques prior to doctoral candidates will present and defend an analysis; separations as methods of analysis. 3 cr. original research proposal before the doctoral (Not offered every year.) committee. Inorganic Chemistry Master of Science Degree 774. INORGANIC CHEMISTRY Admission to this program is based upon a su- Basic theoretical concepts and their applications to perior undergraduate average and requires satisfac- inorganic reactions ancl compounds. Prereq: phys- tory work in the usual undergraduate courses in ical chemistry; /or permission. 3 cr. inorganic chemistry, analytical chemistry, organic chemistry, and physical chemistry, as well as the 775. INORGANIC CHEMISTRY normal supporting courses in mathematics and LABORATORY physics. This degree requires the completion of a Synthesis and characterization of inorganic com- research problem presented in the form of a thesis. pounds with an emphasis on techniques not taught in other laboratory courses. 2 cr. Master of Science for Teachers Degree 803. ADVANCED INORGANIC This program is offered for candidates who hold CHEMISTRY I a secondary-school teacher certification in chem- Survey of some concepts of modern inorganic istry. This degree requires 30 semester hours in chemistry, serving as general background material courses approved by the graduate coordinator. Per- for all graduate students and as basic fundamentals sons interested in this degree should confer with for further courses in inorganic chemistry: peri- the department's graduate program coordinator. odicity, stereochemistry, and bonding in inorganic compounds, the crystalline state, reactions in so- Interdisciplinary Programs in Chemistry lution, energetics, and elementary coordination chemistry. 4 cr. Graduate students in chemistry may elect to enter one of the interdisciplinary programs offered 804. ADVANCED INORGANIC jointly with the chemistry department and other CHEMISTRY II departments. In these programs, the graduate stu- Specialized topics for the advanced student. Topics dent, with the advice of tne guidance committee, may include advanced discussions of topics in elects courses in chemistry and in the related dis- Chem 803, inorganic reaction mechanisms, non- ciplines, and writes the dissertation on a research aqueous solvent systems, fluorine chemistry, bio- problem appropriate to interdisciplinary treatment. inorganic chemistry, solid state chemistry. 3 cr. Students interested in these programs should write to the chairperson of the department for further 847. ADVANCED INORGANIC information. CHEMISTRY III Modern theory applied to spectra, magnetism, ki- Analytical Chemistry netics, and thermodynamics of coordination compounds. The formation of and reactions of 762. INSTRUMENTAL METHODS OF coordination compounds including catalytic reac- CHEMICAL ANALYSIS tions. Prereq: Chem 803 or permission. 3 cr. (Not Theory, instrumentation, and application of meth- offered every year.) ods such as atomic absorption, coulometry, emission spectrography, gas and liquid chroma- 848. ADVANCED INORGANIC tography, polarography, potentiometry, IR and CHEMISTRY IV UV-VIS absorbtion spectrophotometry, and mass The theory and practice of x-ray diffraction and spectrometry to chemical analysis. Prereq: quanti- the determination of crystal structure. Prereq: tative analysis; physical chemistry II as a pre- or Chem 803 or permission. 3 cr. (Not offered every corequisite; /or permission. Coreq: Chem 763. year.) 3 cr.

38 Chemistry

Organic Chemistry 821. PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY- CHEMICAL KINETICS 755. ADVANCED ORGANIC The kinetics of homogeneous and hetrogeneous CHEMISTRY reactions in gaseous and liquid systems, including Methods of synthesis and determination of struc- an introduction to very rapid reactions. Prereq: one ture, including stereochemistry of complex organic year of physical chemistry. 3 cr. compounds. 3 cr. 822. PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY- 756. ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMICAL THERMODYNAMICS CHEMISTRY LABORATORY The foundations and interrelationships of the laws Synthesis and structural determmation of complex of thermodynamics. The methods by which the organic compounds, techniques for the separation, theoretical principles may be applied to practical determination of purity, and identification of com- problems. 3 cr. pounds by spectroscopic and chemical means. 2 cr. 826. NUCLEAR AND 801. THEORETICAL ORGANIC RADIOCHEMISTRY CHEMISTRY I Nuclear structure and reactions, particle accelera- Discussion of theoretical and experimental meth- tors, radioactive decay, detection of particles, and ods used in study of reaction mecnanisms and mo- the interaction of particles with matter. Application lecular stereochemistry. 4 cr. of radiochemistry to chemical systems and research. 3 cr. 802. THEORETICAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY II 827, 828. THEORETICAL CHEMISTRY I, A continuation of Chem 801. 3 cr. II The modern concepts and mathematical formalism 811. SYNTHETIC ORGANIC of quantum mechanics and applications to elec- CHEMISTRY I tronic structures of atoms and molecules, spectros- Advanced synthetic methods for preparing organic copy, and the solid state. 3 cr. molecules. Prereq: permission. 3 cr. 829. THEORETICAL CHEMISTRY III 812. SYNTHETIC ORGANIC Statistical mechanics with applications to thermo- CHEMISTRY II dynamics of nonideal systems, intcrmolccular A continuation ot Chem 811. Prcrcq: permission. forces, and chemical kinetics. Prereq: permission. 3cr. 3 cr.

817, 818. SPECIAL TOPICS IN ORGANIC General Offerings CHEMISTRY Courses in which all areas of specialization Specialized courses for the advanced student. Top- participate. ics may include reaction mechanisms, stereochemistry, spectroscopy, molecular biochemistry, 708. RESEARCH TECHNIQUES steroids, and organic sulfur compounds. 2 or 3 cr. Lectures and laboratory to show experimental methods and interpretation of results. Topics in- Physical Chemistry clude chromatography, data handling, nuclear magnetic resonance, mass spectrometry, elemen- 776. PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY III tary electronics, infrared and ultraviolet spectros- Quantum theory; spectroscopy; chemical bonding; copy, experimental design, and x-ray. 1-4 cr. statistical thermodynamics. Prereq: physical chemistry. Lab. 4 cr. 807. INTRODUCTION TO RESEARCH A course to introduce the Doctor of Philosophy 778. CHEMISTRY OF LARGE MOLECULES student to the planning, experimental methods, and interpretation of a research problem. Student Basic chemistry of high-molecular-weight com- presents and defends an original research proposal pounds, including synthetic polymers and sub- before a faculty committee. Must be completed stances occurring in living systems. Elementary satisfactorily by all doctoral students. Cannot be aspects of the structures, syntheses, and properties used for credit by Master of Science candidates. of large molecules, and their roles in modern science, technology, and living systems. Prereq: one semester of organic chemistry. 4 cr. 895, 896. COLLOQUIUM IN CHEMISTRY A) Inorganic Chemistry; B) Organic Chemistry; 805. ADVANCED PHYSICAL C) Theoretical Organic Chemistry; D) Physical CHEMISTRY I Chemistry; E) Analytical Chemistry. 1-4 cr. Sec- An introduction to topics in quantum mechanics, tions of the course may be taken to a total of 12 cr. group theory, and statistical thermodynamics which form tne background of all areas of modern 897, 898. SEMINAR chemistry. 4 cr. Presentation and discussion of recent investigations

in chemistry. 1 cr. Cr/F. 806. ADVANCED PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY II 899. THESIS—PROBLEMS IN Wave mechanics and quantum chemistry, spec- CHEMISTRY troscopy, molecular structure; statistical thermo- Conferences, library, and experimental work in dynamics, kinetics, and mechanism. Prereq: one some field of chemistry. Variable credit; 6 credits year of physical chemistry. 3 cr. required.

999. DOCTORAL RESEARCH 39 Civil Engineering

Civil Engineering (Ci E) Areas of Interest

Chairperson: Paul J. Ossenbruggen The faculty of the civil engineering department has research interests in the following areas. Stu- civil PROFESSORS: Paul L. Bishop; Otis J. Sproul; dents in the M.S. in engineering or the En- Tung-Ming Wang gineering Ph.D. Program may select courses and ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Pedro A. DeAlba; research topics in these areas. Charles H. Goodspeed; David L. Gress; Louis Environmental Engineering: Areas of interest

H. Klotz; Paul J. Ossenbruggen include water and wastewater treatment; treatment ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: Yen-hsi Chu; of industrial wastes, such as those from tanneries, Robert M. Henry; Gary W. Jaworski; Windsor paper mills, metal finishers, and lithographers; Sung treatment of hazardous wastes; dynamic control of ADJUNCT PROFESSOR: Victor D. Azzi the coagulation process in water treatment; kinetics GRADUATE PROGRAM COORDINATOR: of algal growth and nutrient uptake; pathogen sur- Charles H. Goodspeed vival during sludge composting; and groundwater pollution. The Department of Civil Engineering offers the Ocean and Coastal Engineering: Areas of re- master's degree in civil engineering with the fol- search include the design and analysis of offshore lowing areas of specialization: Structural, Materi- structures; soil-foundation interaction of offshore als, and Geotechnical Engineering; Environmental structures; estuarine circulation; sediment transport Engineering; and Ocean and Coastal Engineering. processes; and dynamic responses of coastal and A student admitted to graduate study in civil ocean structures. engineering must have completed a baccalaureate Structural, Materials, and Geotechnical Engi- degree in engineering, mathematics, or science at neering: Topics of interest include fabric identifi- an accredited college or university. If coursework cation in sands by acoustic methods; instability of or laboratory experience is deficient, the student offshore slopes; influence of pore size and pore-size will be required to fulfill, without graduate credit, distribution on frost heaving of granular materials; all undergraduate prerequisites for graduate influence of aggregate gradation on controlling the courses. In some cases the student's adviser may water-cement ratio of Portland cement, concrete require additional undergraduate courses in order while maintaining workability, and internally to achieve a well-integrated program of study. sealed concrete; coupled, twisting-bending vibra- Each entering graduate student is assigned an tions of continuous curved beams; effects of rotary academic adviser who will assist the student in inertia and shear on multispan curved frames; vi- planning a program of study. The adviser will also brations of cable-stayed structures; computer-aided assist the student in selecting a graduate advisory structural planning and design of buildings; com- committee normally composed of at least two civil puter graphics applications in structural engineer- engineering faculty members and one non-civil ening; finite element analysis; soil-structure inter- gineering faculty member. The graduate advisory actions; and design investigations for the recon- committee provides guidance to the student in struction of small/low-head, hydropower facilities. course selection, thesis or project research, and will evaluate the student's overall progress. 701. ADVANCED SURVEYING A student in the master's program has the option Instrumental and analytical photogrammctry. of electing either a thesis (minimum of 24 course Conformal mapping and its application to the state credits and 6 thesis credits) or nonthesis (minimum plane coordinate systems. Geodetic surveying. Er- of 30 course credits and a zero-credit research proj- ror theory and its application to the planning and ect) option. There are no course requirements for adjustment of surveys. Application of electronic either option; a minimum number of^ course credits computers to surveying calculations. Prereq; sur- is specified. Candidates electing the thesis option veying. Lab. 4 cr. are required to submit a copy of their thesis, prepared in accordance with the Graduate School's 714. CONTRACTS, SPECIFICATIONS, Thesis and Dissertation Manual. A formal oral pre- AND PROFESSIONAL RELATIONS sentation/thesis defense is also required. Essential elements and legal requirements of engi- Candidates electing the nonthesis option are re- neering contracts; purposes and content of speci- quired to prepare a noncredit project paper and fications; professional conduct, relations, regis- give a final oral presentation/project defense. In tration, and ethics. Construction planning and addition to the paper, the candidate must pass a management; cost analysis based on quantity sur- departmental comprehensive examination on fun- veys and unit-cost methods. Prereq: permission. damental engineering concepts prepared and eval- 3cr. uated by the cancfidate's advisory committee. Project paper preparation guidelines are available 721. PAVEMENT DESIGN in the departmental office. Flexible and rigid pavements and bases for high- A B average must be achieved for graduation. ways, airports, and city streets; pavement selection, All students are required to register for Civil En- construction methods, materials, specifications, gineering Seminar (CiE 800) for a minimum of and engineering cost estimates. Prereq: soil me- two semesters. chanics. 3 cr. A Doctor of Philosophy degree is administered through the College of Engineering and Physical 722. PROPERTIES AND PRODUCTION Sciences Engineering Ph.D. Program. A candidate OF CONCRETE for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy must com- Basic properties of hydraulic cements and mineral ply with the rules and regulations as outlined in the aggregates and their interactions in the properties general requirements for graduate work in the En- of plastic and hardened concrete; modifications gineering Ph.D. Program. through admixtures; production handling and

40 CiVi7 Engineering

placement problems; specifications; quality control ects involving laboratory field work and readings and acceptance testing; lightweight, heavyweight, in the current scientific literature are required. Lab. and other special concretes. Prereq: engineering 4 cr. materials or permission. 3 cr. 745. HYDROLOGY AND HYDRAULICS 723. BITUMINOUS MATERIALS AND Occurrence and physical effects of water on the MIXTURES earth; meteorology, groundwater runoflf and Considerations of major types of bituminous ma- stream-flow routing, open-channel flow, reser- terials, asphalt cements, cutback asphalts, asphalt voirs, control works, hydroelectric power, irriga- emulsions, and tars; mfluence of chemical compo- tion, drainage, and multipurpose projects. Prereq: sition on physical properties; desirable aggregate fluid mechanics. 3 cr. characteristics for bituminous mixtures; construction techniques; current practices for determining 746. WASTEWATER TREATMENT optimum asphalt contents. Prereq: engineering PLANT DESIGN materials or permission. 3 cr. Choice of treatment units. Design of the components; preparation of a plan for a particular city 731. NETWORK PLANNING AND that includes a suitable combination of the units SCHEDULING previously designed. Prereq: water and wastewater Application of critical path methods (CPM) and engineering. 3 cr. project evaluation review technique (PERT) to the design and control of engineering projects. Lab. 747. INTRODUCTION TO MARINE 2cr. POLLUTION AND CONTROL Introduction to the sources, effects, and control of 733. SYSTEMS ANALYSIS I pollutants in the marine environment. Dynamic Quantitative and economic techniques for opti- and kinetic modeling; ocean disposal of on-shore mum allocation of resources in planning and design wastes, shipboard wastes, solid wastes, dredge of engineering systems. Topics include engineering spoils, and radioactive wastes; and oil spills. Prereq: economics, principles of optimization, matrix water and wastewater engineering or permission. methods, and linear programming. Prereq: per- 3cr. mission. 3 cr. 748. SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT Basic methods and theories of solid waste manage- 734. SYSTEMS ANALYSIS II ment systems, including collection and disposal A continuation of Systems Analysis 1. More ad- methods. Incineration, sanitary landhll design, etc.; vanced topics of systems analysis, including non- resource recovery techniques; hazardous waste linear programming, numerical methods, and management. Prereq: intro environ, pollution con- linear regression analysis. Application to the opti- trol or permission. 3 cr. mum design of structures, treatment plants, and other large-scale facilities. Prereq: Ci E 733. 3 cr. 749. CHEMISTRY OF NATURAL WATERS 740. RURAL WASTEWATER Chemical equilibrium concepts applied to natural ENGINEERING waters. Carbonate equilibria, acid-base equilibria, Methods for collecting and treating wastewater in redox equilibria, complexation and surface phe- small communities and rural areas. Biological and nomena. Equilibrium modeling of natural waters physicochcmical treatment systems for small com- and treatment processes. Prereq: gen chem. 3 cr. munities; land application; soil absorption; gray water treatment; and septage treatment. Prereq: 751. TRANSPORTATION PLANNING intro environ pollution control. 3 cr. Transportation demand forecasting techniques applied to regional and urban situations. Calibration 741. OPEN CHANNEL FLOW and use of mathematical models for forecasting Energy and momentum principles in open channel land use, trip generation, trip distribution, modal flow; flow resistance; channel controls and transi- choice, and trip assignment. Prereq: probability tions; unsteady open channel flows; convective and and/or statistics. 3 cr. dispersive transportation of pollutants; and basic modeling techniques. Prereq: fluid mechanics. 3 cr. 757. COASTAL ENGINEERING AND PROCESSES 743. ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLING Introduction to small amplitude and finite ampli- AND ANALYSIS tude wave theories. Wave forecasting by significant Laboratory exercises in the techniques of water, wave and wave spectrum methods. Coastal pro- wastewater, and solid-waste sampling and analysis. cesses and shoreline protection. Wave forces and Interpretation of results from pollution surveys and wave-structure interaction. Introduction to math- operation of pollution control facilities; statistics of ematical and physical modeling. Prereq: fluid me- sampling and statistical evaluation of analytical chanics or permission. 3 cr. data. Prereq: gen chem. Lab. 3 cr. 763. ADVANCED SOIL MECHANICS I 744. ENVIRONMENTAL LIMNOLOGY Current methods of determining soil strength and Biological, chemical, and physical processes that compressibility. Application to earth pressure, occur in lakes and impoundments are explored and bearing capacity, slope stability and settlement interpreted with respect to the cultural activities of problems. Prereq: soil mech. 3 cr. humans. Basic concepts of lake origin, morpho- metric and trophic status, water movement and 765. FOUNDATION ENGINEERING stratification, nutrient cycling, etc. Current lim- Subsurface investigation, excavation problems. Se- nologically related problems are explored from the lection of foundation type. Design of footings, environmental engineering standpoint. Term proj- rafts, pile foundations, bulkhead walls. Prereq: Ci E 763; structural design concepts. 3 cr. 41 Civil Engineering

766. GEOLOGICAL ENGINEERING 800. CIVIL ENGINEERING SEMINAR The influence of geology in the design of founda- Topics of interest to graduate students and staff; tions, underground excavations, tunnels, dams, reports of research ideas, progress, and results; in- and highways. Includes engineering properties of vited lectures by outside speakers. 1 cr. (Not to be rocks, rock mechanics, and tunneling. Prereq: soil applied toward graduation.) mechanics or permission. 3 cr. 822. HIGHWAY AND AIRPORT 768. SEEPAGE ANALYSIS AND EARTH ENGINEERING DAM DESIGN Design of flexible and rigid pavements and bases Groundwater flow, Darcy's law. flow nets, ana- for highways, airports, and city streets; pavement lytical techniques, Dupuit's theory, confined flow, selection, construction methods, materials, speci- flow through earth and rock structures, seepage fications, and engineering cost estimates. Prereq: toward wells, and earth dam design. Prereq: fluid Ci E721. 2-4 cr. mechanics and soil mechanics. 3 cr. 855. MICROBIOLOGY OF 782. TIMBER DESIGN WASTEWATER TREATMENT Properties and characteristics of structural woods, Detailed study of the microbiological aspects of mechanics of wood, connection methods, design wastewater treatment and the techniques used in of timber members, and connections in beams, the biological testing of water and wastewater. columns, and trusses, and glued laminates of Prereq: water and wastewater engineering; general wood. Prereq: structural design concepts; permis- microbiology; /or permission. Lab. 4 cr. sion. 2 cr. 856. INDUSTRIAL WASTEWATER 784. STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS BY TREATMENT MATRIX AND NUMERICAL METHODS Detailed consideration of the origin, characteristics, Unifying concept of basic structural analysis the- and treatment of industrial wastewater; the theory ories; matrix and numerical methods ot analysis, and application of unit operations unique to the and their application by linear graph concepts using treatment and disposal of industrial wastes. Prereq: computers. Prereq: indeterminate structures. 4 cr. water and wastewater engineering. 4 cr.

785. INTRODUCTION TO 857. ADVANCED WASTEWATER STRUCTURAL VIBRATIONS TREATMENT Dynamic analysis of single- and multi-degree-of- Theory, application, and evaluation of new pro- freedom systems. Simple beam and frame struc- cesses and developing techniques in water and was- tures. Earthquake analysis and design. Co- or tewater reclamation and reuse. Prereq: Ci E 746. prereq: indeterminate structures. 3 cr. 4 cr.

786. FINITE ELEMENT APPLICATIONS 858. ADVANCED WASTEWATER FOR SOLID MECHANICS SYSTEMS DESIGN Introductory course in the use of finite element A tormal design to solve a practical problem in methods tor solution ot various solid mechanics wastewater treatment; field data will be gathered, problems. Topics include basic matrix theory, di- a laboratory-scale unit run, and a design submitted rect stiffness method of structural analysis, devel- based upon the experimental findings. Prereq: Ci opment of finite element theory and modeling E 746; Ci E 856. Lab. 4 cr. engineering problems with tinite element modules. Prereq: intro. to computer programming, indeter- 859. ADVANCED WATER TREATMENT minate structures, or permission. 3 cr. THEORY AND PRACTICE Current water treatment processes and pertinent 791. PRESTRESSED CONCRETE articles will be critically assessed and discussed. Design ot prestresscd and post-tcnsioned concrete The state of adsorption equilibria modeling and its sections m flexure and shear. Prestressing systems application to coagulation, filtration, and column and ultimate strength methods will be introduced. adsorption. Limitations of chemical equilibrium Prereq: Ci E 793 or permission. 3 cr. models in treatment. Prereq: Ci E 749; permission. 3cr. 793. STRUCTURAL DESIGN IN STEEL The design ot members and connections: tension 864. THEORETICAL SOIL MECHANICS and compression members, beams, plate girders; Theories and numerical methods for stress analysis, riveted, bolted, and welded joints. Introduction to subgrade reaction, and laterally loaded piles. Con- plastic design of beams and frames. Prereq: struc- stitutive laws in linear elasticity, perfect plasticity, tural design concepts or permission. 4 cr. and visco-elasticity. Finite element methods in continuum soil mechanics. Limit analysis and plasticity 794. REINFpRCED CONCRETE DESIGN theory in soil mechanics. Prereq: Ci E 763, Ci E The design of reinforced concrete members by 786 or permission. 3 cr. Strength Design Theory including beams, columns, beam-columns, and slabs for strength and 865. SOIL STABILIZATION AND SITE deformations. Prereq: structural design concepts or IMPROVEMENT permission. 4 cr. Techniques for improving support characteristics of soils for civil engineering structures. Compac- 795. 796. INDEPENDENT STUDY tion, admixtures, precompression, landfills. Pre- A limited number ot qualitied graduate students req: Ci E 763, Ci E 765, or permission. 3 cr. will be permitted to pursue independent studies under faculty guidance.

42 Communiciilion Disorders

866. SOIL TESTING FOR ENGINEERING 890. TOPICS IN STRUCTURES PURPOSES Studies of topics of special interest and need ot the Modern techniques for site investigation and mea- student in structural design, analysis, and optimi- surement of soil properties in the tield and labo- zation. 2-4 cr. ratory; shear strength, permeability, consolidation, undisturbed sampling, classification, and in-situ 895, 896, 897. CIVIL ENGINEERING stresses. Combination of lectures, laboratory and PROBLEMS field trips. Prereq: Ci E 763 or equivalent. 2-4 cr. The study and investigation of problems selected to meet the needs of the students. 2-4 cr. 867. SOIL DYNAMICS Vibrations of elementary systems, wave propaga- 899. MASTER'S THESIS tion, elastic waves in layered systems, behavior ot 6-9 cr. dynamically loaded soils, vibrations of foundations, isolation of footings, field measurements and instrumentation, design procedures tor dynami- Communication Disorders cally loaded foundations. Prereq: Ci E 765; Ci E 763. 2 cr. (Comm)

868. OFFSHORE GEOTECHNICAL Chairperson: F. Harry Tokay PROBLEMS Techniques for sampling and testing of marine ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Frederick C. soils; design of offshore foundations. Stability Lewis; Frederick P. Murray; F. Harry Tokay problems under wave and earthquake loading. ASSISTANT PROFESSOR: Charles W. Martin Prereq: Ci E 763; Ci E 765 or permission. 3 cr. Program Objectives: Students are prepared to 881. ADVANCED STRUCTURAL function independently as clinicians within the field ANALYSIS I of communication disorders and to meet the aca- Advanced structural theory and analysis, including demic and practicum requirements for the Certif- multistory structures, beam columns, frames with icate of Clinical Competence of the American variable moment of inertia, continuous trusses and Speech, Language, and Hearing Association in the bents, arches and curved frames, stitt rings, and area of speech pathology. closed frames. 4 cr. Admission Procedures: Before considering a graduate application, the Communication Disor- 882. ADVANCED STRUCTURAL ders Program must have received: application, ANALYSIS II transcripts of previous academic work, three letters Methods of calculating stresses and deformations of recommendation, and the Graduate Record Ex- in plates and shells used in engineering structures. amination aptitude test or Miller Analogy scores. Bending of circular and rectangular plates. Mem- brane and flexural analysis of shells of revolution Major Curriculum with application in the design ot domes, pressure vessel tanks, and shell roofs. 4 cr. Applicants are expected to have a baccalaureate degree in communication disorders. The program 883. STRUCTURAL STABILITY is designed for part-time students; courses are of- Study of the elastic and inelastic buckling behavior fered in the evening and, on a concentrated basis, of structures. Topics include: stability of columns, during the summer. mathematical treatment of buckling problems and Required Courses: The following courses are buckling criteria, lateral stability of beams, buck- required of all students: 706, Stuttering; 801, Ar- ling of trusses and framed structures, and stability ticulation Disorders; 803, Organic Pathologies in of rings and curved beams. 4 cr. Children; 804, Neuropathologies of Speech and Language; 806, Voice Disorders; 812, Diagnosis 884. DYNAMICS OF STRUCTURES and Remediation of Language Disorders; 881, Re- Analysis of structures subjected to dynamic load- search Methodology. ings. Free and forced vibrations with one- and Electives: The following courses may be taken multi-degrees of freedom. Vibrations of curved to supplement required courses to satisfy minimum beams, multistory frames, and plate structures. credit hours and to accomplish academic require- Prereq: Ci E 785 or permission. 4 cr. ments for certification by the American Speech, Language, and Hearing Association: 701, American 885. APPLICATION OF SYSTEM Sign Language II; 702, American Sign Language THEORY TO STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS III; 704, Basic Audiology; 705, Introduction to Comprehensive development ot the stittness ma- Auditory Preception and Aural Rehabilitation; 780, trix of structures. Intuitive concepts ot topology Seminar in Diagnosis of Speech and Language Dis- and linear graphs and their application to structural orders; 810, Clinical Practicum; 816, Advanced frameworks. Analysis of structures using linear Clinical Audiology; 820, Graduate Seminar; 895, graphs. 4 cr. Special Topics in Communication Disorders; 899, Thesis. 887. APPLICATION OF LINEAR Clinical Practicum: Up to six credits may be GRAPHS TO CIVIL ENGINEERING completed in practicum registration. The specific Concepts of topology and linear graphs and their number of credits needed by a student will depend application to civil engineering planning of trans- on undergraduate program and experience. Stu- portation, water and sewage distribution, and other dents are scheduled for three hours per week of networks. Network planning and management direct client contact for each credit of practicum systems, including Project Evaluation Review registration and will be helped to gain tnc practi- Technique (PERT), Critical Path Methods (CPM), cum requirements for certification by the American and PERT/cost procedures. 4 cr. Speech, Language, and Hearing Association.

43 Computer Science

Written Examination: All students must pass 804. NEUROPATHOLOGIES OF SPEECH a written comprehensive examination designed to AND LANGUAGE assess their mastery ot the professional concepts of Principles concerning etiologies, instruments for communication disorders in the areas of normative evaluation, classification, and methods of clinical processes, pathologies, and remediation. management including the team approach to re- Thesis Option: Students may elect the option habilitation of speech and language neuropatholo- of writing a thesis. Such students must satisfacto- gies. 3 cr. rily complete the course in Research Methodology and must present a proposal for acceptance. Upon 806. VOICE DISORDERS completion of the research project, students must Types, causes, and characteristics of functional and defend their theses in an oral examination and must organic voice disorders. Specific evaluation of de- gain approval ot their theses committees. Six cred- viant vocal characteristics; treatment techniques for its will be awarded for satisfactory completion of children and adults. 3 cr. a thesis. 810. CLINICAL PRACTICUM 701. AMERICAN SIGN LANGUAGE II Practicum provides graduate student opportunity Advanced phonology, syntax, and semantics of to apply advanced theoretical knowledge in clinical American Sign Language. Emphasis on grammat- setting with speech, language, and hearing-im- ical processes that modulate meanings of signs in paired individuals. Diagnostic and therapy experi- discourse and development of receptive language ence is supervised. Prereq: permission. (May be skills. Prereq: American Sign Language I; permis- repeated up to 6 credits.) 1-6 cr. sion. 2 cr. 812. DIAGNOSIS AND REMEDIATION 702. AMERICAN SIGN LANGUAGE III OF LANGUAGE DISORDERS Emphasis on the advanced linguistic principles of Current diagnostic procedures and remediation American Sign Language, including idioms, slang, techniques to evaluate and treat language disorders. and their place in the communication patterns of 3 cr. the deaf. Improvement ot speed and accuracy in receptive and expressive skills for communicating 814. PEDIATRIC AUDIOLOGY with the deaf. Eciucational and vocational problems Auditory disorders in children, comprehensive di- associated with deafness. Prereq: Comm 701; per- agnostic evaluations, current state of the art in mission. 2 cr. hearing aids and amplitication for children, and theoretical and clinical habilitation/rehabilitation of 704. BASIC AUDIOLOGY hearing-impaired children. 3 cr. Normal hearing process and pathologies of the auditory system. Hearing screening, pure-tone test- 816. ADVANCED CLINICAL ing, and speech audiometry. Prereq: anatomy and AUDIOLOGY physiology ot speech and hearing mechanisms or Advanced clinical testing for identification of or- permission. 4 cr. ganic and nonorganic hearing disorders; instrumentation and calibration procedures; ISO and 705. INTRODUCTION TO AUDITORY ANSI standards. 3 cr. PERCEPTION AND AURAL REHABILITATION 820. GRADUATE SEMINAR Research, testing, and clinical procedures of audi- Current topics, recent investigations, and library tory perception, applied to the communicatively research. (May be repeated up to 9 credits barring impaired. Prereq: Comm 704; permission. 4 cr. duplication of subject matter.) 3 cr.

706. STUTTERING 895. SPECIAL TOPICS IN Theoretical and therapeutic considerations of the COMMUNICATION DISORDERS stuttering syndrome; emphasis upon clinical man- Advanced study in specific areas; will involve an agement. Prereq: speech pathology II or permis- independent project. Prereq: permission. (May be sion. 4 cr. repeated.) 1-3 cr.

780. SEMINAR IN DIAGNOSIS OF 899. MASTER'S THESIS SPEECH AND LANGUAGE DISORDERS Prereq: permission. 6 cr. Principles and practice for diagnosis of speech and language disorders; examination procedures and measurement techniques. Prereq: speech pathology Computer Science (CS) II. 4 cr. Chairperson: R. Daniel Bergeron 801. ARTICULATION DISORDERS Phonological theories as they relate to analysis and PROFESSOR: Shan S. Kuo remediation cr. of articulation disorders. 3 ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: R. Daniel Bergeron; Eugene C. Freuder; Robert D. 803. ORGANIC PATHOLOGIES IN Russell CHILDREN ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: Dov Harel; James Speech/language disorders associated with neuro- L. Weiner motor and oro-facial pathologies in children; etiologies; methods of evaluation cr. and treatment. 3 Master of Science in Computer Science

Admission Requirements: High-level language programming, assembler language programming, data structures, and operating system fundamentals. Further experience in computer sci-

44 Computer Science

ence, mathematics, and/or electrical engineering 715. INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL will also be expected. All applicants must submit INTELLIGENCE aptitude scores from the Graduate Record Exami- Machine intelligence, representation and control nation. The advanced GRE in computer science is issues, search methods, problem solving, learning recommended. computer vision, natural language understanding, Degree Requirements: Ten semester courses knowledge engineering, game playing. Heuristic approved by the department, plus a one-credit programming and the LISP language. Prereq: C S graduate seminar in computer science, are required. 711. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) All must be numbered over 700 and six of the ten must be chosen from the following group: CS 850- 716. DATA BASE TECHNIQUES 859, CS 898, CS 899 (may be used for two Data base analysis and design. Hierarchic, net- courses), E E 860, 865. A master's thesis/project work, and relational models. Data normalization, is required. data manipulation tools, data description languages, query functions and facilities, design and A maximum of four courses numbered 700 translation strategies, file and index organizations, to 799 may be applied to the Master of Science data integrity and reliability, data security tech- degree in Computer Science. niques, distributed database systems, actual usage of selected DBMS on computers. Prereq: data 710. ADVANCED SYSTEMS structures and processes. 4 cr. (Not offered every PROGRAMMING year.) Topics in systems programming, including organization and implementation of assemblers, linkage 753. NUMERICAL METHODS AND editors, job schedulers, command language decod- COMPUTERS I ers. File systems, protection, security, performance Use of scientific subroutine and plotter routine evaluation, and measurement. Prereq: operating packages, floating point arithmetic, polynomial system fundamentals and assembler-language pro- and cubic spline interpolation, implementation gramming. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) problems for linear and nonlinear equations, random numbers and Monte Carlo method, Rom- 711. PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES berg's method, optimization techniques. Selected AND COMPILER CONSTRUCTION algorithms programmed for computer solution. Formal definition ot programming languages; Prereq: calculus II; intro programming and FOR- specification of syntax and semantics. Properties of TRAN. (Also offered as Math 753.) 4 cr. algorithmic languages such as PL/I and ALGOL. Review of special purpose languages tor list pro- 754. NUMERICAL METHODS AND cessing, symbol manipulation, data description and COMPUTERS II simulation; run-time representation ot program Mathematical software. Computer solutions of dif- and data structures; how these properties affect ferential equations, eigenvalues and eigenvectors. compilation. Prereq: intro to computer program- Prereq: intro programming and FORTRAN. (Also ming and data structures and processes, all mod- offered as Math 754.) 4 cr. ules. 4 cr. 758. ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS 712. COMPILER DESIGN Introduction to use of basic mathematics in design Formal languages and formal techniques for syntax and analysis of computer algorithms. Topics in- analysis and parsing; organization of the compiler clude O-notation, divide and conquer, the greedy and its data structures; problems presented by error method, dynamic programming, and NP-com- recovery and code generation. Classical top-down pletencss. Prereq: mathematical proof; data struc- and bottom-up techniques currently in wicicspread tures and processes. 4 cr. (Not of^fered every year.) use, general discussion of LL (k) and LR (k) parsers; automatic methods of compiler generation and 790. TOPICS IN COMPUTER SCIENCE compiler compilers. Students required to dctine a Offered on an irregular basis with varying content. simple, nontrivial programming language and to 1-4 cr. design and implement its compiler. Prereq: C S 711. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) The following are the basic courses for the Master of Science degree in Computer Sci- 713. COMPUTER GRAPHICS ence. Input-output and representation of pictures from hardware and software points of view; interactive 800. GRADUATE SEMINAR techniques and their applications; development ot Regularly scheduled seminars presented by outside an interactive graphics system. Prereq: data struc- speakers, UNH faculty and graduate students. tures and processes; operating system tundamcn- Topics include reports of research ideas, progress

tals; /or permission. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) and results. 1 cr. Cr/F.

714. INTRODUCTION TO 850. OPTIMIZATION METHODS AND PROGRAMMING SEMANTICS COMPUTERS Informal, noninathematical introduction to de- Optimization methods applied to problems in en- scriptive techniques of denotational semantics. gineering, science, and management. Classical op- Provides framework needed to formally describe timization methods; dynamic programming; programming languages such as PASCAL. No integer programming; separable programming; previous knowledge of the theory of computation search methods; geometric programming; combi- or of any particular programming language is as- natorial optimization. Prereq: Math 753 or permis- sumed. Prereq; C S 711 or permission. 4 cr. (Not sion. 3 cr. offered every year.)

45 Earth Sciences

851. DATA BASE SYSTEMS 898. READING COURSE Access control techniques; access strategies; data 1-6 cr. base software; data base related languages; data translation techniques; recovery and restart; re- 899. THESIS/PROJECT structuring; concurrent access methods; very large 6 cr. data bases; performance and evaluation; protection and security. Prereq: C S 710 or permission. 3 cr. Earth Sciences (ESci) 852. SOFTWARE ENGINEERING Design approaches, implementation methodolo- Chairperson: Herbert Tischler gies, and management techniques required to develop large, reliable software systems including PROFESSORS: Franz E. Anderson; Wallace A. applications-oriented systems. Team programming Bothner; Henri E. Gaudette; Cecil J. Schneer; projects. Prereq: S 710 or permission. 3 cr. C Herbert Tischler ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Francis S. Birch; 853. ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE Wendell S. Brown; Theodore C. Loder III; Current approaches to machine intelligence and the Paul A. Mayewski' simulation of human cognitive processes, including RESEARCH ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR: James an introduction to recursive functions and pro- D. Irish gramming with the LISP language. Heuristic pro- ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: Jo Laird; Wm. gramming, programs for game playing and natural Berry Lyons language understanding, elementary theory ot ADJUNCT PROFESSOR: Robert I. Davis computability. Individual computer project re- GRADUATE PROGRAM COORDINATOR: quired. Prereq: programming experience. (Also Francis S. Birch offered as E E 853.) 3 cr. The Department of Earth Sciences offers grad- 854. AUTOMATA THEORY uate work leading to the Doctor of Philosophy and theoretical "machines" or au- Formal language and Master of Science degrees in Earth Sciences with tomata. Formal context-dependent, grammars; options in either geology or oceanography. context-free, and regular languages; finite state machines and regular expression recognizers; infi- Admission Requirements nite state machines; Turing machines; unsolvable problems and the halting problem; linear-bounded 1) Students are expected to have completed at push-down automata; cellular and reproducing and least one year of college chemistry, physics, and (Also automata. Prereq: programming experience. calculus; offered as E E 854.) 3 cr. 2) Students with an undergraduate equivalent to a major in geology, chemistry, physics, mathe- 855. OPERATING SYSTEMS matics, engineering, or in the biological sciences TECHNIQUES will be considered; Theoretical aspects of operating systems. Sched- 3) All applicants must submit scores on the ap- deadlock; paging and uling and resource allocation; titude portion of the Graduate Record Examina- synchronization; inter- segmentation; thrashing; tion. Students lacking some background in a process sequential communication; cooperating particular area may be admitted provided they are security; in-depth processes; protection and study prepared to complete courses, without graduate such as Prereq: of a complex system MULTICS. credit, in which they may be deficient. or equivalent. 3 cr. C S 710 The option (geology or oceanography) a student wishes to follow will determine the level of nec- 856. COMPUTER NETWORKS essary preparation. For instance, a student with an Distributed techniques for con^ computer systems; undergraduate major in physics who wishes to controlling sys- necting and them. Tightly coupled change direction to marine geology would have a to loosely systems. Design, tems coupled number of deficiencies in geology to complete be- associated different capabilities, and problems with sides completing the core curriculum in oceanog- types connections. Organizational possibilities of raphy. However, if that student wishes to pursue for theory applied to computer networks. Queuing a program stressing physical oceanography, fewer evaluation networks. Modelling and performance deficiencies would probably have to be completed. in distributed systems. Case studies of existing net- The preparation of each student will be determined such as Prereq: 712 or works ARPANET. E E prior to the beginning of the first semester in res- equivalent; C S 710. 3 cr. idence in order to plan the course of study.

857. COMPUTATIONAL LINGUISTICS General Degree Requirements for Master of Computational approach to the study of language. Science and Doctor Philosophy degrees in Problems in understanding and producing natural of (or natural-like) language by computer and hu- Earth Sciences, options in Geology and mans. Theories of parsing, meaning, knowledge Oceanography representation, and communication, along with their mechanical embodiments will be studied and Students in both the M.S. and Ph.D. programs compared. Prereq: permission. 3 cr. are required to complete the core curriculum for their respective options. 890. ADVANCED TOPICS IN Election of the core curriculum as well as addi- COMPUTER SCIENCE tional courses will depend upon each individual Offered on an irregular basis with varying content. student's specialization and/or preparation when 1-3 cr. entering the program.

46 Earlh Sciences

Geology Option: This option is designed pri- pretation of rock and mineral compositional dia- marily for students with an undergraduate back- grams; application of experimental investigations. ground in geology. Emphasis in this option may Prereq: mineralogy and petrography. Field trips. be placed upon: petrology-mineralogy; high tem- Lab. 4 cr. perature-isotope geochemistry; glaciology-glacial geology-geomorphology; geophysics; structural 732. GEOLOGIC MAPPING AND geology-tectonics; sedimentation-low temperature INTERPRETATION geochemistry; stratigraphy-paleontology. Standard methods of geologic field mapping; in- The core curriculum for the option in geology terpretation of geologic maps and aerial photo- normally mcludes: ESci 732, Geologic Mapping graphs of selected areas. Course includes field and Interpretation, 4 cr.; ESci 734, Applied Geo- mapping excursions to local areas and several ex- physics, 4 cr.; ESci 741, Geochemistry, 4 cr.; ESci tended exercises in selected areas of the northern

897, 898, Seminar in Earth Sciences, 1 cr. each Appalachian Mountains. Lab fee includes transpor- semester of the first year. tation and housing in the tield. Prereq: structural Additional courses are to be selected from 700- geology or permission. Lab. 4 cr. or 800-level courses in the department and/or from courses numbered 600 or above in disciplines out- 734. APPLIED GEOPHYSICS side of the department (chemistry, hydrology, en- Gravity, magnetic, seismic, electrical, and thermal gineering, physics, mathematics, etc.). methods of investigating subsurface geology. Oceanography Option: This option is de- Fieldwork and use of computers in data analysis. signed for students who wish to specialize in Prereq: one year of calculus; intro geol; one year chemical, geological, or physical oceanography. of college physics; /or permission. Lab. 4 cr. Although the broad scope of oceanography will be presented, the emphasis in the program will be 741. GEOCHEMISTRY placed on estuarine, coastal, and continental shelf Thermodynamics applied to geologic processes; processes and environments. geochemical differentiation of the earth; the prin- The core curriculum for the option in oceanog- ciples and processes that control the distribution raphy normally includes: ESci 752, Chemical and migration of elements in geological environ- Oceanography, 3 or 4 cr.; ESci 758, Introduction ments; stable and radiogenic isotopes in geologic to Physical Oceanography, 3 or 4 cr.; ESci 759, processes. 4 cr. Geological Oceanography, 4 cr.; ESci 897, 898,

Seminar in Earth Sciences, 1 cr. taken each semes- 752. CHEMICAL OCEANOGRAPHY ter of the first year. Water structure, chemical composition and equilib- Additional courses are to be selected from 700- rium models; gas exchange; biological effects on or 800-level courses in the department and/or from chemistry; trace metals and analytical methods. courses numbered 600 or above in disciplines out- Laboratory includes short cruise abroad R/V Jere side of the department (chemistry, hydrology, en- A. Chase. Prereq: permission. Lab (optional). 3 or gineering, physics, mathematics, etc.). 4cr.

Specific Requirements for the Master of 754. MODERN SEDIMENTS Science degree Modern sediments from a process-oriented viewpoint. Emphasis on shallow-water modern marine In addition to any deficiencies, students must sediments, including shelf", beach, and estuarine interactions will be satisfactorily complete a minimum of 30 credits, deposits. Animal/sediment which may include the 14 credits accumulated in considered. The laboratory investigates applied the core curriculum. Eight credits (not including techniques in modern sediment analysis. Prereq: or or permission. 899) must be taken at the 800 level. Students must intro to geology oceanography complete a master's thesis and give an oral presen- 4 cr. tation of the results. All students are required to participate in the instructional activities of the de- 758. INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICAL partment. OCEANOGRAPHY Ocean basins; physical properties of seawater; atmosphere-ocean interaction; general ocean circu- Specific Requirements for the Doctor of lation; waves and tides; continental shelf and near- Philosophy degree shore processes; instrumentation and methods used in ocean research. Simplified physical and mathe- 1) reading knowledge of an appropriate foreign matical models demonstrate the important con- language; 2) passing a qualifying examination, gen- cepts. Prereq: one year of calculus and college erally after two years of study; 3) teaching expe- physics; intro oceanog; /or permission. Variable rience equivalent to at least half-time for one year; credit: 3 cr. without lab; 4 cr. with optional lab 4) completion of significant original research de- and field project. scribed in a dissertation; and 5) passing an oral defense of that work. 759. GEOLOGICAL OCEANOGRAPHY Course requirements are flexible and are deter- Major geological features and processes of the mined by the student's individual guidance com- ocean floor; geological and geophysical methods; mittee. plate tectonics. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. 725. IGNEOUS AND METAMORPHIC PETROLOGY 762. GLACIAL GEOLOGY The glacial environment: glacier dynamics and gla- The origin, formation, and geologic history of ig- cial erosion and deposition. Review of world gla- neous and metamorphic rocks as determined from cial stratigraphy in light of causes of glaciation and field and laboratory studies of occurrences, mineral climatic cnange. Field trips. Prereq: intro geol; geo- assemblages, rock composition, and texture. Inter- morphology; /or permission. Lab. 4 cr.

47 Earth Sciences

771. MINERAL DEPOSITS 842. SEDIMENTARY GEOCHEMISTRY Introduction to the processes ot formation, geo- Chemistry of recent and ancient estuarinc, marine, logical characteristics, and environments of depo- and lacustrine sediments, emphasizing both kinetic sition of metallic mineral deposits, and a brief and thermodynamic principles in the understand- survey of the unique nature and importance of the ing of biogeochemical processes, authigenic min- mineral industries. Prereq: structural geology, pe- eral formation, and pore water chemistry in these trography. 4 cr. environments. 3 cr. (Offered alternate years.)

781. PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 843. THERMODYNAMICS IN GEOLOGY Materials and structures of the earth and erosive An application ot classical thermodynamics to geo- agents that modify them. Laboratory and field logic systems, emphasizing the relationships of trips. For certified elementary or high school sci- heat, work, energy, entropy, and free energy. ence teachers or for students in master's degree Prereq: one year of calculus, chemistry and physics; programs in education who need an introduction adequate background in geology. 3 cr. (Offered to the earth sciences. (Not available for credit after alternate years.) completing a basic geology course.) 4 cr. 845. ISOTOPE GEOLOGY 782. HISTORICAL GEOLOGY Discussion of element abundance and isotope for- Evolution of physical features and life on the earth. mation; radioactive decay as applied to geologic Fossil organisms; methods of historical geology; systems, detailed investigation of K-Ar, Rb-Sr, U- laboratory and field trips. Prereq: ESci 781 or Pb and Sm-Nd systems, and gcologic-oceano- equivalent. For certified elementary or high school graphic applications of stable isotopes. Laboratory science teachers or tor students in master's degree involves mass spectrometric and chemical tech- programs in education who need an introduction niques of isotopic analysis. Course includes the to the earth sciences. (Not available for credit after completion of a laboratory project. 4 cr. completing a basic geology course.) 4 cr. 852. ADVANCED CHEMICAL 795. TOPICS IN EARTH SCIENCES OCEANOGRAPHY A) Areal Geology; B) Geochemistry; C) Geo- Readings on physical, chemical, and biological morphology, Advanced; D) Geophysics; E) Glacial processes that affect the distribution of chemical Geology, Advanced; F) Groundwater Geology; components in estuaries and the open ocean. Lab- G) Historical Geology, Advanced; H) Industrial oratory includes projects investigating selected

Minerals; I) Micropaleontology; J) Mineral Fuels; processes. Prereq: ESci 752; /or permission. 4 cr. K) Mineralogy, Advanced; L) Optical Crystallog- raphy; M) Ore Deposits; N) Paleontology, Ad- 856. ESTUARINE AND MARINE vanced; O) Petrology, Advanced; P) Regional SEDIMENTATION Geology; Q) Sedimentation; R) Stratigraphy; Unique aspects of sedimentation in marine and es- S) Structural Geology, Advanced; T) Marine Ge- tuarine water with special emphasis on cohesive, ology; U) Physical Oceanography; V) History of fine-grained cstuarine sediment erosion, transpor- Geology; W) Earth Science Teaching Methods; tation, and deposition. Laboratory includes basic X) Senior Synthesis; Y) Chemical Oceanography; statistical analysis of sedimentological data. Course Z) Glaciology, Advanced. Special problems by includes completion of a project. Prereq: permis- means of conferences, assigned readings, and field sion. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) or laboratory work, fitted to individualneeds from one of the areas listed above. 1-4 cr. 858. DYNAMICAL OCEANOGRAPHY The hydrodynamics of such ocean phenomena as 813. X-RAY CRYSTALLOGRAPHY waves, tides, and ocean turbulence; wind-driven Theory and practice of diffraction of X rays by circulation on the continental shelf and deep ocean crystals; lattices, symmetry, and structure analysis. will be treated in detail. Prereq: ESci 758; M E 707; Prereq: mineralogy or physical chemistry or equiv- /or permission. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) alent. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) 859. DATA ANALYSIS METHODS IN 820. ADVANCED IGNEOUS OCEAN AND EARTH SCIENCES PETROLOGY Methods of analysis of oceanographic, geophysical, Extensive readings and discussions of original geological, and environmental data. An introduc- sources and recent literature with reference to clas- tory tutorial on important mathematical concepts sical petrologic provinces. Application of thermo- precedes the development of the bases for a number dynamics and phase-rule chemistry to igneous of data analysis techniques; digital filtering, regres- petrogenesis. Prereq: permission. 3 cr. (Not of- sion analysis, cross-spectral analysis, objective fered every year.) analysis, and elementary inverse theory, etc. Stu- dents use these techniques on real data. Prereq: 821. ADVANCED METAMORPHIC differential equations or equivalent. 3 cr. PETROLOGY Extensive readings and discussions of original 862. GLACIOLOGY sources and recent literature dealing with the facies Physical principles controlling glacier activity and concept, equilibrium reactions, reaction kinetics, the implications of glacier activity in the context and other chemical aspects of metamorphic petro- of current scientific problems. Prereq: eeomor- genesis. Prereq: permission. 3 cr. (Not offered phology, glacial geology, one year of college cal- every year.) culus, one semester each of college physics and chemistry/or permission. Lab and/or field project 841. ANALYTICAL GEOCHEMISTRY optional. 3-4 cr. (Offered alternate years.) Introduction to the theory, instrumentation, and applications of analytical methods in geochemistry. Prereq: permission. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.)

48 Economics

895, 896. TOPICS IN EARTH SCIENCES Information about fields available for the disser- Advanced work on an individual or group basis tation as well as other details of the doctoral pro- under members of the graduate staff. Sections of gram can be obtained from the director of this course are the same as those Hsted under ESci economic studies. 795. Prereq: permission of department chairperson and staff concerned. 1-4 cr. (May be taken more Master of Arts Degree than once.) The candidate for a master's degree may take a 897, 898. SEMINAR IN EARTH SCIENCES general course of study or the thesis option. The A review and discussion of recent hterature in the general requirements of the Graduate School and earth sciences. Required of graduate students in the following major requirements must be met: earth sciences. 1-3 cr. 1) 32 semester hours of graduate study, which may include 8 hours of thesis work; 899. MASTER'S THESIS 2) Minimum of 24 semester hours in courses 6cr. numbered 700 and above and at least 12 hours in courses numbered 800 and above apart from Econ 999. DOCTORAL RESEARCH 899, Master's Thesis; 3) Maximum of 8 semester hours in approved courses numbered 600 and above taken in related Economics (Econ) disciplines; 4) Written evidence of proficiency in economic Director of Economic Studies: Marc W. theory; of an 800-level course Herold 5) Successful completion in areas of history of economic thought and quantitative economics. PROFESSORS: Robert F. Barlow; Manley R.

Irwin; John Korbel; Sam Rosen; Kenneth J. J. 711. Rothwell; Dwayne E. Wrightsman ECONOMIC FLUCTUATIONS Recurrent movements of prosperity and depres- ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Allan Braff; J. causes and public-policy impli- Richard W. England; Marc W. Herold; Richard sion; emphasis on cations. Prereq: intermed macro or permission. W. Hurd; Richard L. Mills; Robert C. Puth; 4cr. Allen R. Thompson ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: Michael A. Conte; 715. ANALYSIS Marilyn B. Power; Evangelos O. Simos MARXIAN ECONOMIC Marx's analysis of capitalism within the classical and radical tradition; methodology; organization of Whittemore School of Business and capital; labor theory of value; accumulation of cap- Economics ital; growth and distribution; economic crises. Critical evaluation of Marx's analysis. Prereq; in- The economics faculty of the Whittemore termed micro; intermed macro; /or permission. School, together with the resource economics fac- 4 cr. ulty of the Institute of Natural and Environmental Resources, offers a program leading to the degree 720. U.S. ECONOMIC HISTORY of Doctor of Philosophy. In addition, the econom- From colonial times to the present. Applied eco- ics faculty offers a plan of study culminating in the nomic theory; economic models and interpretation degree of Master of Arts. of data. Influence of technology, industrialization, Admission to both programs is open to students foreign trade, monetary factors, and government; whose undergraduate work shows evidence of su- noneconomic factors. Prereq: intermed micro and perior ability and motivation and who manifest macro; /and permission. 4 cr. promise of serious scholarship. Normally, the appropriate undergraduate preparation will include 721. EUROPEAN ECONOMIC HISTORY exposure to economic reasoning and methodology, Western European and Mediterranean economies including mathematics and statistics. Those who from medieval times to the Common Market. Eco- warrant special consideration, even though their nomic models and interpretation of data. Capital backgrounds are deficient, should be aware that accumulation, technology, trade, industrialization, remedial work may be required. monetary factors, and the role of government; rel- Admission requirements in addition to those evant noneconomic factors. Prereq: intermed mi- established by the Graduate School include the cro or macro; /or permission. 4 cr. Graduate Record Examinations (aptitude and advanced test in economics). 727. ADVANCED ECONOMETRICS Provides familiarity with standard proofs and Doctor Philosophy Degree of propositions of theoretical econometrics and develops competence in the application of relatively Ph.D. candidacy requires written evidence of advanced econometric techniques. Use of com- proficiency in economic theory, the history of eco- puter required. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. nomic thought and methodology, and quantitative methods, as well as successful completion of two 735. ECONOMICS OF FINANCIAL advanced courses and two research workshops (4 MARKETS credits each) and demonstrated knowledge of one Economic analysis of financial market systems. foreign language. At present, workshops exist in Topics include financial market functions, theories finance, political economy, labor economics, of saving and investment, financial intermediation, econometrics, international development, and re- flow-of-funds analysis, loanable funds theory, in- source economics. terest rate forecasting, portfolio theory, capital- asset pricing models, structure of interest rates

49 Economics

(including term-structure theory), and macroeco- 757. ECONOMICS OF WORK nomic models of the financial sector. Prereq: Organization of work under capitalism. Compet- money and banking or permission. 4 cr. ing management philosophies, response of workers to management practices. Satisfaction of workers 736. SEMINAR IN MONETARY THEORY with their jobs, trends in worker productivity, al- AND POLICY ternative work arrangements, and worker partici- Contemporary developments in monetary theory pation in management. Prereq: labor unions and and the evaluation of policy measures. Prereq: the working class; labor econ; /or permission. 4 cr. money and banking or permission. 4 cr. 758. LABOR MARKET MODELING 741. SEMINAR IN PUBLIC FINANCE- Labor supply and demand forecasting models. De- THEORY AND POLICY mographic projections ot supply. Industrial, oc- Selected topics in contemporary theoretical and cupational projections of demand. Simulation policy problems of public finance. Prereq: public models for analyzing the impact of manpower and finance or permission. 4 cr. welfare programs. Use of the computer involved in doing assigned exercises, but no prior familiarity 745. INTERNATIONAL TRADE with computers is required. Prereq: permission. Contemporary issues in international economic 4 cr. theory and policy. Analysis of trade theory, dynamics of world trade and exchange, and interna- 768. SEMINAR IN ECONOMIC tional commercial policy. Prereq: international DEVELOPMENT econ or permission. 4 cr. An advanced reading seminar. Topics include: Methodologies underlying economic development 746. INTERNATIONAL FINANCE theory; industrialization and post-import substitu- International monetary mechanism; balance of pay- tion, state capitalist development, stabilization pol- ments, international investment; exchange rates, icies, appropriate technologies, the capital goods adjustment systems, international liquidity, foreign sector, agricultural modernization schemes, and aid, multinational corporations. Prereq: prin of attempts at transition to socialism. Prereq: permis- econ. 4 cr. sion. 4 cr.

747. MULTINATIONAL ENTERPRISES 769. CASE STUDIES IN ECONOMIC The internationalization of economies. Growth and DEVELOPMENT implications of the multinational corporation at the A) Southeast Asia; B) Cost-Benefit and Project level of systems. Theories of imperialism, inter- Analysis; C) Africa; D) Latin America; E) Middle national unity/rivalry; theories of direct invest- East. Problems and policies in selected countries; ment; the exercise of influence and conflict, evaluations of national plans, programs, and proj- technology transfer, bargaining with host country; ects; comparative analysis. Prereq: prin of econ or effects on U.S. economy. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. permission. 4 cr.

751. GOVERNMENT REGULATION OF 798. ECONOMIC PROBLEMS BUSINESS Special topics; may be repeated. Prereq: permission Analysis of government policy with reference to of adviser and instructor. 2 or 4 cr. such problems as conspiracy, monopoly, mergers, unfair practices, and discrimination; legal and eco- 825. MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS nomic appraisal of government policy alternatives. Principal mathematical techniques and their appli- Prereq: govt reg of busi or permission. 4 cr. cation in economics. Topics covered: matrix algebra, derivatives, unconstrained and constrained 752. TECHNOLOGY, INFORMATION optimization, linear and nonlinear programming, AND PUBLIC POLICY game theory, elements of integral calculus. 4 cr. The U.S. as a post-industrial economy. Impact of microelectronics on manufacturing, distribution, 826. EMPIRICAL ECONOMIC METHODS employment, and competition; domestic and in- Application of statistical and econometric methods ternational policy implications of information to problems in economics. Topics covered: ordi- transfer. 4 cr. nary least squares, generalized least squares, distributed lag models, omitted variables, 755. COLLECTIVE BARGAINING simultaneous equation models, two-state least Historical development of the U.S. labor move- squares. 4 cr. ment and the industrial relations system. Contem- porary collective bargaining issues; the role ot 857-858. HISTORY OF ECONOMIC public policy in industrial relations. 4 cr. THOUGHT Development of economic thought, with emphasis 756. LABOR ECONOMICS on different methodological approaches and the Recent developments in labor market analysis and development of theories of value and income dis- public policies related to contemporary labor is- tribution. Focus on major economic thinkers of the sues. Labor supply, the structure and stratification 18th through 20th centuries, including Smith, Ri- of labor markets, economic discrimination, un- cardo, Marx, neo-classical economists, Keynes, employment and poverty, inflation, and wage- Dobb, and Sraffa. 4 cr. price controls. Prereq: labor econ or permission. 4 cr. 873. MACROECONOMIC THEORY Advanced analysis of such aggregates as national income, total output, employment, and the general price-level. Examination ot^ the major aggregate models. 4 cr.

50 Educaticn

874. ECONOMIC DYNAMICS Admission Requirements Dynamic analysis of macro- and microeconomic models. Dynamic stability, disequilibrium dynam- 1) Above average academic credentials; 2) above ics, growth theory, and stochastic processes. average scores on the Graduate Record Examina- Prereq: Econ 825, 873, and 877; /or equivalent. tion; 3) three strongly supportive letters of recom- 4cr. mendation attesting to intellectual and personal competence from persons in a position to judge the 877. MICROECONOMIC THEORY applicant's preparation and fitness for graduate Topics in microeconomics with emphasis on recent work; 4) applicants for the Certificate of Advanced developments in such areas as general equilibrium Graduate Study must meet the preceding admission analysis, welfare economics, demand and produc- requirements and also possess a master s degree in tion theory, and capital theory. 4 cr. an appropriate specialty, and follow general admission procedures. 878. ECONOMICS OF CENTRALIZED The education department's admissions com- AND MIXED SYSTEMS mittee acts upon applications to all departmental Origins of Soviet planning; planning agriculture programs three times per year following Graduate and industry; Soviet growth models; input-output School application deadlines (NOTE: Applications and material balances; optimal planning; value and for full-time study in the Counseling M.Ed, and prices in socialist economies; economic reforms; M.A. programs are acted upon only during the theories about nature of socialist societies. Mech- April admissions meeting.). anisms of centralized planning in their socio-historical context. Prereq: Econ 873, Econ 877, or Concluding Degree Experience permission. 4 cr. Candidates in a Master of Education program 895. INDEPENDENT STUDY usually conclude degree work by completing one Variable cr. of five types of concluding experiences: 1) research thesis; 2) written comprehensive examination; 3) 896. RESEARCH WORKSHOP development of a written set of professional theses A) Finance; B) Political Economy; C) Labor Eco- followed by an oral examination; 4) clinical expe- nomics; D) Econometrics; E) Resource Econom- rience; 5) teaching internship-related project. Stu- ics; F) International Development. 2 cr. Cr/F. dents must enroll in Education 899, Master's Thesis, when the research thesis is selected. 899. MASTER'S THESIS Candidates in the Master of Arts in Teaching Bcr. program usually conclude degree work by completing a project closely related to the teaching 999. DOCTORAL RESEARCH internship. Candidates in the Certificate of Advanced Grad- uate Study program in counseling usually conclude degree worK by completing one of three types of Education (Educ) concluding experiences: 1) research thesis; 2) written comprehensive examination; 3) development of Chairperson: Roland B. Kimball a written set of professional theses followed by an oral examination. PROFESSORS: Angelo V. Boy; Donald H. Master's Degree Programs in Graves; Roland B. Kimball; Carleton P. Menge ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Michael D. Education Andrew; Richard F. Antonak; Charles H.

Ashley; Jason E. Boynton; John J. Carney; Seven graduate programs lead to the Master of John G. Chaltas; Ellen P. Corcoran; Ann L. Education degree: counseling, developmental dis-

Diller; David D. Draves; Edward J. Durnall; abilities, early childhood education, educational ad- David J. Hebert; Sharon N. Oja; M. Daniel ministration and supervision, elementary edu- Smith; Deborah E. Stone; Dwight Webb cation, reading, and secondary education. ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: Grant L. Cioffi; Most programs are available to part-time admit- Susan D. Franzosa; Maryanne Galvin; Jane A. ted graduate students. Since not all courses are Hansen; Bruce L. Mallory; Karen A. Mazza; offered each semester, students should consult the Richard L. Schwab; Mary Bowes Winslow current Time and Room Schedule for course offer- ADJUNCT PROFESSOR: Donald D. Durrell ings. ADJUNCT ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR: Richard H. Goodman Counseling GRADUATE PROGRAM COORDINATOR: Program Information: Angelo Boy, Mary- David D. Draves anne Galvin, David Hebert, and Dwight Webb. The Counseling Program offers students a choice Admission to Graduate Standing of either the Master of Arts degree or the Master of Education degree. Enrollment in the M.A. pro- Admission to graduate standing in the Depart- gram is very limited because of the thesis requirement of Education is granted to applicants meeting ment. The M.A. degree requires completion of the entrance requirements of the Graduate School seven core courses (28 credits), elective courses (8 and accepted by the department. Applications must credits), and the completion of a research thesis (6 include Graduate Record Examination scores tor credits), for a total of 42 credits. These 42 credits the aptitude test. should be viewed as a minimum number because in many cases it is determined that the student needs additional coursework m statistics and research methodology in order to complete the thesis

51 Education

requirement. The Master of Education degree re- Concluding Experience: Each degree candi- quires completion of the seven core courses (28 date must pass a written comprehensive examina- credits), elective courses (8 credits), and successful tion. completion of a written comprehensive essay examination. Early Childhood These programs prepare professional counselors Program Information: Donald Graves, Bruce to function in a variety of institutions, organiza- L. Mallory, Deborah Stone. tions, and agencies dedicated to the educational, The Early Childhood Program primarily serves vocational, social, and psychological development experienced child workers who wish to improve of the person, within the context of school and their professional competence and broaden their university settings, human service programs, hu- career options. The program prepares participants man development centers, and rehabilitation agen- as early childhood resource specialists, competent cies. Graduates of the program are engaged in to assume roles as master teacher, program super- providing preventive and restorative services to visor, curriculum consultant, statf development persons who possess normal and developmental director, parent-home educator, family agency co- concerns. Graduates are typically involved in the ordinator, or community college instructor. The team delivery of services and work in collaboration program emphasizes field-based experience coor- with other human services professionals. dinated with extensive coursework in related aca- Core Requirements (28 credits): Educ 820, demic disciplines. Students enroll on either a part- Counseling Theory and Practice; 821, Psychology time or full-time basis. During the academic year, of Career and Personal Development; 822, Assess- students are responsible for staffing early learning ment m Counseling; 823, Group Counseling; 824, centers in local school districts, private nursery and Psychological Adaptation; 825 and 826, Counseling kindergarten programs, day care centers, aevel- Internship. opment centers, and special services facilities. Can- Electives (8 credits): Educ 818 and 819 mav didates engage in coursework and seminars serve as electives. In addition, in consultation with concurrent with an internship experience through the adviser, electives may be selected from gradu- study on campus two afternoons and evenings per ate-level courses which are related to the behavioral week. They also provide workshops for staff and sciences and offered by a department or school in parent groups ancf carry out independent studies in the University. areas of special interest and significance. Core Curriculum (28 credits): Educ 841, Child Developmental Disabilities Development for the Early Childhood Profes- Program Information: Richard F. Antonak, sional; 843, Environment for Early Childhood; Bruce L. Mallory, M. Daniel Smith, (Education); 800-801, Internship and Seminar in Teaching; 846, Ann D. Ury, (Occupational Therapy); F. Harry Assessment in Early Childhood; 848, Contempo- Tokay, (Communication Disorders) rary Influences in Early Childhood; 850, Founda- This program prepares graduates to assume re- tions of Early Childhood Education; 895, sponsibility in the service delivery system for de- Independent Study in Education. velopmentally disabled citizens (i.e., mental Electives (8 credits): Other graduate-level retardation, cerebral palsy, convulsive disorders, courses within or outside of the Department of autism, multiple handicaps), including: 1) directing Education are acceptable depending upon the stu- the interaction of various therapies and disciplines dent's background, individual goals, and adviser's providing service to the developmentally disabled, approval. 2) coordinating, supervising, and administering Special Needs Option: Students who wish to human service programs for developmentally dis- specialize in the education and development of han- abled, 3) planning and evaluating human service clicapped or exceptional children between birth and programs, and 4) maintaining and improving such eight years may apply to the Special Needs Option. programs through public relations, community Students choosing this option will concentrate on awareness, and grant procurement activities. the assessment of children with developmental dis- Candidates are expected to have prior experience abilities or delays, the design of appropriate envi- in one of several related professions (such as nurs- ronments and individual programs, working with ing, medicine, occupational therapy, communica- parents, and understanding the administrative and tions disorders, psychology, physical therapy, legal issues relating to young handicapped children. social work, education) and/or a strong theoretical Core Curriculum (34 credits): Education 841, background in these disciplines. At present, this 843, 846, 848, 800-801, (see above); and Education program is available only to part-time admitted 760, Introduction to Young Children with Hand- graduate students. icaps; 847, Diagnosis and Educational Planning for Required Courses (28 credits): Educ 883, Ad- Young Handicapped Children; 849, Supporting vanced Psychology of Human Learning; 854, Sur- Parents of Young Handicapped Children. vey of Developmental Disabilities; 855, Service Electives (8 credits): Other graduate-level Delivery Systems in Developmental Disabilities; courses within the Early Childhood, Develop- Occupational Therapy 701, Managing Resources mental Disabilities, and other Department of Ed- for the Developmentally Disabled; Educ 856-857, ucation programs, as well as graduate-level courses Field Practicum and Seminar in Developmental from outside the department, are acceptable with Disabilities; and one course in the area of admin- permission of the student's adviser. istration. Concluding Experience: Degree candidates Electives (8 credits, minimum): elective courses must successfully complete one of the following: may be selected, in consultation with the adviser, comprehensive examination, research thesis, or from the offerings of graduate departments ot the major integrating project. University to meet individual needs and professional objectives. A maximum of eight elective Educational Administration and Supervision credits may be earned by completing a master's Program Information: Charles Ashley, Jason research thesis (Educ 899). Boynton, Roland Kimball, and Mary Winslow. The program is designed for the experienced

52 Education

teacher to become qualified in the broad area of Core Curriculum (28 credits): Educ 807, Foun- supervision and administration, grades K-12. Em- dations of Reading Instruction; 808-809, Clinical phasis is on the elementary and secondary school Diagnosis and Remediation of Reading Difficulties prmcipalship and general instructional supervision. and Disabilities; 810, Comprehensive Reading Core Requirements (28 credits): Educ 872, Ed- Methods in the Secondary School; 813, Field Prac- ucational Program Evaluation; 865, Educational ticum; 814, Seminar in Reading. Choose one of the Supervision; 853, Seminar in Curriculum Study; following: 734, Children's Literature; 776, Reading 861, Public School Administration; 863, Seminar for Children with Special Needs; 806, Approaches in Educational Administration; 867, Legal Aspects to Language Art Instruction; 815, Reading and the of School Administration; and 869, Practicum in Adult Learner. Educational Administration. Electives (8 credits): The remainder of courses Electives (8 credits) are individually planned, are selected in consultation with the adviser. They with major portion selected from the following: may be from the offerings of the Department of Educ 797, Seminar in Contemporary Educational Education or reflect an interdisciplinary approach Problems; 864, Personnel and Communication in with other graduate departments at the University. Educational Organizations; 868, Collective Bar- A student using the research thesis option as a gaining in Public Education; 886, Philosophy of concluding experience will use the 8 credits for Education; 895, Independent Study in Education; Educ 899, Master's Thesis. Admn 713, Interpersonal and Group Dynamics; Concluding Experience: Degree candidates Admn 803, Human Behavior in Organizations; Soc will successfully complete one of the following: 740, Culture Change; Soc 770, Culture, Personal- written examination, theses plus oral examination, ity, and Society; and Soc 888, Sociology of Edu- or research thesis. cation: the Cultures of Poverty and Affluence. Concluding Experience: 1) Comprehensive Degree Programs for Preservice Teachers: oral examination based on the thesis prepared by Master of Arts in Teaching and Master of the candidate or 2) major research study related to Education school administration, curricula, or educational supervision. Program Information: Michael Andrew or Ellen Corcoran. Education Elementary and Secondary The Department of Education offers two grad- Teacher Education Program Information: uate programs for prospective elementary and sec- chairperson; Ellen Committee: Michael Andrew, ondary teachers, leading to either the Master of Chaltas; Susan Franzosa; Karen Corcoran; John Arts in Teaching (M.A.T.) degree or the Master Mazza; Sharon Oja; and Richard Schwab. of Education (M.Ed.) degree. Both programs re- and secondary education pro- The elementary quire a minimum of 30 credits and are designed for grams are designed tor teachers who have been two types of students: 1) those in the Five Year, granted teaching certificates and who intend to be- Undergraduate-Graduate Program who entered classroom teachers. come or to continue to be the teacher preparation program as undergraduates Core Curriculum (12 credits): Selections may at UNH and have thus satisfied some of the re- Tests Measurements; be made from: Educ 785, and quirements for teacher certification prior to grad- in Curriculum Study; 883, Advanced 853, Seminar uate study; 2) those who have completed an Learning; 884, Advanced Psychology of Human undergraduate program, either at UNH or else- Development; 886, Philosophy of Educa- Human where, with little or no coursework in education. of Education: Social tion; and Soc 838, Sociology Specialization may be developed for teaching at the Organization of Schools and Community. primary, middle, and/or high school levels. Stu- consultation with and Electives (18 credits): In dents entering these master's degree programs nor- the approval the student's adviser, electives with of mally have completed a bachelor's degree program be taken in specialized areas from within the may with a major outside the field of education. of Education, in the student's major Department All professional education requirements for certification field, or in combination of the two. A student some must he met either prior to or as a part of the master's using the research thesis option of the concluding degree programs for preserrice teachers. These profes- will use 12 elective credits tor experience normally sional requirements include: Educ 500, Exploring Techniques of Educational Ecluc 881, Methods and Teaching; 700, Educational Structure and Change; Master's Thesis Research (4 cr.) and Educ 899, (8 701, Human Learning and Development: Educa- cr.). tional Psychology; "703, Alternative Teaching Experience: Degree candidates Concluding Models; 705, Alternative Perspectives on the Na- one ot the following: must successfully complete ture of Education; and 800-801, Internship and oral examination, or research thesis. theses plus Seminar in Teaching. Additional requirements for all prospective elementary teacher candidates in- Reading clucie 706, Introduction to Reading Instruction in Program Information: John Carney, Jane the Elementary School, and two from the follow- Hansen, Grant Ciotfi. ing: Math 621, Number Systems for Elementary The reading program provides professional School Teachers; Math 622, Geometry for Ele- training as a teacher of reading, clinician, and con- mentary School Teachers; Math 623, Topics for sultant for individuals seeking certification as read- Elementary School Teachers; or Math 703, Math- ing specialists. The program is designed to meet ematics Education K-6. International standards recommended by the Read- All candidates who do not participate in the Live, training of ing Association for the professional Learn, and Teach program must complete, or have personnel and certification requirements ot reading completed prior to admission, either: 1) Educ 500, for reading specialists. the state of New Hampshire Exploring Teaching, or 2) a one-semester teacher trains students in the areas ot ele- The program aide experience, or its equivalent, with a supportive reading foundations, clin- mentary and secondary recommendation from school staff. consultant and supervisory ical competencies, The Live, Learn, and Teach program is a 10- skills, and research capabilities.

53 Education

credit, seven-week experiential summer program Counseling (C.A.G.S.) which may be an integral part of the master's de- This program is designed for those who possess gree program, particularly for those students who a master's degree in counseling or an equivalent have done no previous coursework in education. master's degree and want to pursue further study The summer program consists of Educ 831 or 835 toward the Certificate of Advanced Graduate (4 cr.), 703 (4 cr.), and 700 (2 cr.). The program Study. The candidate for this certificate must suc- also satisfies the requirement for Educ 500. cessfully complete 32 graduate credits beyond the master's degree, and one of the following before Master of Arts in Teaching (Elementary and graduation: written examination, oral examination, Secondary) or research thesis. The M.A.T. program is most appropriate for Required Education Courses (20 credits): students who wish to do a portion ot their degree Educ 827, Administration of Counseling Services; coursework outside of the Department of Educa- 828, Advanced Counseling Theory and Practice; tion, in their major teaching field or associated 829, Advanced Counseling Internship; 830, Re- fields. search in Counseling; and 884, Advanced Human Professional Education Requirements (12-40 Development. credits): Either as part of the degree program or Electives (12 credits): Elective courses available prior to admission, these required certification within the Counselor Education Program are: Educ courses or their equivalents must be successfully 818, Principles and Procedures in Rehabilitation completed: Educ 500, 700, 701, 703, 705, 800, 801. and Educ 819, Social and Psychological Aspects of (In addition, for elementary teacher certification: Disability. Educ 706 and two courses from Math 621, 622, In consultation with one's adviser, electives may 623, 703). be selected from graduate-level courses offered by Courses Related to the Teaching Field (12 the departments of education, business administra- credits): These courses are to be selected in con- tion, economics, English, history, home econom- sultation with one's adviser, from departments ics, mathematics, political science, psychology, and other than the Department of Education. (For those sociology. seeking elementary teacher certification, a required Concluding Experience: Degree candidates mathematics course may be included.) must successfully complete one of the following: Electives (0-6 credits): These courses, selected research thesis; written examination; or written set in consultation with one's adviser, may be from of professional theses followed by an oral exami- those offered by the Department of Education or nation. other departments. Concluding Experience: Degree candidates Educational Administration and Supervision must successfully complete one of the following: (C.A.G.S.) project, theses plus oral examination, or research Designed for individuals who possess a master's thesis. degree or graduate study equivalent to that outlined in the University of New Hampshire M.Ed, pro- Master of Education (Elementary and Secondary) gram in Educational Administration and Supervi- The Master of Education degree for preservice sion and who wish advanced preparation for teachers is designed for those students who wish careers as school superintendents, assistant super- to concentrate their graduate study in the Depart- intendents, business managers, state department of ment of Education. education personnel, vocational education coordi- Professional Education Requirements (12-40 nators, curriculum coordinators, or educational credits): Either as part of the degree program or personnel in private organizations. prior to admission, these required certification Candidates must complete a significant field courses or their equivalents must be successfully project and internship of 12 semester hours within completed: Educ 500, 700, 701, 703, 705, 800, 801. the administrative environment in which they in- (In addition, for elementary teacher certification: tend to function. Courses are required in five com- Educ 706 and two courses from Math 621, 622, petency areas: institutional analysis, organi- 623, 703.) zational behavior, policy analysis, managerial Courses for an Education Area Concentra- leadership, and instructional leadership. Twelve tion (12 credits): In consultation with one's ad- semester hours include electives outside the De- viser, courses offered by the Department of partment of Education. Education will be selectecl which concentrate on The program is based upon the following: some aspect of the field of education. (For those 1) Students in this program pursue basic courses seeking elementary teacher certification, Educ 706 in educational administration and supervision as may be included.) well as electives which will enable them to function Electives (0-6 credits): These courses, selected more adequately within a specific administrative in consultation with one's adviser, may be troni environment. those offered by the Department of Education or 2) Because of the complex role ot the school other departments. administrator, persons seelcing preparation as ad- Concluding Experience: Degree candidates ministrators must demonstrate intellectual and per- must successfully complete one of the following: sonal competence of superior quality. project, theses plus oral examination, or research 3) The graduate program for administrators will thesis. emphasize the ability to apply the relevant facts ana formulations derived from administrative the- Certificate of Advanced Graduate ory and research in the solution of significant op- Study erational problems. Contact: Charles H. Ashley, associate professor of education, Morrill Hall, for further details. A Certificate of Advanced Graduate Study (C.A.G.S.) is available in two programs: Counsel- ing, and Educational Administration and Supervi- sion.

54 Education

700. EDUCATIONAL STRUCTURE AND to Time and Room Schedule). Minimum of 4 credits CHANGE required for teacher certification. For secondary A) Educational Structure and Change; B) Edu- teacher candidates, the appropriate methods cation in America: Backgrounds, Structure, and course, taught in the department of the major, Function; C) Governance of American Schools; usually satisfies this requirement. Educ 703B is rc- D) School and Cultural Change; E) Teacher and guirea for candidates for elementary teacher certi- Cultural Change; F) Social Perspectives of Conflict fication who do not complete 703C, D, F, or G. in the Schools; G) Nature and Processes of Change Prereq. for teacher certification students: Exploring in Education; H) What Is an Elementary School?; Teaching and permission, which is accomplished in I) Schooling for the Early Adolescent; J) Children by signing the appropriate course roster the with Special Needs: History and Models; Teacher Education Office. Prereq. for students not K) Curriculum Structure and Change; L) Stress in seeking teacher certification: permission, as de- Educational Organizations. Organization, struc- scribed above. 2 or 4 cr. ture, and function of American schools; historical, political, and social perspectives; nature and pro- 705. ALTERNATIVE PERSPECTIVES ON cesses of change m education. Two- and 4-credit THE NATURE OF EDUCATION courses offcrea each semester (listed in department A) Contemporary Educational Perspectives; prior to preregistration; refer to Time and Room B) Controversial Issues in Education; C) Ethical Schedule). Minimum of 4 credits required tor Issues in Education; D) Concepts of Teaching: Dif- teacher certification. Prereq. for teacher certit'ica- fering Views; E) Curriculum Theory and Devel- tion students: Exploring Teaching and permission, opment; F) Readings on Educational Perspectives; which IS accomplished by signing the appropriate G) Philosophy of Education; H) The Scope of Ed- course roster in the Teacher Education Otfice. ucation; I) Education as a Form of Social Control; and the Prereq. for students not seeking teacher certifica- J) School Reform Theories; K) Schooling tion: permission, as described above. 2 or 4 cr. Rights of Children; L) Education, Inequality, and the Meritocracy; M) Readings in Philosophies of 701. HUMAN DEVELOPMENT AND Outdoor Education; N) Alternative Perspectives LEARNING: EDUCATIONAL on the Nature of Education; O) Classrooms: The PSYCHOLOGY Social Context; P) Teaching: The Social Context; A) Human Development and Learning: Educa- Q) School and Society. Students formulate, de- tional Psychology; B) Human Development: Ed- velop, and evaluate their own educational princi- ucational Psychology; C) Human Learning: ples, standards, and priorities. Alternative Educational Psychology; D) Developmental Bases philosophies of education; contemporary educa- of Learning and Emotional Problems; E) Learning tional issues. Two- and 4-credit courses offered Theory, Modification of Behavior, and Classroom each semester (listed in department prior to pre- Management; F) Cognitive and Moral Develop- registration; refer to Time and Room Schedule). Min- ment; G) Evaluating Classroom Learning; H) De- imum of 4 cr. required for teacher certification. liberate Psychological Education; I) Sex Role, Prereq. for teacher certification students: Exploring

Learning, and School Achievement; J) The Devel- Teaching and permission, which is accomplished opment of Thinking. Child development through by signing the appropriate course roster in the adolescence, learning theory, cognitive psychol- Teacher Education Office. Prereq. for students not ogy, research in teaching and teacher effectiveness, seeking teacher certification: permission, as de- and evaluation, all applied to problems of class- scribed above. 2 or 4 cr. room and individual teaching and therapy. Full 4- credit course and 2-credit minicourses offered each 706. INTRODUCTION TO READING semester (listed in department prior to pre- INSTRUCTION IN THE ELEMENTARY registration; refer to Time and Room Schedule). SCHOOLS Minicourses emphasize either development (first Reading process; current procedures and materials; half of semester) or learning (second half). Can- diagnostic techniques; practicum experience. didates for teacher certification are required to have Course satisfies reading requirement for prospec- at least 2 credits of development and 2 credits of tive elementary teachers in the five-year teacher learning, or the full 4-credit course (701A). Prereq. education program and may be included in the 12 for teacher certification students: Exploring Teach- required graduate credits in education at the grad- ing and permission, which is accomplished by uate level. Course may also be taken for under- signing the appropriate course roster in the Teacher graduate credit before entrance into fifth year; in Education Office. Prereq. for students not seeking this case the course satisfies reading requirement teacher certification: permission, as described but is not applicable toward the 12 required grad- above. 2 or 4 cr. uate credits. Prereq: exploring teaching. 4 cr.

703. ALTERNATIVE TEACHING 707. APPROACHES TO TEACHING MODELS READING AT THE SECONDARY LEVEL A) Alternative Teaching Models; B) Developing The Reading Curriculum in The Secondary School: Teaching Plans; C) Alternative Strategies for structural components (developmental, corrective, Maintaining Classroom Control; D) Nature and remedial); materials and methods of instruction and Goals of Social Studies: K-12; E) Social Studies appraisal; instruments of measurement and evalu- Instructional Materials: K-12; F) Teaching Elemen- ation in the comprehensive secondary reading pro- tary and Middle School Science; G) Language Arts gram. 2 cr. Teaching Reading through the Content for Elementary Teachers; H) Experiential Curric- Areas: Alternatives and Application: new approaches,

ulum; I) Children with Special Needs: Teaching concepts, and methodologies of teaching reading Strategies. Basic teaching models, techniques of through content materials; workshop to develop implementation, and relationships to curricula. and produce instructional strategies and materials Two- and 4-credit courses offered each semester for an integrated reading-content program. 2 cr. (listed in department prior to preregistration; refer

55 Education

(Two credits of 707 may be used to satisfy 2 credits Strengths and special needs of handicapped chil- of Educ700). dren; causes, identification, and treatment; current legislation; parent and family concerns; program 733. INTRODUCTION TO THE models. 4 cr. TEACHING OF WRITING Development ot writers, child to adult; ways to 763. INTRODUCTION TO respond to writing, and the organization of the EDUCATIONAL MEDIA classroom for the teaching ot writing. Persons tak- Educational media in the learning process; curric- ing the course will need to have access to students ular integration of materials and equipment in the to carry out course requirements. Prereq: permis- school library media center; design and implemen- sion. 4 cr. tation of learning systems that provide a framework for the development ot individual skills. 4 cr. 734. CHILDREN'S LITERATURE Interpretive and critical study of literature for chil- 764. TELEVISION AND THE YOUNG dren in the elementary, middle, and junior high CHILD schools. Methods of using literature with children. The emergence of television as a cultural force and 4 cr. its affect upon the development of the young child—physically, socially, emotionally, and intel- 750. INTRODUCTION TO lectually. Working with parents, teachers, and chil- EXCEPTIONALITY dren to help them become better television Survey ot the social, psychological, and physical consumers and planning alternatives tor utilizing characteristics of exceptional individuals including the technology of television more positively. intellectual (gifted, retarded, learning disabled); Knowledge of some of the many research studies sensory (visual, auditory); motor (orthopedic); conducted and in process expected. 4 cr. health; and communication exceptionalities. Impli- cations tor educational and human service delivery. 775. DIAGNOSTIC TEACHING OF 4 cr. READING Classroom implementation of diagnosis and re- 751. EDUCATING EXCEPTIONAL mediation of reading disabilities; for teachers, LEARNERS counselors, administrators, and other school per- Issues in special education (labeling, mainstream- sonnel. 4 cr. ing, efficacy); techniques of special teaching (refer- ral, assessment, observation, task analysis, 776. READING FOR CHILDREN WITH profiling, selecting materials, intervention); and is- SPECIAL NEEDS sues in special teaching (behavior modification, Techniques and procedures for teaching reading to ability training). Primary application to mild and children with special learning needs: the mentally moderate exceptionalities. Co- or prereq: Educ 750 retarded; learning disabled; gifted, culturally div- or permission. 4 cr. erse. Emphasis will be placed on the implications of providing reading instruction in the least restric- 752. DIAGNOSIS AND REMEDIATION tive alternative. 4 cr. OF LEARNING DISABILITIES Terminology, etiology, common characteristics, 785. EDUCATIONAL TESTS AND and symptoms; theory and practice in gross-motor, MEASUREMENTS visual, and auditory remediation; testing proce- Theory and practice of educational evaluation; uses dures used in diagnosis and remediation programs. of test results in classroom teaching and student 4cr. counseling; introductory statistical techniques. 4 cr. 753. TEACHING CHILDREN WITH BEHAVIOR DISORDERS 797. SEMINAR IN CONTEMPORARY Nature and scope ot emotional disturbances and EDUCATIONAL PROBLEMS social maladjustments in children, including causes, Issues and problems of special contemporary sig- characteristics, treatment implications, and educa- nificance, usually on a subject of recent special tional problems. 4 cr. study by faculty member(s). Prereq: permission. May be repeated for different topics. 1-4 cr. 755-756. DIAGNOSTIC-PRESCRIPTIVE TEACHING OF EXCEPTIONAL 800, 801. INTERNSHIP AND SEMINAR LEARNERS IN TEACHING A two-semester course to develop teacher com- A two-semester, full-time, supervised internship petence to analyze learners and learning environ- consisting of less-than-full teaching responsibility ments, specify learner characteristics, and in selected educational settings and programs. prescribe, implement, and evaluate special educa- Weekly seminars and occasional workshops held tional interventions. Applications in the areas of concurrently with internship. Admission by appli- language, mathematics, reading, science, social cation. 2-6 cr. studies, perceptual-motor, behavioral, adaptive, and social skills. Focus on mildly and moderately 806. APPROACHES TO LANGUAGE handicapped children in regular class and resource ART INSTRUCTION room. Prereq: Education 750, and 751 or 700J, Analysis of current research and trends. Language 7031, or permission. 4 cr. development and literature, including contributions of allied disciplines such as semantics and 760. INTRODUCTION TO YOUNG linguistics. Focus on processes of communication CHILDREN WITH HANDICAPS and appUcation to school curriculum. 4 cr. The needs of children (birth to eight years) with handicaps or who are at-risk tor handicaps.

56 —

Education

807. FOUNDATIONS OF READING 819. SOCIAL AND PSYCHOLOGICAL INSTRUCTION ASPECTS OF DISABILITY Survey of reading process, theoretical models, and Examination of historical and cultural concepts of basic approaches to the teaching of reading. Em- human deviance and disability. Analysis of social, phasis on current methods, materials, and pro- psychological, and vocational factors resulting grams. 4 cr. from disabling and disadvantaged human conditions. Relationship of rehabilitation to disability 808-809. CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND and to individual adjustments. Field-based consul- REMEDIATION OF READING tation with disabled individuals and rehabilitation DIFFICULTIES AND DISABILITIES agencies. Simulated, eight-hour disability project Exammation of theories and procedures for the for each student. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. diagnosis and remediation of moderate to severe disabilities in reading through case studies, discus- 820. COUNSELING THEORY AND sions, demonstrations, and practice. Each semester PRACTICE involves a clinical experience. Prereq: Educ 807, Basic approaches to counseling are examined 810 or permission. 4 cr. their theoretical foundations, process components, goals, and outcomes. 4 cr. 810. COMPREHENSIVE READING METHODS IN THE SECONDARY 821. PSYCHOLOGY OF CAREER AND SCHOOL PERSONAL DEVELOPMENT The nature of the reading process, diagnostic and Career and personal development and how each developmental methods and materials, study skills, influences the other; literature and research exam- and reading in the content areas at the secondary ined to clarify application to individual and group level. Designed for secondary school teachers who career-counseling and to career education. 4 cr. wish to foster continuous development of students' reading and study skills. 4 cr. 822. ASSESSMENT IN COUNSELING Evaluative instruments and methods that have par- 813. FIELD PRACTICUM ticular use in counseling. Systematic procedures tor Field-based experience focusing on roles of the measuring samples of an individual's behavior and reading specialist in the school setting. Prereq: per- statistical concepts that underlie psychological test- mission. 4 cr. ing. Assessment is viewed from the perspective of its use in the counseling process as well as its use 814. SEMINAR IN READING in accountability. 4 cr. Investigation of current research findings in reading and the related language arts. Seminars will focus 823. GROUP COUNSELING on significant research projects, program designs, Theoretical and applied dimensions of the group and analysis of the field of reading research and counseling process. Class may include laboratory ramifications for the reading specialist. Prereq: per- experience to examine one's interactive behavior as mission. 4 cr. a group member and leader. Prereq: Educ 820; permission. 4 cr. 815. READING AND THE ADULT LEARNER 824. PSYCHOLOGICAL STRESS AND Current practices in teaching adults to read; the ADAPTATION reading process and adult cognitive development; Problems m stress that are significant for human development of literacy in a technological society. adaptation. Behavior patterns which pose the most A major portion of the course work will involve common problems encountered by contemporary a case study in which students will examine an counselors are reviewed, with emphasis upon the extant program or develop a new course of study concepts and processes of adaptation. 4 cr. that addresses a particular need in adult reading education. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. 825. COUNSELING INTERNSHIP I Introductory supervised field experience focusing 817. PROFESSIONAL SEMINAR IN on the integration of counseling theory and prac- REHABILITATION tice, including laboratory microcounseling and Analysis and discussion of current and future seminars in contemporary professional issues. In- trencls, issues, and problems; clinical and profes- terns select an approved field placement reflecting sional practices; and research and research utiliza- their professional interests. Prereq: permission. tion in developing service programs in 4 cr. rehabilitation. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. 826. COUNSELING INTERNSHIP II 818. PRINCIPLES AND PROCEDURES Supervised counseling at approved field site. Op- IN REHABILITATION portunities also provided for involvement in con- Introductory course integrating theory and practice sultative, evaluative, and other organizational in the field of rehabilitation. History and philoso- procedures. Focus is on critiques of audio/video phy of rehabilitation as a social movement, includ- samplings of intern's counseling. Prereq: permis- ing relevant legislation. Study of institutions. Role, sion. 4 cr. function, and work of the counselor. Relation of the rehabilitation process to the total health and 827. ADMINISTRATION OF helping service delivery systems. Prereq: permis- COUNSELING SERVICES sion. 4 cr. Organizational patterns and administrative procedures that influence the effectiveness of counseling services. Emphasis upon staff development, accountability, professional issues, and productive supervisory behaviors. Prereq: permission. 4 cr.

57 Education

828. ADVANCED COUNSELING 843. ENVIRONMENT FOR EARLY THEORY AND PRACTICE CHILDHOOD Detailed analysis of the counseling relationship: its Examination ot various environments with atten- characteristics, processes, and outcomes. Prcrcq; tion to use of time, space, and materials. Study of permission. 4 cr. multiple professional roles needed in providing appropriate Learning Center adjustments to maxi- 829. ADVANCED COUNSELING mize individual child development. 4 cr. INTERNSHIP Supervised application ot advanced counseling the- 845. PROGRAMMING FOR ory and practice in counseling relationships. Sam- SEVERELY/MULTIPLY HANDICAPPED plings of the advanced counseling practices of YOUNG CHILDREN students will be analyzed and evaluated. Open only hitormation and suggestions for working with the to C.A.G.S. candidates in UNH graduate program severely and/or multiply handicapped child, ages in counseling. Prereq: Educ 828; permission. 4 cr. birth to eight. Emphasis will be on individualized program planning, particularly developmental and 830. RESEARCH IN COUNSELING multidisciplinary approaches. Prereq: permission. Research design and methodology in counseling. 4 cr. Students develop research projects that demonstrate knowledge of research procedures in evalu- 846. ASSESSMENT IN EARLY ating the processes and outcomes of counseling. CHILDHOOD Prereq: permission. 4 cr. Study, administer, and design a range of assessment materials. Develop strategies for selection and 831. SEMINAR AND PRACTICUM IN utilization ot clusters of assessment materials. Col- ELEMENTARY SCHOOL TEACHING lect and organize relevant data. Prereq; Educ 841; Supervised Practicum: Exploratory summer prac- Educ 843. 4 cr. ticum in a local summer elementary school to examine teaching as a career and to prepare for the 847. DIAGNOSIS AND EDUCATIONAL internship in the fall. Summer includes: 1) a pre- PLANNING FOR YOUNG practicum workshop focusing on interpersonal skill HANDICAPPED CHILDREN development; 2) a prepracticum curriculum and in- Focus on information and practical experiences re- structional laboratory; 3) a si.x-week practicum in lating to assessment and remediation of develop- which candidates, with the help of the staff serve mental handicaps in children from birth to eight as the teaching staff in a local summer school; years old. Formal and informal criterion-referenced 4) seminars in curriculum and instruction. Oppor- assessment, individualized education plans, multi- tunities for teaching high school students are avail- disciplinary approaches, parental roles, report writ- able for candidates who wish to determine better ing. Prereq: Educ 760, 841, or equivalent. 4 cr. what level of teaching they prefer. Prereq: admission to the M.A.T. program or M.Ed, program 848. CONTEMPORARY INFLUENCES for preservice teachers. 4 cr. (Summer Session UPON EARLY CHILDHOOD only.) EDUCATION Survey ot contemporary models in early childhood 835. SEMINAR AND PRACTICUM IN education in this country and consideration of cur- SECONDARY SCHOOL TEACHING rent issues having an influence on young children. Supervised Practicum: An exploratory summer Application of principles to individual student and practicum in a local summer high school to ex- specific early learning situations. Prereq: current amine teaching as a career and to prepare tor the involvement with a specific group of chilctren. 4 cr. internship in the fall. Summer includes: 1) a prc- pacticum workshop tocusing on interpersonal skill 849. SUPPORTING PARENTS OF development; 2) a prepracticum curriculum and in- YOUNG HANDICAPPED CHILDREN struction laboratory; 3) a six-week practicum in Social, economic, and psychological consequences which candidates, with the help of the staff serve of raising a child with a handicapping condition. as the teaching staft in a local summer school; Issues will include diagnosis and prognosis for the 4) seminars in curriculum and instruction. Oppor- child, parent-child attachment, and interactions tunities for teaching on elementary level are avail- with other care givers. Counseling and support able for candidates who wish to determine better techniques. 4 cr. what level of teaching they prefer. Prereq: admission to the M.A.T. or M.Ed, programs for pre- 850. FOUNDATIONS OF EARLY service teachers. 4 cr. (Summer Session only.) CHILDHOOD EDUCATION Historical roots of contemporary practices. Per- 841. CHILD DEVELOPMENT FOR THE spective of historical precedents in content, meth- EARLY CHILDHOOD PROFESSIONAL odology, and change. Study and review ot child To understand child growth; components of the development, assessment, classroom environ- course involve students in extended contacts with ments. Prereq: Educ 841; 843; 846; and 848. 4 cr. significant adults related to children in an early learning environment, hicludes home visits to in- 851. LAWS AND REGULATIONS terview parents and other relatives, and to observe AFFECTING THE EDUCATION OF the child in the family setting. Extensive readings, HANDICAPPED CHILDREN discussions, case study models, film viewings, and Analysis of current federal and state policies af- continued in-depth child study. Prereq: previous fecting handicapped children. Focus will be on experience with young children. 4 cr. Public Law 94-142. The role of policy making and constitutional and ethical issues will be discussed. 4 cr.

58 Educiilicii

853. SEMINAR IN CURRICULUM 865. EDUCATIONAL SUPERVISION STUDY Theoretical toundations of supervisory behavior as Analysis of recent trends in public school curricu- a means of effecting changes in instructional prac- lum; structures, philosophy, development, change, tices; consideration of instruments and techniques and evaluation. Primarily tor experienced teachers based on those theoretical foundations; some op- and administrators. Prereq: teaching experience. portunity for field projects utilizing instruments 4 cr. and techniques. Prereq: teaching experience. 4 cr.

854. SURVEY OF DEVELOPMENTAL 866. PRACTICUM IN SUPERVISION DISABILITIES AND CURRICULUM Mental retardation, cerebral palsy, epilepsy, au- Supervision of teaching and curriculum develop- tism, and related handicapping conditions; causal ment projects in the schools. Opportunity to apply factors, physical and psychological characteristics, skills in supervising and curriculum development educational and therapeutic implications. Obser- techniques. Prereq: Educ 853; Educ 865; permis- vations of programs and services tor the develop- sion. 4 cr. mentally disabled are required. 4 cr. 867. LEGAL ASPECTS OF SCHOOL 855. SERVICE DELIVERY SYSTEMS IN ADMINISTRATION DEVELOPMENTAL DISABILITIES Relationship of law to public education. Emphasis Service delivery system models in developmental on federal constitution. New Hampshire statutes, disabilities; pre- and postnatal, preschool, elemen- and case law related to public interests served by tary, secondary, postschool, institutional, and adult elementary and secondary education. Special top- occupational. Examination of plans tor the provi- ics: church-state relationship, due process, deseg- sion of services and facilities for the develop- regation, state agencies, supervisory unions, school mentally disabled; administrative, social, legal, and districts, school boards, teacher employment, ne- educational implications. 4 cr. gotiations, student rights, tort liability, school finance. Prereq: Educ 861; Educ 863. 4 cr. 856-857. FIELD PRACTICUM AND SEMINAR IN DEVELOPMENTAL 868. COLLECTIVE BARGAINING IN DISABILITIES PUBLIC EDUCATION One semester of supervised experiences in a diver- An examination of collective bargaining as prac- sity of agencies and facilities serving the develop- ticed by school boards, administrators, and teacher mentally disabled: a one-semester experience in a organizations. Consideration will be given to col- setting approximating the student's career choice; lective bargaining statutes, case law, employee re- biwecTcly seminars on topics related to the delivery lations boards, unit determinations, exclusive of service to the developmentally disabled. Prereq: representation, union security provisions, scope of permission. 8 cr. bargaining, good faith, grievance procedures, bargaining strategies, strikes, public interest, media- 858. ANALYSIS OF TEACHING tion, factfinding, arbitration, and the admini- Comparative analysis of current techniques and in- stration of the negotiated contract. Prereq: Educ strumentation for studying the process ot teaching 863. 4 cr. in the classroom. Consideration of substantive and procedural issues involved in planning for teaching. 869. PRACTICUM IN EDUCATIONAL Prereq: teaching experience. 4 cr. ADMINISTRATION Supervised practical experience in dealing with 861. PUBLIC SCHOOL problems in educational administration. Prereq: ADMINISTRATION Educ 863. 4 cr. Introductory course; major issues in policy making, school management, personnel, public rela- 870. THE CHANGE PROCESS IN tions, finance, and research in school admin- EDUCATION istration. Prereq: teaching experience. 4 cr. Role of change agent and the change process in education as related to school personnel; structural 862. EDUCATIONAL FINANCE AND characteristics of the school culture; change theory BUSINESS MANAGEMENT and systems analysis techniques. Students will be Principles of financing education, budgetary pro- required to apply some of the theories in an insti- cedures, accounting, auditing, school indebtedness, tutional setting. 4 cr. financial reporting, and business management. Handling practical school finance problems will be 871. SCHOOL PLANT PLANNING part of the project work. Prereq: Educ 861. 4 cr. A study will be made of the techniques and procedures involved in the long-range planning ot 863. SEMINAR IN EDUCATIONAL school facilities; for example, school populations ADMINISTRATION projections, characteristics of the educational pro- Cases and concepts in educational administration. gram, space requirements, evaluation of existing Prereq: Educ 861. 4 cr. facilities, future use of existing buildings, analysis of financial resources available, identitication ot 864. PERSONNEL AND reasonable alternatives, and an examination ot the COMMUNICATION IN EDUCATIONAL probable consequences of such alternatives, includ- ORGANIZATIONS ing educational effectiveness and tax impact. Problems arising from the communications pro- Prereq: Educ 863 or permission. 4 cr. cess. Implications of group problem-solving processes. Interpersonal relations and group dynamics among students, faculty, staff, administration, and the community. Application of theories. 4 cr.

59 Electrical and Coiiiptiler Eiigiiieeriii^

872. EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM 895. INDEPENDENT STUDY IN EVALUATION EDUCATION Selected models tor educational program evalua- Opportunity tor intensive investigation of a special tion; rationale underlying these models examined problem or issue in the field of education. Prereq: and compared; practical applications developed. permission. 1-4 cr. May be repeated to a maximum Each student will plan a complete evaluation design of 8 cr. tor an appropriate educational program. Prereq: Educ 853; Educ 861; /or permission. 4 cr. 899. THESIS Prereq: permission of the department. 6-10 cr. 874, 875. ADMINISTRATIVE INTERNSHIP AND FIELD PROJECT Related course in the School of Health Studies Field-based internship. Administrative experiences (SHS), Department of Occupational Therapy in one or several educational and community agencies. Participation in administrative and supervi- OT701. MANAGING RESOURCES FOR sory work ot the agencies. Each intern completes THE DEVELOPMENTALLY DISABLED a major tield project requiring analysis and action Analysis and application of various administrative appropriate tor resolution of a significant admin- techniques, processes, and systems used in deliv- istrative problem at the intern site. Supervision by ering services to developmentally disabled persons. University faculty. Prereq: permission of graduate Professional teamwork examined via case discus- adviser. A grade of credit (CR) will be given upon sions, class exercises, and site visits. Prereq: per- successful completion of the internship and field mission. 4 cr. project. 6 cr.

880. RESEARCH IN THE TEACHING OF Electrical and WRITING Computer Review ot the last 31) years of research m writing, Engineering (EE) focusing on trends in design, research procedures, the contributions ot linquistics, cognitive and de- Chairperson: Ronald R. Clark velopmental psychology, with a view to the conduct of research by participants. Prereq: PROFESSORS: Fletcher A. Blanchard, Jr.; permission. 4 cr. Ronald R. Clark; Albert D. Frost; Joseph B. Murdoch; John L. Pokoski; Alden L. Winn 881. METHODS AND TECHNIQUES OF ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Glen C. Gerhard;

EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH Filson H. Glanz; Donald W. Melvin; Paul J. Conceptual aspects and practical realities of the re- Nahin; Kondagunta Sivaprasad search process applied to problems in education ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: L. Gordon Kraft; and human service disciplines. Develops skills nec- John R. LaCourse; Walter T. Miller III essary to use as well as conduct research. 4 cr. GRADUATE PROGRAM COORDINATOR: Kondagunta Sivaprasad 883. ADVANCED PSYCHOLOGY OF HUMAN LEARNING A student admitted to graduate study in electrical Review and integration ot learning theory, teacher engineering should have completed a baccalaureate effectiveness, motivation theory, and development degree in electrical engineering or have comparable through adolescence; application of these to teach- training, which included courses in mathematics ing generally and to the areas of specialization of and physical science, network theory, fields and the participants. Prereq: Educ 701 or equivalent. waves, electronics, solid state circuits, semicon- 4 cr. ductor device theory, with appropriate laboratory experiences. 884. ADVANCED HUMAN A minimum of 24 credits of coursework plus 6 DEVELOPMENT credits of thesis or project are required for the Selected principles and skills humankind must con- master's degree. No specific course requirements sider in the attempt to maximize individual, social, are mandated; each candidate will meet with the and educational potential; emphasis on personal departmental graduate committee to set up a pro- implementation. Prereq: Educ 7(J1, intro to psych, gram of study. Students are further required to or equivalents. 4 cr. demonstrate the ability to do independent and creative work by taking either E E 899 or 891-892. 886. PHILOSOPHY OF EDUCATION With the consent of the Graduate Committee, a Seminar in comparative analysis of contemporary student who has satisfied this requirement through educational objectives and practices and the philo- industrial experience may substitute approved sophical foundations upon which they are based. coursework. Application ot theoretical criteria tor assessing ed- E E 899 and 891-892 both involve equivalent ucational philosophies and for developing one's independent theoretical and/or applied work under own position. 4 cr. the guidance of a faculty member. The sequence 891-892 is to be completed in two consecutive se- 890. DEVELOPMENTAL PERSPECTIVES mesters, with a letter grade given at the end of each ON ADULTHOOD semester. An interim report is submitted at the end Research and theory about critical life issues; de- of 891, and a final (oral and written) report at the velopmental tasks of the life cycle; periods of tran- end of 892. E E 899 requirements include the sub- sition; stages of intellectual, moral, and personality mission of a formal thesis suitable for binding. development of the adult; and the design of signif- However, no two-semester time limit is imposed, icant learning experiences for adults within a va- and no interim or final letter grade is given. riety of educational settings and institutions. 4 cr.

60 Electrical and Computer Engineering

Those who intend to undertake graduate work units, teletype terminals, high speed paper tape in electrical engineering must consult with the de- units, AD and DA converters, graphics output, partment graduate adviser in order to plan the pro- and interconnect capability with a TR-48 analog gram of study, since all courses are not given each computer. year. Normally, a minimum ot 12 credits of 800- level courses is required, not including 891-892 or Control and Systems Engineering 899. Digital, hybrid, and analog computer control of The Electrical and Computer Engineering De- industrial processes and systems. Discontinuous partment considers the development of profes- and fluidic control theory for industrial, marine, sional communication skills, through a teaching and oceanographic applications. Linear and sto- assignment, a basic component of a graduate edu- chastic analysis, synthesis techniques in the fre- cation. Every master's candidate is required to sat- quency domain, optimal control, and systems isfactorily complete one year of E E 800 seminar; optimization. participation includes presentations as needed to satisfy the teaching requirements. Geophysical Sensing and Propagation An interdepartmental Engineering Ph.D. Pro- Ground-based electromagnetic techniques tor gram is also available in the following areas of probing of upper atmosphere and the ionosphere; specialization: engineering system design, signal electromagnetic pulse techniques tor probing of processing, theoretical and applied mechanics, and ice, snow, and other material media. Wave prop- transport phenomena. Electrical engineering stu- agation studies in weakly turbulent media such as dents would normally work in one of the tirst two the sea, the atmosphere, and plasmas. Acoustic areas. For details refer to the section entitled En- probing of bottom and subbottom sediment in gineering Ph.D. Program. water. Since many graduate courses are given by demand, actual course offerings vary from semester Illumination Engineering to semester. Design techniques for evaluating contrast rendition factor and equivalent sphere illumination; Areas of Specialization invcrse-square-law approximations for nonpoint light sources; design ot daylighting systems; hand The faculty of the Electrical and Computer En- calculator programs for interior and exterior light- gineering department has research interests in the ing design; lighting energy budgets. following areas. Students in the M.S. Electrical Engineering or the Engineering Ph.D. program Ocean Engineering and Instrumentation may select courses and research topics in these Instrument systems (digital and analog) for mea- areas. suring and recording physical, chemical, and biological parameters primarily associated with ocean Biomedical and Clinical Engineering behavior, e.g., temperature, pressure, and salinity Topics of study in these areas include biomedical measurements at midocean depths; wave height instrumentation, computer applications to medical and direction determination; buoy performance as problems, patient safety, direct patient care, health affected by waves and currents; remote sensing of delivery systems, and applications of signal pro- the ocean surface; and underwater acoustics. cessing and instrumentation techniques to medical areas. Permission of instructor is required for en- A specialization in either of these areas may be rollment in all electrical and computer engi- elected by the student. Students specializing in neering courses taken for graduate credit. Biomedical Engineering must complete E E 783, Seven-hundred-level courses are offered sub- 784, and 836 plus approved professional electives. ject to adequate student detnand. Students in Clinical Engineering, in addition to the courses listed above, complete one year of intern- 705. SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES ship in the Clinical Engineering Lab (E E 833-834). Physical theory of semiconductors: models ot sol- Additional details are available upon request. ids, electronic properties, energy bonds, and transport processes. PN junction theory; bipolar and Communications Systems and Information field effect transistors; charge-transfer, optoelec- Theory tronic, and integrated devices; and device fabrica- Areas of interest and activity include electro- tion technology. Prereq: gen. physics; adv. magnetic and acoustic wave technologies, and the electronics, electromag. fields and waves; or equiv- identification of signals in the presence of noise alent. 4 cr. through the use of coding, correlation, or optimal filtering. Related facilities for experiments extend- 711. DIGITAL SYSTEMS ing from VLF to microwaves are available at a Advanced switching theory techniques; digital de- roof-top communications system for space, terres- sign tools; design of microprocessor-based sys- trial, and ocean applications. tems; general design procedures, including top- down design techniques, documentation, noise re- Computer Engineering and Digital Systems duction, etc. Prereq: logical design of digital com- Theoretical aspects of switching theory; systems puters; permission. Lab. 4 cr. that recognize patterns, learn, and exhibit intelligence; application of switching logic, design and 714. MINICOMPUTER APPLICATIONS interfacing of minicomputer peripherals; applica- ENGINEERING tion of minicomputers to process control and bioe- Organization and operation of minicomputer- lectronics. The Digital Systems Laboratory based systems. Interfacing of special purpose pe- includes four minicomputers with magnetic tape ripherals, digital filters, system simulation, pro-

61 Electrical and Computer Engineering

gram and data organization, priority interrupt and evaluation of an ocean-related instrument sys- processing of tasks, real-time monitor systems. tem is an integral part of the course. Prereq: per- Applications to communication, automated-mea- mission. 4 cr. surement, and process-control systems. Prereq: elements of digital systems or intro to digital sys- 782. CONTROL SYSTEMS tems; programming experience; permission. Lab. Fundamental principles involved in the design and 4cr. analysis of feedback control systems. Topics include stability criterion, time-domain analysis, fre- 727. POWER SYSTEMS quency-domain analysis, and introduction to Modeling and planning of electric power transmis- nonlinear systems. Lab. (Also offered as M E 782.) sion systems. Prereq: electromech devices; electri- 4cr. cal networks; permission. 4 cr. 783. BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING 741. FLUID CONTROL SYSTEMS Engineering applied to cardiovascular, renal, gas- Mathematical modeling of hydraulic, pneumatic, trointestinal, sensory, reproductive, and other or- and fluidic control elements and control systems. gan systems. Design and utilization of diagnostic, Methods for 1) analysis of systems of using gases monitoring, and prosthetic techniques and devices. or liquids as the working fluid; 2) synthesis of the Lab. 4 cr. parameters of the control elements used in automatic control systems; 3) design of these systems. 784. BIOMEDICAL (Also offered as M E 741.) 4 cr. INSTRUMENTATION Principles of physiological and biological instru- 745. FUNDAMENTALS OF ACOUSTICS mentation design including transducers, signal Acoustic wave equation for air; laws of reflection, conditioning, recording equipment, and patient refraction, and absorption; characteristics and mea- safety. Laboratory includes the design and use of surement of acoustical sources; human perception instrumentation for monitoring of electrocardi- of sound, loudness, intensity; microphones; ogram, elcctromyogram, electroencephalogram, acoustical materials; problems in environmental pulse, and temperature. Current research topics, sound control; ultrasonics; architectural acoustics. such as biotelemetry, ultrasonic diagnosis, and Prereq: general physics II; differential equations; computer applications. Lab. 4 cr. permission. Lab. 4 cr. 785. UNDERWATER ACOUSTICS 757. FUNDAMENTALS OF Vibrations, propagation, reflection, scattering, re- COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS verberation, attenuation, sonar equations, ray and Discussions of deterministic signals, Fourier spec- mode theory, radiation of sound, transducers, and tra, random signals, and noise, baseband commu- small- and large-signal considerations. 4 cr. nication, analog and digital modulation schemes, and system signal to noise ratio. Prereq: electrical 786. INTRODUCTION TO RADIO networks; permission. Lab. 4 cr. ASTRONOMY Electromagnetic radiation, propagation. Positional 758. COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS astronomy and the radio sky, discrete radio Design of high-frequency communication systems. sources, source-structure distribution, the sun as a RF amplification, modulators for AM and FM sys- radio source, flare and burst activity, planetary tems, receiving techniques, antennas, free-space emissions, quasars, pulsars, techniques of obser- propagation, propagation characteristics of the ion- vation and data reduction, radiometry, polarime- osphere. Prereq: electromagnetic fields and waves ters, correlation interferometers, aperture

I; E E 757 or equivalent. Lab. 4 cr. synthesis. 4 cr.

762. ILLUMINATION 787. HUMAN PHYSIOLOGICAL Radiation; color and spectra; physics of light pro- CONTROL SYSTEMS duction; sources of ultraviolet, visible, and infrared Analysis of human physiological control systems energy; lamp circuitry; control of light; lighting and regulators through the use of mathematical design, applications of light in business, industry, models. Identification and linearization of systems school, home, and outdoors. Open to juniors and component. Membrane biophysics; system inter- seniors in engineering and physics. Lab. 4 cr. actions, stability, noise and the relationship of system malfunction to disease. 4 cr. 775. APPLICATIONS OF INTEGRATED CIRCUITS 796. SPECIAL TOPICS IN ELECTRICAL Design and construction of linear and nonlinear ENGINEERING electronic circuits using existing integrated circuits. New or specialized courses and/or independent Laboratory course in practical applications ot non- study. 2 or 4 cr. digital integrated circuit devices. Prereq: advanced electronics. 4 cr. 800. GRADUATE SEMINAR This course includes periodically scheduled semi- 781. OCEAN INSTRUMENTATION nars presented by outside speakers, UNH faculty, Analysis and design ot instrumentation systems. and graduate students. Topics will be in general Sensors, circuits, and devices for measurement and areas of interest to electrical and electronics engi- control. Elements of probability and statistics as neers. Participants will prepare and give presenta- applied to instrument design and data analysis. tions to satisfy teaching practice requirements. cr. Transmission, display, storage, and processing of Cr/F. information. The design, implementation, testing,

62 Electrical and Computer Engineering

801. ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD sity, sampling theory, and optimum decision rules. THEORY 3 cr. Maxwell's equations; plane wave propagation; reflection and refraction; guided wave propagation; 840. INFORMATION THEORY wave guides; simple resonators; elements ot micro- A continuation ot E E 839. Introduction ot infor- wave circuits, linear and aperture antennas, arrays mation-theory concepts. Topics include: message of dipoles; receiving antennas. Prereq: electromag- sources, entropy, channel capacity, fundamentals netic fields and waves I or equivalent. 3 cr. of encoding. Shannon's theorems. Prereq: E E 839. 3cr.

802. ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE I THEORY 841. DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Selected advanced topics in electromagnetic wave Theory and practice of digital signal processing; theory taken from such areas as: antennas; propa- elements of nonrecursive and recursive digital fil- gation in various media; diffraction and scattering; ters, random number generators and simulation of microwave generation and waveguide propaga- time series, the fast Fourier transform, spectral es- tion. Prereq: E E 801. 3 cr. timation, envelopes and phases, modeling of time series. Samples of data from various physical ex- 811. FUNDAMENTALS OF SIGNAL periments will be analyzed as student projects. PROCESSING Some exposure to programming is desirable. 3 cr. Matrices and determinants, introductory graph theory. Laplace transforms and pole-zero concepts, 842. DISCONTINUOUS CONTROL complex variable theory, convolution, concept ot Analysis and synthesis of feedback control systems state, formulation and solution of state equations. operating on quantized information; compensation 3cr. and performance improvement methods that use the quantized nature of the information are also 812. FILTER DESIGN AND SYNTHESIS developed. Design methods for pulse-width mod- Network theoretical techniques basic to the design ulation, optimum quantizers and limit cycle behav- of electrical filters of various sorts. Approximation ior of quantized systems are developed. (Also theory; driving point and transfer synthesis tech- offered as M E 842.) 4 cr. niques; passive, active, and digital filters. Prereq: E E811. 3 cr. 844. NONLINEAR CONTROL SYSTEMS Analysis and design of nonlinear control systems 815. ADVANCED ACTIVE CIRCUITS from the classical and modern viewpoints are dis- Investigation of devices and techniques used in ad- cussed. Liapunov's stability theory; phase space vanced circuit design using discrete solid-state de- methods; linearization techniques; simulation; fre- vices and integrated circuits. Oscillators, phase- quency response methods; generalized describing locked systems, low noise techniques, etc. 3 cr. tiinctions; transient analysis utilizing functional analysis; and decoupling of multivariable systems. 820. ILLUMINATION DESIGN Prereq: E E 851. (Also offered as M E 844). 4 cr. Advanced illumination design; task visibility levels, bidirectional reflectance factors, contrast rendition 851. ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEMS I factor, equivalent-sphere illumination, visual per- State-space representation of multivariable sys- formance criteria, visual comfort probability, day- tems; analysis using state transition matrix. Con- lighting systems, inverse-square-law approxi- trollability and observability; pole placement using mating techniques, luminaire effectiveness, and state and output feedback; Luenbcrger observers. lighting energy budgets. Students write computer Introduction to computer controlled systems (sam- programs and lighting design projects. Prereq: E pling, discrete state representation, hybrid sys- E 762 or equivalent experience. 3 cr. tems), nonlinear analysis (Liapunov, Popov, describing function). Prereq: E E/M E 782. (Also 833-834. PRACTICUM IN CLINICAL offered as M E 851.) 3 cr. ENGINEERING Seminars in medical equipment management; eval- 852. ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEMS II uation, testing, and standards; working experience Special topics in control theory: continuous and in laboratory and in community hospitals in con- discrete systems; optimal control systems, includ- junction with the Clinical Engineering Center. ing calculus of variations, maximum principle, dy- Prereq: permission of instructor and director ot namic programming, Weiner and Kalman filtering CEC. A year-long continuous course; 3 credits techniques, stochastic systems, adaptive control each semester. "lA" grade (continuous course) will systems. Prereq: E E/M E 851. (Also offered as M be given at the end of the first semester. 3 cr. E 852.) 3 cr.

836. BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING II 853. ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE Applications of engineering in such areas as sur- Current approaches to machine intelligence and the gery, critical-care units, neurophysiology, biote- simulation of human cognitive processes, including lemetry, modeling, and interaction of waves with an introduction to recursive functions and pro- biological tissues. Prereq: E E 783 or equivalent. gramming with the LISP language. Heuristic pro- 3cr. gramming, programs for game playing and natural language understanding, elementary theory of 839. STATISTICAL THEORY OF computability. Individual computer project re- COMMUNICATIONS quired. Prereq: programming experience. (Also An introduction to probability theory and random offered as C S 853.) 3 cr. waveforms leading to a discussion ot optimum re- ceiver principles. Topics include random variables, random processes, correlation, power spectral den-

63 Engineering Ph.D. Program

854. AUTOMATA THEORY Goodspeed; David L. Gress; Louis H. Klotz; Formal languages and theoretical "machines" or David E. Limbert; Virendra K. Mathur; automata. Formal grammars; context-dependent, Donald W. Melvin; William Mosberg; Paul J. context-free, and regular languages; finite state Nahin; Paul J. Ossenbruggen; Kondagunta machines and regular expression recognizers; infi- Sivaprasad; Donald C. Sundberg; M. Robinson nite state machines; Turing machines; unsolvable Swift; Russell L. Valentine; John A. Wilson problems and the halting problem; linear-bounded ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: Yen-hsi Chu; and push-down automata; cellular and reproducing Robert M. Henry; Gary W. Jaworski; automata. Prcreq: programming experience. (Also L. Gordon Kraft; John R. LaCourse; offered as C S 854.) 3 cr. Walter T. Miller III ENGINEERING PH.D. COMMITTEE: 855. ESTIMATION AND FILTERING Stephen S. T. Fan; Kondagunta Sivaprasad; Stochastic systems course with application to con- Charles K. Taft; Tung-Ming Wang trol and communications. Topics include random variables, noise in linear systems, Bayesian and The interdepartmental engineering program of- minimum variance estimation theory, optimal state fers graduate work leading to the degree of Doctor estimators, Weiner and Kalman filters, combined of Philosophy and is conducted by a combined estimation and control, prediction, parameter iden- engineering faculty. The program consists of areas tification, and nonlinear filtering. Prereq: M E/E of specialization within an interdepartmental struc- E 851, Math 735 or equivalent. (Also offered as M ture, depending principally upon strengths in en- E 855.) 3 cr. gineering, the engineering sciences, mathematics, and the physical sciences. An interdepartmental 856. SWITCHING THEORY program is felt to be most meaningful since many Combinational circuits—including functional de- contemporary engineering and scientific problems composition, nonbinary logic, and cellular net- can be solved only through the cooperation of a works. Sequential networks—including analysis, variety of disciplines. Further, the boundaries be- transient behavior, state reduction methods, state tween the classical disciplines in engineering and assignment, and synthesis. Prcreq: E E 711. 3 cr. science have become less distinct. The particular advantage of the nondepartmental program struc- 860. COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE ture is that improved communication and cooper- Advanced topics in computer organization. Parallel ation develop among faculty and students of the and pipeline processing; associative and stack com- different disciplines, resulting in more meaningful puters; microprogramming; virtual memory; cur- academic and professional experiences. rent topics. Prereq: logical design of digital computers. 3 cr. Areas of Specialization

865. INTRODUCTION TO PATTERN The Engineering Ph.D. program includes the RECOGNITION following four areas of specialization. Machine classification of data, feature space, clus- tering, linear separability, fictitious play algorithm, Engineering Systems Design: Charles K. Taft, Braverman's hyperplane training and learning al- chairperson gorithm, learning and game playing computer pro- Students entering this area of the Engineering grams that recognize patterns. Prereq: knowledge Ph.D. Program can elect either one of two profes- of computer terminal operation; BASIC language; sional directions. The first seeks to develop profes- probability and statistics or equivalents. 3 cr. sionals with the technical expertise of a Ph.D. and with the ability to work with and direct groups of 891-892. RESEARCH people working on large-scale technical projects. 3cr. The second direction seeks to develop engineers with capabilities in the theory and analysis of large- 898. INDEPENDENT STUDY scale complex systems. Concentration in an area of Independent theoretical and/or experimental inves- specific individual interest is combined with par- tigation of an electrical engineering problem under ticipation in a larger interdisciplinary project. the guidance of a faculty member. 1-3 cr. Current projects related to the area include coastal engineering, marine soil mechanics, sub- 899. MASTER'S THESIS mersibles and underwater habitats, ocean instru- 6 cr. mentation, marine structures and buoy systems, arctic engineering, discontinuous control systems, vehicle and transportation systems, nonlinear dy- Engineering Ph.D. Program namic systems modeling, fluid power systems, nonlinear decoupling control, computer systems, (Engr) vehicle dynamics, societal systems, facility systems, social and business systems, biomedical sys- PROFESSORS: Paul L. Bishop; Fletcher A. tems and instrumentation, and environmental Blanchard, Jr.; Ronald R. Clark; Robert W. engineering. Corell; Stephen S. T. Fan; Stephen L. Fink; Albert D. Frost; Shan S. Kuo; Joseph B. Signal Processing: Kondagunta Sivaprasad, Murdoch; John L. Pokoski; Godfrey H. chairperson Savage; Linda G. Sprague; Charles K. Taft; This area of specialization is concerned with Gail D. Ulrich; Tung-Ming Wang; Robin D. those analytic and experimental techniques that are WilHts; Alden L. Winn; Asim Yildiz involved in some aspect of the acquisition, detec- ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: E. Eugene tion, identification, analysis, or control of signals. Allmendinger; Wendell S. Brown; Barbaros In this context a signal is defined as any quantity Cehkkol; Pedro A. DcAlba; Ihab H. Farag; which contains or conveys information. While the Glen C. Gerhard; Filson H. Glanz; Charles H. majority of signal processing systems are partially

64 English

or wholly electrical in nature, many of the basic dean of the Graduate School upon recommendation aspects of signal processing and utilization are com- of the chairperson of the student's area. This common to a wide range of problems and applications mittee assists students in outlining the program and in communications, medicme, environmental in preparing for the qualifying examination and modeling, instrumentation, and control. may require them to take specified course work, The development of professional communica- with or without credit. The committtee will also tion skills, through a teaching assignment, is con- conduct an annual in-depth review of a student's sidered a basic component of a graduate education. progress, through written and/or oral examina- Every doctoral candidate in Signal Processing is tions, and following the substantial completion of required to satisfactorily complete one year of E E a student's coursework, will administer the quali- 800 seminar; participation includes presentations as fying examination. This committee is also respon- needed to satisfy the teaching requirements. sible for administering any language examination Current research areas include: acoustics, and/or research tool proficiency requirements that biomedical systems and instrumentation, computer are required of the area of specialization. and digital systems, digital signal processing, em Upon the successful completion of the qualifying wave propagation, energy and power systems con- examination and other proficiency requirements, trol, fluidics, geophysical sensing, lighting design, a doctoral committee will be appointed by the dean nonlinear interacting system control, signal prop- of the Graduate School upon the recommendation agation, and systems modeling. of the chairperson of the student's area. The doctoral committtee shall conduct an annual review of Theoretical and Applied Mechanics: Tung-Ming the student's progress, supervise and approve the Wang, chairperson doctoral dissertation, and administer the final ex- Treated as an engineering science, this area amination. brings together those aspects of engineering, phys- To obtain a Ph.D. degree in engineering, a stu- ics, and applied mathematics that are relevant to dent must meet all of the general reauirements as the understanding and application ot the dynamical stated under Regulations of the Graduate School. and equilibrium behavior of materials and struc- A student will normally be required to either dem- tures. Included are the fields of solid mechanics, onstrate the ability to read scientific and technical structural mechanics, classical and continuum me- literature in an approved foreign language or dem- chanics, rhcology, hydrodynamics, soil mechanics, onstrate a facility in one or more special "tool of systems analysis, clastodynamics, and acoustics. research" techniques. Depending on their educa- Current research topics include macro- and mi- tional objectives, students may also be reauired by cromechanics of composite-material behavior, the guidance committee to undertake a classroom wood-fiber mechanics, viscoelastic material prop- teaching experience. To complete the Ph.D. degree erties, structural dynamics, dynamics of ocean in engineering students will normally be expected structures, structural optimization, clastodynam- to take coursework equivalent to two full-time ac- ics, elastic wave propagation, scattering ot elastic ademic years beyond the baccalaureate and to com- waves, electromagnetic wave propagation, struc- plete a dissertation that will require at least one tural systems, soil dynamics, nonhnear dynamics, full-time year of study and original research. Spe- ocean engineering, ocean subbottom resources, cific course requirements have been established for oceanography, acoustic determination ot the prop- each area of specialization. All these requirements erties of layered media, Cosserat fields, dislocation should normally be completed by the end of the theories, random vibrations, and estuary hydro- second year of full-time graduate study, and must dynamics. be completed before the student can be advanced to candidacy. Transport Phenomena: Stephen S. T. Fan, chairperson Course Requirements This area deals with the subjects of fluid me- Coursework requirements will be developed on chanics, heat transtcr. mass transtcr, and coupled an individual basis by each student's guidance com- phenomena in such areas. In addition to their tun- mittee. Since each area of specialization has its own damental role in traditional engineering activities, specific course requirements, interested students transport-phenomena studies are making signiti- should contact the area chairperson to determine cant contributions in many other areas such as en- the particular coursework and research activity that ergy production and utilization, environmental may be applicable to their educational goals. control, oceanography, space exploration, and Except tor Doctoral Research (999), students will biomedical engineering. follow a program of study consisting of courses Current research activities include solar energy, from within the chemical, civil, electrical, and me- new energy sources, pollution control, biomedical chanical engineering departments, many of which engineering, combustion, adsorption, heat transter have been established particularly tor this program, with phase change, liquid pumping cavitation, vor- and from related departments appropriate to stu- tex flow, coal liquetaction, particle formation, ra- dents' needs. A student should consult specific diative heat transfer, and polymer processing. course offerings and descriptions.

Requirements English (Engl) Qualified students with bachelor's or master's degrees in engineering, mathematics, or the phys- Chairperson: Carl Dawson ical sciences are eligible tor admission to the program. To be admitted, students must present PROFESSORS: Thomas A. Carnicelli; Carl evidence that they have sufficient background in Dawson; Michael V. DePorte; Karl C. Diller; the area in which they propose to specialize. Robert Hapgood; Jean E. Kennard; Gary H. Following entrance into the program, a guidance Lindberg; Terence P. Logan; Edmund G. committee will be appointed tor the student by the Miller; Donald M. Murray; Philip L. Nicoloff;

65 English

John C. Richardson; Charles D. Simic; Mark The writers at UNH emphasize conference R. Smith; Thomas A. WilHams, Jr.; John A. teaching. Each student meets frequently with writ- Yount ers specializing in the student's area of study. In ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Ehzabeth addition, each student works closely with a writer- Hageman; Andrew H. Merton; Hugh M. adviser throughout the program. Potter III; Susan Schibanoff Workshop courses provide forums for prompt, ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: Janet Aikins; Mary detailed criticism of each student's writing by in- Morris Clark; Lester A. Fisher; Melody structors and fellow students. Each student takes Graulich; Rochelle Lieber; MeKeel McBride; at least two workshops in his or her specialty and Thomas R. Newkirk; Patrocinio Schweickart; may elect to take an additional workshop in an- David V. Siddall; David H. Walters; Ronald A. other area as well. Form-and-theory courses and Winslow, Jr. literature courses complete the program. The pro- GRADUATE PROGRAM COORDINATOR: gram consists of eight courses, of which seven Michael V. DePorte must be at the 800 level. Upon completion of the required courses, the The Department of English offers three ad- student submits a portfolio of writing to the staff vanced degrees. Master of Arts, Master of Science The portfolio might consist of short stories, a for Teachers, and Doctor of Philosophy. All ap- novel, nonfiction articles, nonfiction book, or a plicants are required to submit Graciuate Record collection of poetry. The degree is awarded upon Examination scores for the aptitude test. Appli- approval of the portfolio by a committee of writ- cants for the Master of Arts in Literature, the Mas- ers. There is no foreign language requirement. ter of Science for Teachers, and the Doctor of Philosophy degree programs must submit scores Master of Arts in English Language and for the Advanced Test of Literature in English. All Linguistics applicants must submit viriting samples. Appli- Students who wish to specialize in any of the cants for the Ph.D. are normally expected to nave various areas of English language and linguistics a reading knowledge of at least one foreign lan- may design an M.A. program to meet their inter- guage. Specific requirements for each degree pro- ests. Specialties include Applied Linguistics and the gram can be obtained from the department. Teaching of English as a Second Language as well as the traditional subfields of linguistics. Psycho- Master of Arts Programs linguistics courses are offered through the psychology department. Master of Arts in Literature To earn the M.A. degree, students must com- The Master of Arts may be undertaken as a ter- plete at least seven 4-credit courses, including two minal degree or as preparation for a doctoral pro- seminars, plus 4 credits of Engl 895 or 896, and gram. The program encourages students to pursue produce a substantial scholarly paper. At least six their individual interests and to correct deficiencies of these courses must be at the 800 level. Unless in their undergraduate training. the student already has a strong background in An M.A. candidate must pass eight 4-credit linguistic theory, the program of study must in- courses. Seven courses, including at least two sem- clude one course in phonetics and phonology (Engl inars and either Engl 895 or 896, must be at the 893) and one in syntax and semantics (Engl 894). 800 level. At least tour courses must be in English Reading knowledge of one foreign language is re- or American literature (as distinct from courses in quired. The student's course of study must be ap- critical analysis, linguistics, writing, teaching proved by the program adviser. methods, or other literatures). Each M.A. candidate must pass at least one course in the English Master of Science for Teachers language or in the teaching of composition. As a generalrule, all courses counting toward the M.A. The Master of Science for Teachers is designed degree should be taken in the English department. for high school teachers. No foreign language is In special circumstances, however, a student may required. The student must pass eight 4-credit be allowed to apply toward the degree up to two courses in English, numbered 700 and above, nor- graduate courses offered by other departments. For mally including at least one course in the teaching students planning a teaching career, the department of writing and in the study of language, which will requires at least one semester of teaching experience not be a repetition of unaergraduate work. Appli- (subject to availability of funds). cants should consult the General Regulations of the An M.A. candidate must pass a reading exami- Graduate School for the special admissions require- nation in a foreign language. Foreign students ments for this program. whose native language is not English may be exempt from this requirement. Each candidate for Doctor of Philosophy the M.A. degree must register for four credits of Engl 895 or 896 and produce a substantial scholarly A student admitted to the Ph.D. program must paper. hold an M.A. degree or be in the final stage of completing requirements for the degree. Master of Arts in Writing The Ph.D. program offers professional training The Master of Arts in Writing is designed for in the teaching of literature and language. The pro- students who intend to become professional writ- gram combines the essential guidance and disci- ers. Eight working writers supervise the program. pline of coursework with the equally essential Students may elect to specialize in fiction, nonfic- freedom of independent study and research. Ac- tion, or poetry. Each member of the writing fac- cordingly, in the first year the student is encour- ulty is accomplished in at least one of these fields. aged to follow a program suited to individual interests and needs. Ph.D. candidates will normally complete ten English courses beyond the M.A. degree. Four of

66 English

these courses must be graduate seminars in this of research and writing. 4 cr. (Not offered every department. The other courses should be at the 800 year.) level and must include: Introduction to the Teach- ing of Writing (Engl 810); a course on criticism; a 709/809. FORM AND THEORY OF halt-course (2-credit) ungraded module on the POETRY teaching of literature (Engl 839); and a half-course A writer's view of the problems, traditions, and (2-credit) ungraded module on bibliography and structures of poetry. 4 cr. professional methods (Engl 800). In special circumstances, a course at the 700 level or a course from 710/810. TEACHING WRITING another department may be included among the An introduction to various methods of teaching ten courses with approval of the graduate com- writing. Combines a review of theories, methods, mittee. and texts with direct observation of teaching prac- In addition to meeting course requirements, each tice. 2 or 4 cr. (Degree candidates must enroll for student must pass: 1) reading examinations in two 4cr.) foreign languages; 2) after prehmmary work for the Ph.D. degree, a general examination; and 3) a 712. CRITICAL ANALYSIS OF later qualifying examination in three areas related EXPOSITION to a proposed dissertation and projected teaching For the English teaching major; students analyze specialties. A student must also write a dissertation essays and write nonfiction prose. Variety of crit- and defend it at a final oral examination. ical approaches; several methods of teaching com- M.A. and Ph.D. students holding assistantships position. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) teach under supervision; such teaching is considered a vital part of the student's professional train- 713, 714/813, 814. LITERARY CRITICISM ing. At least a year of intern teaching or its Major critics from Plato to the present; the chief equivalent is required of all doctoral candidates. critical approaches to literature. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) Graduate students should note that not all seminars are offered every year. A detailed guide to the 715/815. APPLIED LINGUISTICS department's programs is available from the sec- Methods of teaching and learning foreign lan- retary for graduate programs, Department of guages; background work on theories of language English. acquisition; the methodology of teaching English as a second language. Students interested in teach- See English department brochure for detailed de- ing other languages may do their projects on those scriptions of current course offerings. languages. 4 cr.

701, 702/801, 802. ADVANCED WRITING 716/816. PROBLEMS IN APPLIED OF FICTION LINGUISTICS Workshop discussion of advanced writing prob- Variable topics course; problems such as language lems and readings of students' fiction. Individual acquisition in children and adults, bihngualism, and conterences with instructor. Prereq: writing fiction linguistic field methods. 4 cr. (Not offered every or equivalent. Written permission of instructor re- year.) quired for registration. May be repeated for credit with the approval of the department chairperson. 718/818. ENGLISH LINGUISTICS 4cr. Introduction to the study of language; dialects and social and psychological problems of language; in- 703, 704/803, 804. ADVANCED tensive work on the techniques of modern gram- NONFICTION WRITING mar (syntax, phonology, semantics). 4 cr. (Not A workshop course for students intending to write offered every year.) publishable magazine articles or nontiction books. Equal stress on research and writing techniques. 719. ENGLISH GRAMMAR Prereq: newswriting; written permission of in- Traditional and contemporary approaches to the structor required. May be repeated for credit with study of the structure of the English language: its the approval of the department chairperson. 4 cr. history, phonology, morphology, syntax including consideration of parts of speech, phrases, clauses, 705, 706/805, 806. ADVANCED WRITING sentences, etymology, punctuation. Some empha- OF POETRY sis on the teaching of English grammar. 4 cr. Workshop discussion of advanced writing problems and submitted poems. Individual conferences 720. NEWSPAPER INTERNSHIP with instructor. Prereq: writing poetry or equiva- Students intending to pursue careers in journalism lent. Written permission of instructor required for spend a semester working full- or part-time for a registration. May be repeated for credit with the daily newspaper under close supervision of editors. approval of the department chairperson. 4 cr. Reporting is stressed, but students may do some editing as well. The number of internships is very 707/807. FORM AND THEORY OF limited. Prereq: newswriting or equivalent; and FICTION permission. 4-16 cr. A writer's view of the forms, techniques, and theories of fiction. The novels, short stories, and 741/841. LITERATURE OF EARLY works of criticism studied will vary, depending on AMERICA the instructor. 4 cr. Prose and poetry of the periods of exploration, colonization, early nationalism, Puritanism, En- 708/808. FORM AND THEORY OF lightenment. Individual works and historical-cul- NONFICTION tural background. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) A writer's view of contemporary nonfiction, emphasizing the choices the writer faces in the process

67 Efit^lislt

742/842. AMERICAN LITERATURE, 1815- 752/852. HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH 1865 LANGUAGE Fiction, nontiction, and poetry in the period of Evolution of English from the Anglo-Saxon period romanticism, transcendentalism, nationalism. In- to the present day. Relations between linguistic dividual works and cultural background. 4 cr. (Not change and literary style. 4 cr. (Not offered every offered every year.) year.)

743/843. AMERICAN LITERATURE, 1865- 753/853. OLD ENGLISH 1915 Introduction to Old English language and literature Fiction, nonhction, and poetry in the period ot through the readings of selected poetry and prose. realism, naturalism, industrialism, big money. In- 4 cr. dividual works and cultural background. 4 cr. 754/854. BEOWULF 744/844. AMERICAN LITERATURE, 1915- A reading of the poem and an introduction to the 1945 scholarship. Prereq: Engl 753. 4 cr. Fiction, poetry, and drama in the period of avant- garde and lettism, jazz age, and depression. Indi- 755, 756/855, 856. CHAUCER vidual works and cultural background. 4 cr. 755/855: Troihn and Criseyde, in the context of medieval continental literature by Boccaccio and 745/845. CONTEMPORARY AMERICAN other influences. 756/856: Chaucer—A study of LITERATURE The Canterbury Tales in its original language. 4 cr. A gathering ot torms, figures, and movements since 1945. Individual works and cultural back- 758/858. SHAKESPEARE ground. 4 cr. A few plays studied intensively. Live and filmed performances included as available. 4 cr. 746/846. STUDIES IN AMERICAN DRAMA 759/859. MILTON Topics vary from year to year. Examples: 20th- Milton and his age. Generous selection of Milton's century American drama; contemporary play- prose and poetry, with secondary readings of his wrights; theatricality in American life. 4 cr. (Not sources and the scholarship. 4 cr. (Not offered offered every year.) every year.)

747/847. STUDIES IN AMERICAN 763/863. CONTINENTAL POETRY BACKGROUNDS OF THE ENGLISH Topics vary from year to year. Examples: poets of RENAISSANCE the open road; Pound and his followers; major Major philosophers, artists, and writers of the con- American poets; contemporary American poetry. tinental Renaissance (in translation): Petrarch, Fi- 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) cino, Pico, Vivcs, Valla, Castiglione, Machiavelli, Luther, Calvin, Rabelais, Montaigne, Cervantes, 748/848. STUDIES IN AMERICAN Erasmus, and Thomas More, as representative of FICTION the early English Renaissance. 4 cr. (Not offered Topics vary from year to year. E.xamples: the ro- every year.) mance in America; the short story; realism and naturalism; the city novel; fiction of the thirties. 764/864. PROSE AND POETRY OF THE 4 cr. ELIZABETHANS Shakespeare and his contemporaries. Major works, 749/849. MAJOR AMERICAN AUTHORS including Spenser's Faerie Queene, Sidney's Astro- Intensive study of two or three writers. E.xamples: phil and Stella, Shakespeare's Sonnets, Marlow's Dr. Melville and Faulkner; Fuller, Emerson, and Tho- Faustus: their literary and intellectual backgrounds. rcau; James and Wharton; Dickinson and Frost. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) 4 cr. 765/865. ENGLISH LITERATURE IN THE 750/850. SPECIAL STUDIES IN 17TH CENTURY AMERICAN LITERATURE Major writers of the 17th century, including Topics vary from year to year. Examples: the Pu- Donne, Jonson, Herbert, Bacon, and Hobbes. 4 cr. ritan heritage; ethnic literatures in America; land- (Not offered every year.) scape in American literature; five American lives; pragmatism; American humor; transcendentalism; 767, 768/867, 868. LITERATURE OF THE women regionalists. 4 cr. RESTORATION AND 18TH CENTURY Representative works; texts studied closely; the 751/851. MEDIEVAL EPIC AND ways they reflect the central intellectual problems ROMANCE of their age. 767: Dryden, Rochester, Restoration The two major types of medieval narrative; com- plays, Bunyan, Defoe, Montesquieu, and Swift. parative study ot works from England, France, 768: Pope, Fielding, Johnson, Boswell, Voltaire, Germany, and Iceland, including Beowulf, Soii'^ of Sterne, Rousseau, Becktbrd, Diderot, and Blake. Roland, Niehehni'^enlied, Gottfried's Tristan, Njal's 4 cr. Sa^a, and Malory's Morle d'Arthur. All works read in modern English translations. 4 cr. (Not offered 769, 770/869, 870. THE ENGLISH every year.) ROMANTIC PERIOD Major literary trends and authors, 1798 to 1832. Focus on poetry but attention also to prose works and critical theories. 769: Wordsworth, Coleridge, Lamb, Hazlitt, DeQuincey. 770: Byron, Shelley, Keats. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.)

68 English

771, 772/871, 872. VICTORIAN PROSE Bronte, TroUope, George Eliot, Hardy, and Con- AND POETRY rad. 4 cr. Major writers; social and cultural history. Typi- cally included in 771, Carlyle, Ruskin, Newman, 785/885. MAJOR WOMEN WRITERS Tennyson, Browning, and others; in 772, Arnold, Intensive study of one or more women writers. the pre-Raphaelites, Swinburne, Hopkins, and oth- Selections vary from year to year. 4 cr. ers. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) 790/890. SPECIAL TOPICS IN 773, 774/873, 874. BRITISH LITERATURE LINGUISTIC THEORY OF THE 20TH CENTURY An advanced course on a topic to be chosen by the Poets and novelists; the concept ot modernity in instructor. Inquire at the Enghsh department office literature. Offerings vary by year and by instructor a full course description each time the course tor, but normally include such figures as Joyce, is offered. Topics such as dialectology, Montague Lawrence, Yeats, Woolf, Forster, and more con- grammar, African linguistics, linguistics and liter- temporary writers such as Burgess, Fowles, Mur- ature, metrics, cross-disciplinary studies relating to doch, ancl Golding. 4 cr. linguistics. Barring duplication of subject, may be repeated for credit. 4 cr. 775/875. IRISH LITERATURE Survey from the beginnings to the present; works 792. TEACHING SECONDARY SCHOOL in Irish (read in translation) such as The Cattle Raid ENGLISH of Cooky, medieval lyrics, and Mad Sweeney; and Methods of teaching language, composition, and works in English from Swift to the present. Twen- literature in grades 7-12. Required of all students tieth-century authors: Joyce, Yeats, Synge, in the English teaching major. Open to others with O'Casey, Beckett, and Flann O'Brien. 4 cr. (Not permission. 4 cr. offered every year.) 793/893. PHONETICS AND 778/878. BRAIN AND LANGUAGE PHONOLOGY An introduction to neurolinguistics, a study ot how The sounds and sound systems of English in the language is related to the structure of the brain. context of linguistic theory; comparisons of En- The biological foundations of linguistic univcrsals glish to other languages. Prereq: a basic linguistic and language acquisition. Examination of evidence course or permission. 4 cr. (Not offered every from aphasia and from normal language use. 4 cr. year.)

779/879. LINGUISTIC FIELD METHODS 794/894. SYNTAX AND SEMANTIC Devoted to the study, with use of an informant, THEORY of some non-Indo-European language that is un- The relationship of grammar and meaning as familiar to both the students and the instructor at viewed from the standpoint of modern linguistic the beginning of the class. The primary aim of the theory. Emphasis on the syntax and semantics of course is to give students a practical introduction English, with special attention to the construction to linguistic analysis without the support of a text. of arguments for or against particular analyses. Theoretical concepts will be introduced as needed. Prereq; a basic linguistic course or permission. 4 cr. 4cr. 795, 796. INDEPENDENT STUDY 780/880. ENGLISH DRAMA TO 1640 To be elected only with permission of the depart- Development of the drama through the Renais- ment chairperson and of the supervising faculty sance, emphasizing the Elizabethan and Jacobean member or members. Barring duplication of sub- dramatists. 4 cr. ject, may be repeated for credit up to a maximum of 16 credits. 1-16 cr. 781/881. ENGLISH DRAMA FROM 1660 TO 1780 797, 798/897, 898. SPECIAL STUDIES IN Representative plays, both serious and comic, by LITERATURE such writers as Wycherley, Congreve, Ethcrege, A) Old English Literature; B) Medieval Literature; Goldsmith, Sheridan, Davenant, Dryden, Otway, C) 16th Century; D) 17th Century; E) 18th Cen- Rowe, and Lillo. 4 cr. tury; F) English Romantic Period; G) Victorian Period; H) 20th Century; I) Drama; J) Novel; 782/882. MODERN DRAMA K) Poetry; L) Nonfiction; M) American Literature; Major English, American, and (translated) Euro- N) A Literary Problem; O) Literature of the Re- pean plays of the modern period by such play- naissance. The precise topics and methods of each wrights as Shaw, Ibsen, Chekhov, Strindberg, section will vary. Barring duplication of subject, Pirandello, O'Neill, Brecht, Beckett, Williams, may be repeated for credit. For details, see the Miller, Pinter. Live and filmed performances stud- course descriptions available in the English depart- ied as available. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) ment. 4 cr.

783/883. THE ENGLISH NOVEL OF THE 800. BIBLIOGRAPHY AND METHODS 18TH CENTURY Introduction to enumerative and physical bibliog- The rise and development ot the novel through raphy and major research and reference works of study of selected major works by Defoe, Richard- the field, to prepare the student for original re- son, Fielding, Smollett, Sterne, and Austen. 4 cr. search in the graduate program and later. Required of all Ph.D. students. 2 cr. Cr/F. 784/884. THE ENGLISH NOVEL OF THE 19TH CENTURY 817. SEMINAR IN TEACHING WRITING Representative novels from among Austen, Scott, Review of the current professional literature on Dickens, Thackeray, Emily Bronte, Charlotte composition; research projects in areas selected in

69 Entomology

consultation with instructor. Prereq: Engl 810 or Entomology (Ento) permission. 4 cr. Chairperson: G. Thomas Fisher 820. SEMINAR IN LINGUISTICS 4 cr. ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: James S. Bowman; G. Thomas Fisher; R. Marcel Reeves 821. IN SEMINAR—STUDIES OLD ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: John F. Burger; ENGLISH Donald S. Chandler; Paul C. Johnson 4 cr. ADJUNCT ASSISTANT PROFESSOR: Siegfried E. Thewke 824. SEMINAR—STUDIES IN MEDIEVAL LITERATURE An applicant for admission to graduate study in 4cr. entomology is expected to have at least the basic (Ento 402) course in entomology as well as ade- 825. SEMINAR—STUDIES IN 16TH- quate preparation in the allied sciences of chemis- CENTURY LITERATURE try, botany, and zoology. During the first semester 4 cr. of residency, degree candidates' backgrounds in entomology will be reviewed in conference with 827. SEMINAR—STUDIES IN at least three faculty members. Students lacking the SHAKESPEARE necessary background courses may be required to 4cr. complete certain of these courses, which do not carry credit, before they are admitted to full can- 828. SEMINAR- -STUDIES IN MIJ TON didacy tor a degree. 4cr. The program of graduate study is designed to meet the needs of those students planning to take 829. ."N SEMINAR—STUDIES EARLY further work leading to a career in professional 17TH-CENTURY LITERATURE entomology. Areas of specialization include tax- 4 cr. onomy, ecology, ethology, biological control, pest management, chemical control, problems in med- 830. SEMINAR—STUDIES IN 18TH- ical entomology, forest entomology, and agricul- CENTURY LITERATURE tural entomology. A thesis is required of all 4 cr. candidates for the master's degree. An oral examination on the thesis is required. Students are given 832. SEMINAR—STUDIES IN THE the opportunity to assist the professional staff in ROMANTIC PERIOD field research and as laboratory assistants, and they 4 cr. are also encouraged to attend professional meetings in their appropriate fields. 833. SEMINAR—STUDIES IN THE No language requirements are made for the M.S. VICTORIAN PERIOD degree. Applicants are required to submit aptitude 4cr. and advanced biology scores from the Graduate Record Examination. 834. SEMINAR—STUDIES IN 20TH- CENTURY BRITISH LITERATURE 704. MEDICAL ENTOMOLOGY 4 cr. Survey of past and present trends in arthropod- borne diseases transmitted to human populations, 837. SEMINAR—STUDIES IN 19TH- emphasizing dynamics of arthropod-host-patho- CENTURY AMERICAN LITERATURE gen/parasite relationships, natural nidality of dis- 4cr. ease, and role of arthropods and other animals as reservoirs or vectors of disease and maintenance of 838. SEMINAR—STUDIES IN 20TH- zoonoses. Laboratory emphasizes survey of arthro- CENTURY AMERICAN LITERATURE pod groups important as disease vectors or in en- 4 cr. venomizing humans. Mr. Burger. Lab. 4 cr.

839. PROBLEMS IN TEACHING 705. SYSTEMATICS AND TAXONOMY ENGLISH OF INSECTS Special topics in teaching within the discipline of The kinds and diversity of insects and their rela- English. Inquire at the department to see what tionships, emphasizing methods of species and topics in the teaching of literature, language, or population analysis, concepts of classitication and writing may be scheduled. Open only to graduate nomenclature, and application to identification. students with a professional interest in teaching or Prereq: intro entomology; /or permission. Mr. to practicing teachers. 1-6 credits depending on the Burger, Mr. Chandler. Lab. 4 cr. specific course. 706. SOIL ARTHROPODS 840. SEMINAR—STUDIES IN ENGLISH Biology and systematics of terrestrial arthropods, DRAMA with emphasis on the springtails, sowbugs, niyria- 4cr. pods, mites, spiders, and other arachnids. Prereq: permission. Mr. Reeves. Lab. 4 cr. (Not offered 895, 896. READING AND RESEARCH every year.) 2, 4, or 8 cr. lA, Cr/F. 707. IMMATURE INSECTS 899. MASTER'S THESIS Identification of immature stages of insects, espe- 6cr. cially of holometabolus orders. Aquatic forms not

999. DOCTORAL RESEARCH

70 ;

Genetics

included. Prereq: insect morphology, intro ento. 826. INTEGRATED PEST or permission. Mr. Thewke. 4 cr. (Not offered MANAGEMENT every year.) Integration of pest management techniques involving biological, culture, and chemical control with 709. AQUATIC INSECTS principles of insect ecology into management ap- Biology, ecology, and taxonomy of aquatic insects, proach for insect pests. Prereq: permission. Mr. including their role in succession and food webs ot Johnson. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) aquatic ecosystems, origin and evolution of adaptations to aquatic environments and relationship 897, 898. ENTOMOLOGY SEMINAR between habitat type and faunal diversity. Labo- Selected topics and current developments. Re- ratory emphasizes qualitative and semi-quantitative quired of all graduate entomology students. May sampling techniques, collection and identification be repeated. Staff 1 cr. of principal aquatic groups. Prereq: intro ento, principles of zoology, or permission. Mr. Burger. 899. MASTER'S THESIS Lab. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) Mr. Burger, Mr. Fisher, Mr. Reeves, Mr. Johnson, Mr. Chandler and staff. Hours and credits to be 710. INSECT MORPHOLOGY arranged. 6-10 cr. External and internal anatomy of insects, with the integration of body structure and function. Prereq: permission. Mr. Chandler. Lab. 4 cr. (Not offered Genetics Program (Gen) every year.) Chairperson: Yun-Tzu Kiang 720. AGRICULTURAL ENTOMOLOGY students interested in agribusiness. For advanced PROFESSORS: James P. Barrett; Walter M. effect insect pests on forage, fruit, Economic of Collins; Thomas P. Fairchild; Donald M. and vegetable crops. Life cycles; damage and cur- Green; Harold W. Hocker, Jr.; Frank K. rent methods of control. Prereq: permission. Mr. Peirce; Hoornbeek; J. Brent Loy; Lincoln C. Fisher. Lab. 4 cr. Owen M. Rogers ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Yun-Tzu Kiang; 721. PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGICAL Subhash C. Minocha; Willard E. Urban, Jr. CONTROL Robert M. Zsigray Natural and applied aspects of biological control of ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: Robert T. Eckert; insect and plant pests. Prereq: permission. Mr. Florence E. Farber Reeves. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) ADJUNCT ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: Maurice E. Demeritt, Jr.; Peter W. Garrett 722. CHEMICAL CONTROL OF INSECTS For advanced students m applied entomology. Re- The interdepartmental Genetics Program offers view of the chemical compounds for insect control. graduate work leading to the degrees of Master of Modes of pesticide entry; toxicology. Basic under- Science and Doctor of Philosophy. standing of chemistry is desired. Prereq: permis- Qualified students are admitted to the program sion. Mr. Fisher. Lab. 4 cr. with the approval of the genetics faculty and the chairperson of the department in which they have 723. REGULATORY PEST CONTROL a major interest. Undergraduate preparation should For students preparing for careers dealing directly include mathematics through calculus, chemistry with or associated with the movement of agricul- through organic, physics, animal or plant biology tural commodities in internal and foreign trade. courses and laboratories, and genetics with labo- statutes. Prereq: Legal documents; federal and state ratory. Preparation in statistics and computer sci- basic entomology and plant pathology courses; ence IS desirable. All students will be examined 4 cr. offered permission. Mr. Thewke. 2 or (Not shortly after they arrive in order to diagnose their every year.) preparation in basic genetics. Students lacking the appropriate preparation may be admitted but will 724. STRUCTURAL PEST CONTROL be required to complete certain courses without in- For students wishing to study household and graduate credit. The aptitude section of the Grad- dustrial entomology. Prereq: permission. Mr. uate Record Examination is required. Fisher. Lab. 4 cr. The program is conducted by faculty members from animal sciences, biochemistry, botany, the 801, 802. GRADUATE ENTOMOLOGY Institute of Natural and Environmental Resources, Concentrated studies in insect biology, systcmat- microbiologv, plant science, and zoology, as well ics, biological control or chemical control of and as faculty from the Agricultural Experiment Sta- insects. Mr. Reeves, Mr. Burger, and Mr. Bow- tion and the U.S. Forest Service, Northeastern man. Subject matter, hours, and credits to be ar- Forest Experiment Station. ranged. The core curriculum in genetics requires students in the Ph.D. program to take a minimum of one 825. INSECT ECOLOGY course from each of the following groups of Role of insects in: coevolution of plant-herbivores courses: 1) Population Genetics—Introductory and predator/parasite-prey systems, ecosystem en- course. Gen 705; 2) Molecular Genetics—Biochem- ergetics, niche theory, com- population dynamics, ical Genetics, Gen 770; Microbial Genetics, Micr petition, coexistence, diversity, stability. and 804; Regulation of Gene Expression, PlSc 803k; 3) Prereq: permission. Mr. Johnson. 4 cr. (Not of- Classical Genetics—Plant Genetics, PlSc 851; Cy- fered every year.) togenetics, PlSc 853; Quantitative Genetics and Se- lection, AnSc 812; Human Genetics, Zool 707. All students are required to participate in a one-year directed teaching experience and are required to attend genetics seminars.

71 Cenetics

The requirements for the M.S. candidates will 812. ADVANCED STATISTICAL be a minimum of one course from each of any two METHODS of the above three groups of courses. Methods and techniques for handling typical problems that arise in the analysis of data. Topics in- Master of Science Degree clude the multiple comparison of means, analysis The program for the Master of Science degree of unweighted means, proportional subclass num- is formulated by the student with the approval of bers, weighted squares of means, orthogonal poly- the guidance committee. Candidates for the degree nomials, and least squares. Mr. Urban. Prereq: will be required to complete a thesis, pass an oral FoRs 711; digital computer systems; /or permis- examination covering graduate courses and thesis, sion. 3 cr. (Not oftered every year.) and complete courses designated in the core curriculum. 895, 896. SPECIAL TOPICS IN GENETICS Intended for study in specialty areas not ordinarily Doctor of Philosophy Degree included in other courses. May involve formal The chairperson of the Genetics Program, with classes, discussions, or independent investigations. the concurrence of the chairperson of the depart- Prereq: permission of staff concerned. 2-4 cr. ment of major interest, will nominate the student's guidance and doctoral committees, which will ad- 898. GENETICS SEMINAR minister the qualifying and final examinations. Presentation and discussion of selected genetic top-

Specific course requirements will be developed by ics. Staff 1 cr. (May be repeated.) the student and the guidance committee, and will include the courses in the core curriculum. Students 899. MASTER'S THESIS must complete a dissertation on original research 6-10 cr. in genetics. The guidance committee for each graduate stu- 999. DOCTORAL RESEARCH dent will determine whether a foreign language will be required. Courses Available in Related Areas

705. POPULATION GENETICS These courses are fully described below and Population growth and regulation; genetic varia- under the course of the appropriate depart- tion; factors affecting gene frequency; ecological ment for the convenience of the student. genetics. Prereq: prin of genetics or permission. 4 cr. (Offered fall 1982.) Animal Sciences

706. GENETICS LABORATORY 711. COMPARATIVE ANIMAL Experiments and demonstrations in animal, plant, GENETICS and microbial genetics and cytogenetics, including How heredity affects domestic animals, poultry, research techniques applicable to biochemical, pop- other mammals, and fish; emphasis on the organ- ulation, and transmission genetics. Prereq: prin of ism and population. Quantitative inheritance; prin- genetics or equivalent. Staff 3 cr. ciples of selection; disease resistance; statistical and experimental techniques. Prereq: 4 cr. of genetics; 740. EVOLUTIONARY BIOLOGY /or permission. Mr. Collins. Lab. 4 cr. Origin of source of genetic variation, population structure, mechanisms of evolution; molecular ev- 712. ANIMAL BREEDING AND olution; ecological adaptation in animals, plants, IMPROVEMENT and man; community structure and evolution. Principles of selection and breeding systems as they Prereq: prin of genetics or permission. 4 cr. (Not apply to the genetic improvement of dairy cattle, offered every year.) hvestock, and horses. Prereq: AnSc 711 or permission. Mr. Cady. Lab. 4 cr. (Not offered every 770. BIOCHEMICAL GENETICS year.) Mechanisms of storage, replication, transmission, transcription, recombination, mutation, and ex- 812. QUANTITATIVE GENETICS AND pression of genetic information by cells and vi- SELECTION ruses. Prereq: Bchm 751 or permission. Mr. Green. Gene frequency, genetic and environmental varia- 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) tion, hcritability, fitness, selection, inbreeding, outbreeding, correlated characters. Mr. Collins. 802. DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS Prereq: one course each in genetics and statistics. The philosophy of experimental design and how 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) it relates to standard statistical designs. Topics include the roles of replication and randomizations, Institute of Natural and Environmental factorially arranged treatments, Latin squares, in- Resources complete nonfactorial designs, fractional replica- tions and confounding, and crossover designs. Mr. 711. STATISTICAL METHODS II Warren. Prereq: INER 711; digital computer sys- Intermediate course; basic concepts of sampling, tems; /or permission. 4 cr. (Not offered every linear models and analyses for one-way and mul- year.) tiway classification, factorial arrangement of treatments, multiple regression, and covariance. Computer programs used in analyzing data. Ex- amples from environmental sciences. Prereq: ap-

72 History

plied statistics I or equivalent. Mr. Barrett, Mr. Admission Warren. 4 cr. The department usually requires completion on Forest Resources the undergraduate level of eight semester courses in history together with some preparation in other 720. FOREST GENETICS areas of the humanities and social sciences. Genetics of forest tree improvement; variation in Applicants for admission to any graduate pro- natural populations, breeding methods, physiolog- gram in history should have a minimum of B + ical characters, quantitative data analysis. Prereq: average in history and allied humanities and social principles of genetics; silviculture; /or permission. sciences. In addition, applicants must submit Ap- Transportation fee. Mr. Eckert. Lab. 3 cr. (Not titude (verbal and quantitative) and Advanced His- offered every year.) tory scores on the Graduate Record Examinations. The department assesses the student's entire appli- Microbiology cation, including letters of recommendation, in making its decision on admission. Deficiencies in 804. MICROBIAL GENETICS an undergraduate program may be rectified by Expression, regulation, recombination, and trans- course work as a special student, but such course- mission of genetic information in prokaryotic and work cannot be used to satisfy requirements for an eukaryotic microorganisms. Consideration of advanced degree. The department also recom- chromosomal inheritance. Prereq: gen micr; per- mends that a beginning graduate student have some mission. Lab. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) training in a foreign language. It should be noted that students who expect to participate in seminar Plant Science or reading courses in other than American history are usually required to have a reading knowledge 773. METHODS AND THEORY OF of at least one foreign language appropriate to the PLANT BREEDING particular course. Applicants intending the Ph.D. Plant brccdmg systems for qualitative and quanti- degree should include with their applications a per- tative plant improvement. Prereq: introductory sonal statement indicating their reason for and in- genetics; introductory statistics; /or permission. tentions in undertaking graduate study at the Mr. Peirce. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) University of New Hampshire. All graduate students are reviewed annually by 851. PLANT GENETICS the faculty of the department. A student accumu- Euploidy, aneuploidy, cytoplasmic inheritance, so- lating two course failures is automatically barred matic cell genetics, and genetics of disease resis- from continuing in any degree program in history, tance in plants. Prereq: intro genetics. 3 cr. (Not but the department reserves the right to exclude offered every year.) others whose overall performance does not give reasonable assurance of a successful program com- 853. CYTOGENETICS pletion. Students are allowed no more than three Chromosome aberrations and their behavior. Ef- attempts to meet any language requirements. fect of radiation on chromosomes. Mapping and laboratory techniques in cytogenetic analysis. Mr. Degree Programs Rogers. Prereq: genetics; cytology. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) The department offers the Master of Arts and Doctor of Philosophy degrees. The general degree Zoology requirements are outlined below, but specific programs are tailored to the goals of the student. The 707. HUMAN GENETICS graduate program coordinator of the department Inheritance patterns, gene and chromosome mu- serves as the initial adviser to entering graduate tation rates and effects, linkage, and gene fre- students, the adviser-of-record to all students quency. Prereq: prin of genetics or permission. throughout their years of graduate study, and, with 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) the Graduate Committee of the department, has general supervision of all student programs. By the beginning ot a student's second semester in resi- History (Hist) dence, the student intending a degree will ordinarily have selected a single member of the faculty as the program chairperson and, with that faculty Chairperson: Donald J. Wilcox member as principal adviser, will have worked out PROFESSORS: Charles E. Clark; Robert C. a specific program ot studies leading toward a de- Gilmore; Hans Heilbronner; Charles A. gree. The graduate program coordinator must ap- Jellison, Jr.; William R. Jones; David F. Long; prove the registration of special students and stu- Francis D. McCann, Jr.; Robert M. Mennel; dents from other departments in graduate history Darrett B. Rutman; Cecil J. Schneer; John O. Voll; courses. The department welcomes the opportu- Douglas L. Wheeler; Donald J. Wilcox nity to students other depart- ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Jeffry M. work with from Diefendorf; Marion E. James; Allen B. Linden; ments. Marc L. Schwarz; Harvard Sitkoff ASSISTANT PROFESSOR: Janet L. Polasky Master of Arts GRADUATE PROGRAM COORDINATOR: Robert M. Mennel The student intending the M.A. degree has the choice of designing a specific program to meet either of two sets of requirements; the first allows substantial training and research in a single subfield of history but within a foundation of broader

73 History

coursework; the second allows substantial breadth who serves as the student's program chairperson. over at least two subfields. The subfields in history This relationship should be established early and a are as follows: the Ancient World; Medieval Eu- broad program supportive of the intended area of rope; Early Modern Europe; Modern Europe; Eu- dissertation research worked out in consultation ropean Intellectual History; Medieval England; with the program chairperson. The program, Early Modern England; Modern England; Iberian which must be approved by the Graduate Com- History; Russia; Early American History; Modern mittee of the department, shall involve each of the American History; Colonial Latin America; Mod- following: ern Latin America; the Far East; the Near East; 1) Two required research seminars in American Sub-Saharan Africa; and the History of Science. history, one in early America and one in modern Completion of the degree under either set of America. requirements normally requires between three and The history department offers these required re- four semesters of full-time study (three to four search seminars in the first semester of each year, courses per semester). Either plan may prepare a alternating between the two fields. Each entering student for entrance to the Ph.D. program. Plan student, with or without the M.A., should take B is particularly recommended for practicing one in each of the first-two years in the program. teachers. Other seminars and reading courses at the 800 level Plan A: The student shall complete successfully will also form part of the program drawn up in at least eight courses in history numbered above consultation with the student's program chairper- 700, of which a minimum of four shall be num- son. bered between 800 and 898 (seminar and directed 2) Required courses in historiography and his- readings). In addition, the student shall prepare torical methods. The history department will offer within the context of any single subfield a thesis one of these courses in the second semester of each meriting the unanimous approval of a thesis com- year, alternating between the historiography course mittee consisting of the student's program chair- and the historical methods course. Each entering person, under whose direction the thesis shall be student, with or without the M.A., should take prepared, and two other members of the graduate one in each of the first two years in the program. faculty (at least one of them in history). The prep- Note: No student will be considered to be in- aration of the thesis is considered to be the equiv- tending to pursue a Ph.D. program who is not in alent of two additional semester courses each the process of satisfying these requirements. Only bearing the designation History 899 for the purpose students who are intending to pursue the Ph.D. are ot meeting the general regulations ot the Graduate considered for graduate assistantships. School. 3) Two languages or one language and a special Plan B: The student shall complete successfully research technique, whichever is deemed most rel- at least ten courses in history numbered above 700 evant to the area of research. of which a minimum of four shall be numbered 4) The entirety of American history, with accent between 800 and 898. Following completion of upon either of the subfields of early or modern coursework or during the final semester of course- America, and two subfields outside of American work, the student shall demonstrate a broad com- history. petence in two subfields of history ordinarily in 5) A cognate field outside of history entirely or oral examination before a committee of three con- a subfield of non-Western history. sisting of the student's program chairperson and Students' preparations for the qualifying exam- two other members of the faculty in history. Stu- ination will be guided by representatives of each dents proceeding under Plan B shall have stood subfield or cognate field in their programs. These examination no less than three weeks prior to the representatives will make up a student's guidance Commencement at which the degree is to be and, subsequently, examining and dissertation granted. committees. Students will normally not take the Students should note that Plan A thesis readings qualifying examination until they have completed and Plan B examinations during the summer are sixteen semester courses or more (including work available only with the consent of all faculty undertaken in a master's program). This requires involved. three years of study beyond the bachelor's degree, the greater portion of which is ordinarily accom- Doctor of Philosophy plished in full residence. Students should bear in mind, however, that qualifying examinations will The department offers work leading toward the test a mastery of broad subfields of historical degree of Doctor of Philosophy with a concentra- knowledge rather than of particular courses. Stu- tion in either of the two subfields of American dents are, therefore, expected to read widely and history. The degree requires more than formal independently in order to expand their knowledge coursework; it is awarded in recognition of high beyond formal coursework and to become ac- attainment and ability in history as shown by per- quainted with aspects of the subfields not covered formance in qualifying examinations and by prep- in that coursework. aration and defense of a dissertation. Normally an Normally there will be eight steps in attaining entering student intending to be a candidate for the the degree. Students are expected to be registered doctorate will complete an M.A. program as a in the University for all regular academic semesters prerequisite. Students with the M.A. from another during their progress. institution, however, can begin the doctoral pro- 1) Satisfaction of historiography, historical gram immediately, and a student in residence can, methods, and research seminar requirements. with the consent of the department, omit the M.A. 2) Correction of any deficiencies in the student's and proceed directly toward the Ph.D. f)revious program, for example, lack ot a first The doctoral student's cardinal intellectual rela- anguage. tionship is with that member of the faculty under 3) The demonstration of proficiency in a second whom he or she will write the dissertation and language or a special research technique. (Depart- mental regulations regarding the latter are available from the director of graduate studies.)

74 History

4) Successful performance in a two-part quali- 721, 722. HISTORY OF AMERICAN fying examination: the first part, a four-hour writ- THOUGHT ten examination covering breadth of knowledge in Significant American thinkers considered in their the subfield of specialization (early or modern social context. Semester I: 1600 to 1860. Semester American history); the second part, oral and cov- II: 1860 to present. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) ering all subfields and (if any) the cognate field specified in the program. 724. AMERICAN URBAN HISTORY 5) Within the same semester as step three, ad- Urbanization process from the colonial period to mission to candidacy and the approval by the can- the present. 4 cr. didate's dissertation committee of the specified topic and research plan for the dissertation. 741. THE AGE OF THE RENAISSANCE 6) Submission of an acceptable dissertation no The birth of the Renaissance, its economic, social, more than three years after the admission to and political roots, and the flowering of Renais- candidacy. sance culture. Covers period from 1300 to 1600, 7) Successful public defense of the dissertation with stress on Italy. 4 cr. before the dissertation committee. 8) Formal submission of the dissertation to the 742. THE AGE OF REFORMATION department and Graduate School at least two weeks The reformation of church, society, and human prior to the commencement at which the degree is values that shook Europe in the 16th century, and to be conferred. its roots in the 14th and 15th centuries. 4 cr.

Apprenticeship 751, 752. EUROPEAN INTELLECTUAL HISTORY The department considers that graduate work in European intellectual tradition trom the Greek phi- history, and particularly doctoral work, is profes- losophers to the end of World War II. How basic sional training. All entering graduate students in- ideas have developed out ot previous modes of tending a Ph.D. are, consequently, required (and thought in response to new challenges. 4 cr. all others are urged) to participate on a continuing basis in History 801, Proseminar: History as a 756. 20TH-CENTURY EUROPE Profession. Moreover, the department recognizes World War I, European totalitarianisms. World the dual concerns of the historian's life—teaching War II, the loss of European primacy, and the and research; when feasible, therefore, all doctoral search for a new Europe. 4 cr. students are expected to undertake teaching in the department during a part of their residence. Partic- 761, 762. ENGLAND IN THE TUDOR ipation in pro-seminar and in teaching constitutes AND STUART PERIODS an apprenticeship in conjunction with formal Political, religious, socio-economic, and intellec- study. tual forces for change at work in England trom the accession of Henry VII to the revolution ot 1688- 700. ADVANCED EXPLORATIONS IN 89. 4 cr. HISTORY See department listings for semester topic. Barring 763. RUSSIA: ORIGINS TO duplication of subject, may be repeated for credit. MODERNIZATION 1-4 cr. Russia from its foundation to emancipation and reform. Political developments, foreign relations, 705, 706. AMERICA IN THE 18TH intellectual and ideological currents. 4 cr. CENTURY AND THE REVOLUTION American colonial and revolutionary history from 764. RUSSIA: FROM TSARIST TO 1740 through the adoption of the Constitution and SOVIET EMPIRE the establishment of Washington's first administra- The cost of modernization; Leninist and Stalinist tion. 4 cr. revolutions; Soviet consolidation. 4 cr.

711, 712. 19TH-CENTURY AMERICA 774. HISTORIOGRAPHY Domestic and international factors in the devel- Analysis of ancient and modern historians. Re- opment of the American republic, its institutions quired of all entering Ph.D. candidates; open to and people, from the inception of the new nation undergraduates with permission. 4 cr. (Not offered in 1789 to the emergence of the United States as every year.) a world power in 1900. 4 cr. 775. HISTORICAL METHODS 715, 716. 20TH-CENTURY AMERICA Introduction to contemporary historical methods. U.S. after 1900; cultural, political, and social fac- Required of all entering Ph.D. candidates; open to tors causing major changes in American life. Se- undergraduates with permission. 4 cr. (Not offered mester I: progressivism through the New Deal, every year.) Semester II: World War II to the present. 4 cr. 777. THE HELLENISTIC-ROMAN 719, 720. THE FOREIGN RELATIONS OF WORLD THE UNITED STATES The Mediterranean and Near East from the time Primarily the history of American diplomacy, with of Alexander to the reign of Constantine. Covers attention given to the nondiplomatic aspects. Se- the main political and social developments, but mester I: American Revolution to 1890. Semester stresses artistic, scientific, philosophical, and reli- II: 1890 to date. 4 cr. gious trends, with particular emphasis on the rise of Christianity, Zoroastrianism, and the general

75 Home Economics

religious climate that prepared the way for Islam. 843, 844. SEMINAR/READINGS IN 4 cr. EUROPEAN HISTORY 1) Mr. Heilbronner (modern Russia); 2) Mr. Jones 789. SEMINAR IN THE HISTORY OF (Medieval); 3) Ms. Polasky (France and European SCIENCE social history); 4) Mr. Wheeler (Spain and Portu- Selected topics conducted through special lectures, gal); 5) Mr. Wilcox (Renaissance). 3 cr. individual study, oral and written reports. Subject varies. Cannot be used tor credit in history without 859, 860. SEMINAR IN ENGLISH permission ot the department. Prereq: permission HISTORY of adviser and instructor. 4 cr. 1) Mr. Schwarz (Tudor-Stuart). Prereq: permission. 3 cr. 790. QUANTIFICATION AND COMPUTERS FOR THE HISTORIAN 888. PROBLEMS IN MODERN AFRICAN The historian's use of computers and statistics; HISTORY practical applications of both interactive terminal Topics will vary each year the seminar is offered. operations and batch processing. Data generation Emphasis will be on Africa south ot the Sahara in and processing, computer languages (BASIC, the colonial and postcolonial eras. Among the top- FORTRAN), programming and library programs, ics will be: African resistance movements in pre- elementary statistics; students will undertake op- colonial and colonial Africa; African nationalism; erations of their own on material supplied and will problems of the independent African states; the role consider particular quantitative studies in history of the military in postcolonial Africa; and issues in in terms of techniques used. No previous knowl- Portuguese African history. Students will write re- edge of computers or college mathematics research papers and give oral presentations. Mr. quired. Prereq: admission as an undergraduate Wheeler. 3 cr. major or graduate student in history or permission. 4 cr. 895, 896. TUTORIAL READING AND RESEARCH IN HISTORY 791. RELIGION IN WORLD HISTORY A) Early American History; B) American National The religious experience of man trom the perspec- History; C) Canada; D) Latin America; E) Me- tive of world history. The major modes of religion; dieval History; F) Early Modern Europe; development of the major religious traditions and G) Modern European History; H) Ancient His- institutions. 4 cr. tory; I) Far East and India; J) Near East and Africa; K) European Historiography; L) American Histo- 797. COLLOQUIA IN HISTORY riography; M) Russia; N) World History; Selected topics in American, European, and non- O) English History; P) New Hampshire History; Western history. Students must select section in Q) Historical Methodology; R) Irish History. department office at the time of registration. 4 cr. Prereq: permission. 1-6 cr.

Graduate Readings and Seminars 899. MASTER'S THESIS

801. PROSEMINAR: HISTORY AS A 999. DOCTORAL RESEARCH PROFESSION Entering graduate students intending the doctorate and all advanced graduate students serving as re- Home Economics (HEc) search, program, or teaching assistants in the de- periodically discuss the partment meet to Chairperson: Michael F. Kalinowski obligations and mechanics ot the historian's profession, including teaching, scholarship, university ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Larry J. Hansen; and college structures, and the role of the faculty Victor R. Messier; Elizabeth A. Snell; Henry J. therein. cr. Thompson ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: Jennifer W. Bryce; 819, 820. SEMINAR IN EARLY Elizabeth M. Dolan; Colette H. Janson; AMERICAN HISTORY Michael F. Kalinowski; Joel Rudd; Anthony R. 1) Mr. Clark (social and cultural); 2) Mr. Gilmore Tagliaferro (Revolution): 3) Mr. Rutman (Anglo-American society). Prereq: permission. 3 cr. The department offers graduate work leading to a Master of Science degree in home economics, 823, 824. SEMINAR IN AMERICAN with the major emphasis in areas which strengthen NATIONAL HISTORY professional competence in child/tamily studies and 1) (Afro-American); 2) Mr. Sitkoff (20th century); consumer studies. Each student's program will be 3) Mr. Jellison (19th century and biography); planned to achieve professional objectives based on 4) Mr. Mennel (social); 5) Mr. Long (foreign re- specific interests, ability, and undergraduate prep- lations). Prereq: permission. 3 cr. aration. Admission: Students admitted to the graduate 836. SEMINAR IN LATIN AMERICAN program in home economics are expected to have HISTORY an undergraduate degree in home economics or a Topics will vary and will include: conservatism related field. If there are deficiencies in the under- and conformity in Latin America; the Portuguese graduate program, students may be admitted on Empire; Brazil and Africa; the Mexican Revolu- condition that they complete specified prerequisites tion; nationalism and neocolonial Latin America; which will not be counted toward the degree. Stu- Brazil; empire and republic; and slavery in the dents seeking admission must submit recent scores Americas: a comparison. Mr. McCann. 3 cr. from the Graduate Record Examination.

76 Home Economics

Requirements: A candidate for a Master of Sci- children and adolescents, women, etc. Prereq; 3 ence in home economics is expected to fulfill the courses in consumer studies or permission. 4 cr. general requirements of the Graduate School and the following departmental requirements: 773. NUTRITION AND HUMAN

1) A minimum of 22 semester credits in home DEVELOPMENT economics courses above the 800-level, including Functional role of nutrients in physiological and Research Seminar, and Thesis, HEc 899. biochemical systems and their importance in hu- 2) SocSOl: Sociological Methods I, Intermediate man growth, development, and behavior. Prereq: Social Statistics, and Soc 802: Sociological Methods nutrition in health and disease, or permission. 4 cr.

II, Research Design. (Fall semester only.) 3) An additional 4 credits of electives, m or outside of home economics. 774. CLINICAL DIETETICS 4) Before the second semester of graduate study, Principles of normal nutrition applied to clinical students will have planned a program of studies problems; altered nutrient requirements in human with the approval of their advisory committees. disease. Diet therapy as applied to clinical nutrition. 5) A final oral and/or written examination. Prereq: prin of nutrition; human nutrition; biochemistry; permission. 4 cr. (Spring semester 707. PRACTICUM IN HOME only.) ECONOMICS Supervised in-depth experience with observation 776. CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN and participation to increase the student's under- NUTRITION standing in a specific area ot home economics. Focus on national and worldwide nutrition con- Choice of practicum from A) Child; B) Family; cerns. Approaches and materials used in nutrition C) Consumer; D) Food and Nutrition. Prcrcq: education. Prereq: basic nutrition course; permis- HEc major; permission. 4 cr. sion. 4 cr. (Spring semester only.)

709. BIOCHEMISTRY OF NUTRITION 786. DYNAMICS OF FAMILY CHANGE Intermediary metabolism of nutrients and energy; Theories and research for the assessment of family metabolism transport mechanisms; biological oxi- interaction patterns; planned intervention tech- dations; interrelationships of carbohydrate, fat, and niques. Students examine their interaction pro- protein metabolism; obesity; control of hunger and cesses and their possible effect on intervention appetite. Prercq: college course in biochemistry. efforts. Prereq: family relations; clinical approaches (Also offered as AnSc 709.) 4 cr. to human behavior. 4 cr.

725. PRESCHOOL PROGRAMS 791. METHODS OF TEACHING HOME Organization of time, space, materials, and people ECONOMICS to attain goals in early childhood programs. His- Home economics in the school program; curricu- toric and current programs. Prereq: preschool lum materials, methods, and resources in teaching. methods and materials or permission. 4 cr. 4 cr.

727. STUDENT TEACHING IN THE 793. FAMILY LIFE EDUCATION PRESCHOOL-KINDERGARTEN Critical review of current issues and literature; ma- Supervised teaching experience. Students spend 14 terials and methods for programs such as sex ed- weeks, 18-20 hours per week, in a selected pre- ucation and parent education. Prereq; family school, working with a cooperating teacher. The relations; permission. 4 cr. student must apply at least one semester previous to the semester in which he or she plans to student 797. SPECIAL TOPICS IN CONSUMER teach. Prereq: permission. Coreq: HEc 728. 6 cr. STUDIES Cr/F. (Spring semester only.) Highly focused examination of a particular theoretical, methodological, or policy issue in con- 728. SEMINAR FOR STUDENT sumer studies. Prereq: three courses in consumer TEACHERS IN THE PRESCHOOL- studies or permission. 4 cr. KINDERGARTEN Students will enrich their student teaching experi- 804. PROTEIN METABOLISM AND ence with biweekly seminars throughout the se- NUTRITION mester as a supplement to their practical experience Metabolism of dietary amino acids in the mam- in the field. Prercq: permission. Coreq: HEc 727. malian system with emphasis on various aspects of 2 cr. (Spring semester only.) protein nutrition. Prercq: permission. (Also offered as AnSci 804.) Mr. Schwab. 4 cr. (Not offered 751. CONSUMER DECISION MAKING every year.) Examination of individual and group consumer decision-making strategies and styles, including in- 810. MINERALS AND VITAMINS IN formation acquisition, information processing, ne- NUTRITION gotiation, and power. Prereq: management and Metabolism and function of mineral elements and decision making or equivalent; permission. 4 cr. vitamins in higher animals. Prereq: permission. (Also offered as AnSci 810.) Mr. Parsons. 4 cr. 752. FAMILY ECONOMICS (Not offered every year.) The effect of economic change on families and family income and resource allocation. Prercq: one 874. CLINICAL NUTRITION AND course in economics or permission. 4 cr. ASSESSMENT Changes in physiological and/or biochemical func- 756. CONSUMERS IN SOCIETY tions or processes due to illness and uses of mod- Examination of problems and issues facing selected ified diets as an essential part of nutritional groups of consumers, e.g., the elderly, the poor.

77 Institute of Natural and Eni'iroumenlal Resources

assessment and treatment. Prereq: HEc 773 or per- Institute of Natural and mission. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) Environmental Resources 876. CURRENT ISSUES IN COMMUNITY NUTRITION Director: Owen B. Durgin Controversial issues in nutrition are the focus for PROFESSORS: Richard A. Andrews; James P. discussion of the improvement and maintenance of Barrett; Gordon L. Byers; William H. Drew; the health status of individuals and groups; tech- B. Durgin; Nicolas Engalichev; Francis niques of data evaluation, mterpretation, and nu- Owen R. Hall; L. Hill; Harold W. Hocker, Jr.; trition education are emphasized. Prereq: HEc 773, John Edmund F. Jansen, Jr.; William Mautz; David 774, or permission. 4 cr. (Spring semester only.) P. Olson ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: John E. Carroll; S. 883. AMERICAN FAMILIES IN POVERTY Lawrence Dingman; Robert D. Harter; Bruce E. Lindsay; Albert E. Luloff; Nobel K. Problems of economically deprived rural and urban Peterson; R. Marcel Reeves;' Richard R. families. Objective, intellectual, and human in- Weyrick volvement in dealing with poor families. Under- PROFESSORS: Robert T. Eckert; standing the strengths and weaknesses typical of ASSISTANT Peter H. Greenwood; Theodore E. Howard; American families in poverty. 4 cr. Donald R. Miller PROFESSORS: George E. Frick; 886. CRITICAL PROBLEMS IN FAMILY ADJUNCT LIFE Nelson L. LeRay, Jr.; Robert S. Pierce ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: C. Evaluation of the needs and resources ot families ADJUNCT Anthony Federer; James W. Hornbeck; William with critical problems; maturational and situational B. Leak; Sidney A. L. Pilgrim; Betty H. sources of stress influencing the contemporary Roberts; Lawrence O. Safford; Charles F. American family; students will demonstrate mas- Tucker theoretical concepts by developing self-help tery of ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: strategies to be used by families experiencing stress. ADJUNCT Maurice E. Demeritt, Jr.; Peter W. Garrett Prereq: permission. 4 cr. GRAUDATE PROGRAM COORDINATOR: Robert D. Harter 893. PARENTS AND CHILDREN In-depth study of the reciprocal relationships Master Science, Natural and among parents and children. Evaluation of service of programs in terms of current research. Prereq: the Environmental Resources young child, family relations, or permission. 4 cr. A single master's degree is offered by the Insti- 895. SEMINAR AND SPECIAL tute with SIX specific options: PROBLEMS Forest Resources: Forest resource management; B) Consumer Studies; C) Family Relations; forest recreation; forest marketing; wood industry D) Food and Nutrition; E) Home Economics Ed- management; forest mensuration; forest tree im- ucation; F) Management and Family Finance; and provement; and wood science and technology. G) Human Development. The student will con- Hydrology: Water quality; ground water hy- tribute to a selective review and critical evaluation drology; surface water hydrology; and water re- of the research and current literature and an ex- source management. amination of issues and trends. Independent proj- Resource Economics: Agricultural economics; economics; land ects may be a part of the experience. These community development; regional seminars are open to graduate students with suffi- and water economics; rural manpower; and marine cient background and will not be scheduled every economics. semester. One or more semesters, maximum ot 4 Soil Science: Soil chemistry; soil classification forest soils. credits in one area. 2-4 cr. and genesis; soil microbiology; and Resource Administration and Management: 897. RESEARCH SEMINAR Management of publicly and privately owned nat- Interdisciplinary approach to research in home eco- ural resources; administration of natural resource nomics. Emphasis on the multidimensionality of laws and policies; management of natural-resource- family problems, appropriate research strategies, based firms. and and critical analysis of current literature. 4 cr. Wildlife Ecology: Habitat evaluation management; wildlife nutrition and physiology; and 898. RESEARCH PROJECT land-use planning for wildlife. A study or project which may be selected in lieu of a thesis (studients admitted prior to September, Entrance Requirements 1982, only). To be taken concurrently with or fol- programs in these lowing HEc 897. 2-4 cr. Students admitted to Institute options are expected to have completed either an they 899. MASTER'S THESIS undergraduate degree in the field in which 6cr. plan to specialize or show adequate preparation in the basic support courses of the field. Students with good undergraduate records who lack a background in a particular field may be admitted to a program, provided they are prepared to correct the deficiencies. The Graduate Record Examination is required of all applicants. Students entering the forest resources option are usually expected to have completed a bachelor's degree in forestry equivalent to that obtained at a

78 Institute of Natural and Eninronmental Resources

school accredited by the Society of American For- graduate or graduate standing. Mr. Durgin. 4 cr. esters. Students planning for the resource econom- (Not offered every semester.) ics option will need satisfactory undergraduate training that would usually be expected to mclude 702. NATURAL RESOURCES POLICY four or more courses in economics or resource Contemporary issues in the management and al- economics. Entering students in hydrology and soil location of natural resources; effect of humans on science are required to have adequate preparation agricultural and forest lands, water, wildlife, fish- in chemistry, physics, mathematics (including, for eries, and minerals; historical perspective of current hydrology, one year of calculus), and the biological resource policies. Prereq: permission. Mr. Carroll. or earth sciences. Students interested in wildlife 4 cr. ecology are expected to have adequate preparation in biological sciences, chemistry, and mathematics 709. SOILS AND COMMUNITY including statistics. Students interested in resource PLANNING administration and management are expected to Using a town plan and soils map, students develop have had a minimum of three courses in the areas reports for multiple urban and rural land-use-hous- of ecology or natural resources, and resource eco- ing, sewage, recreation, transportation, runoff, etc. nomics, or be expected to make up this deficiency. USDA soil classification system; Soil Conservation This option is designed primarily for persons hav- Service rating criteria; New Hampshire soils. Guest ing professional experience in resource administra- lecturers. Prereq: permission. Mr. Peterson. 2 cr. tion, management, or related areas; applicants are requested to submit an essay of up to 5,000 words 711. STATISTICAL METHODS II describing their backgrounds and goals. Intermediate course in statistics; basic concepts of sampling, linear models and analyses for one-way Academic Requirements and multi\vay classification, factorial arrangement of treatments, multiple regression, and covariance. The M.S. degree is conferred upon successful Computer programs used in analyzing data. Ex- completion of the following: amples from environmental sciences. Prereq: ap-

1) A program amounting to not less than 30 plied statistics I; /or equivalent. Mr. Barrett. 4 cr. credits (34 credits for Res. Admin, and Mgt.), including the following course requirements or 712. SAMPLING TECHNIQUES equivalent: INER 893-894 seminar, 2 cr.; INER Techniques of sampling finite populations in en- 803, Approach to Research, 2 cr.; quantitative vironmental sciences; choice of sampling unit and methods or analytical techniques, 3-4 cr.; and frame, estimation of sample size, confidence limits, INER 898, Directed Research, 4-6 cr. or INER and comparisons of sample designs. Prereq: applied 899, Thesis, 6-10 cr. statistics I; /or equivalent. Mr. Barrett. 2-4 cr. 2) A final oral and/or written examination. 713. QUANTITATIVE ECOLOGY Intercollege Cooperative Programs Applied quantitative techniques: basic concepts in probability and statistics applied to ecological sys- The Institute participates in four doctoral degree tems; population dynamics; spatial patterns; species programs on a cooperative basis with other de- abundance and diversity; classification and ordi- partments in the University. The Department of nation; production; and energy and nutrient flow. Chemistry offers a soil and water chemistry option Additional credit for in-deptn mathematical anal- in its Ph.D. program, which is coordinated ysis of a particular topic. Prereq: introductory through joint efforts of the soils and hydrology courses in calculus, statistics, and ecology. Mr. faculties and the chemistry faculty (see Interdisci- Barrett. 3 or 4 cr. plinary Options and Programs). A Ph.D. program in genetics is available to students in forest re- 718. LAW OF NATURAL RESOURCES sources through the Genetics Program (see Genet- AND ENVIRONMENT ics Program). Students can earn a Ph.D. in For resource managers: the legal system pertaining economics in the cooperative program between re- to resource management, protection of the envi- source economics and the Whittemore School of ronment, and possibilities for future action. Prereq: Business and Economics (see Economics). contemp conserv issues, or land economics and Through informal cooperative arrangements with use, or permission. Mr. Tucker. 3 cr. the electrical and mechanical engineering departments, opportunities are available for graduate 757. BASICS OF REMOTE SENSING study in wood science and technology in the Col- Fundamentals for application of photographic and lege of Engineering and Physical Sciences, leading nonphotographic sensors to information gathering to either the master's degree in electrical engineer- in natural resource fields; emphasis is on the inter- ing or mechanical engineering or the Ph.D. degree pretation of aerial photographs. Applications to in engineering (see Engineering Ph.D. Program: forestry, wildlife, land-use planning, earth sci- Theoretical and Applied Mechanics or Signal Pro- ences, soils, hydrology, and engineering. StafT. cessing). Lab. 2 cr.

Natural and Environmental 758. APPLICATIONS OF REMOTE Resources (INER) SENSING Applications of remote sensing to the student's disciplinary interest. Student projects developed using 701. STATISTICAL METHODS I available conventional aerial photography or other Analysis of variance and general linear models; imagery. Prereq: INER 757; /or equivalent. Trans- measured numbers, nature of statistical evidence, portation fee. Staff. Lab. 2 cr. sampling distributions, and principles of statistical inference; application of specific linear models to given sets ol^ data. Prereq: upper-division under-

79 Institute of Natural and Environmental Resources

795, 796. INVESTIGATIONS course) given at the end of the first semester. 2- A) Resource Administration; B) Resource Man- 6 cr. Cr/F. agement; C) Resource Policy; D) Public Laws and Resources. May be repeated. Prereq: permission. 899. MASTER'S THESIS Staff. 2-4 cr. Hours and credits to be arranged. Prereq: Permis- sion. 6-10 cr. 797. FOREST RECREATION SEMINAR Recreational use of nonurban lands; economics of public and private developments; planning for state Forest Resources (FoRs) and private recreational use, social aspects. Class project. Prereq: permission. Staff 4 cr. 720. FOREST GENETICS Genetics of forest tree improvement; variation in 803. APPROACH TO RESEARCH natural populations, breeding methods, physiolog- The meaning of science and the application of logic ical characters, quantitative data analysis. Prereq: in the scientific method. Principles and techniques prin of genetics; silviculture; statistics; /or permis- of scientific research. Survey of experimental de- sion. Transportation fee. Mr. Eckert. Lab. 3 cr. sign procedures. Organization ot investigative (Not offered every year.) work, problem analyses, working plans, and scientific writing. Prereq: permission. Staff 2 cr. 722. ADVANCED SILVICULTURE Intensive silviculture of forest stands. Regeneration 811. NATURAL AND (e.g., alternative regeneration methods and site ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCE preparation); stand management (e.g., thinning MANAGEMENT schedules and fertilization). Prereq: silviculture; To develop an understanding of the fundamental permission. Transportation fee. Mr. Hocker. 3 cr. scientific, aesthetic, and ethical principles involved (Not offered every year.) in the management of renewable natural resources and ways to apply these principles in the formu- 734. FOREST PROTECTION SEMINAR lation and evaluation of resource-management pol- Discussion and special problems based on princi- icies including the identification of unifying ples and techniques of forest protection. Prereq: concepts in the management of specific renewable permission. Mr. Weyrick. 3 cr. resources, soils, water, forests, and wildlife. Prereq: permission. Staff. 4 cr. 737. GAME MANAGEMENT I Biological characteristics, habitat requirements, re- 812. ADMINISTRATION OF RESOURCE search and management practices of upland game LAWS AND POLICIES birds and big game animals. Several all-day field Largely devoted to legalistic, policy, and political trips required (possibly on weekends) to New Eng- science aspects of natural and community resource land wildlife areas. Transportation fee. Prereq: administration. Attention is also given to concepts wildlife management major. Mr. Mautz. Lab. 4 cr. of private property, home rule, social value, trade- offs, and bureaucracy as elements in administra- 738. GAME MANAGEMENT II tion. Transportation fee. Prereq: permission. Mr. Biological characteristics, habitat requirements, re- Carroll. 4 cr. search and management practices of small game animals, furbearers, and predators. Several all-day 815. LINEAR PROGRAMMING field trips required (possibly on weekends) to New METHODS England wildlife areas. Transportation fee. Prereq: Setting up and solving problems by the simplex wildlife management major or permission. Mr. and distribution methods; variation in linear pro- Miller. Lab. 4 cr. gramming methods with applications; nonlinear programming, discrete programming; and solving 745. FOREST MANAGEMENT input-output and game-theory problems. Prereq: Forest land ownership; management objectives; elem matrix alg or permission. Mr. Andrews. 2 cr. forest inventory regulation and economic analysis; forest administration; professional responsibilities 816. QUANTITATIVE FOREST and opportunities. Transportation fee. Staff. Lab. ECOLOGY SEMINAR 4 cr. Preparation, presentation, and discussion of recent topics in quantitative ecology such as remote sen- 753. OPERATIONS CONTROL AND sing, population growth, competition between ANALYSIS species, modeling of a population, and energy Quantitative tools for decision making in forest flow. Seminar is 2 credits; an additional 2 credits resource management activities; development and available for an in-depth study of a particular topic. analysis of cost functions, timber and stumpage Mr. Leak and Mr. Barrett. 2-4 cr. valuation, forecasting, linear programming. Monte Carlo simulation, PERT. Prereq: calculus; forest 893, 894. NATURAL AND economics; statistics; mensuration. Mr. Howard. ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES Lab. 4 cr. SEMINAR Presentation and discussion of recent research, lit- 754. WOOD PRODUCTS erature, and policy problems in the natural and MANUFACTURE AND MARKETING social sciences influencing resource use. 1 cr. Cr/F. Wood products from harvesting and procurement of raw material to finished product processes; man- 898. DIRECTED RESEARCH agement decisions, marketing, and promotion Hours and credits to be arranged. Prereq: permis- problems. All-day field trips to manufacturing sion. Not available if credit obtained for INER 899. plants and, occasionally, to associated harvesting A year-long course; an "lA" grade (continous operations, weather permitting. Transportation

80 Institute of Natural and Enuironmental Resources

fee. Prereq: wood sci. and tech.; or permission. hydrologic aspects of water quality. Problems of Mr. Hill. Lab. 4 cr. measurement and aspects of statistical treatment of hydrologic data. Transportation fee. Prereq: cal- 755. REGIONAL SILVICULTURE AND culus. Mr. Dingman. Lab. 4 cr. FOREST MANAGEMENT Extended held trip to another forest region. Prereq: 710. GROUNDWATER HYDROLOGY FoRs 745; /or permission. Staff (Limited enroll- Principles for fluid flow in porous media with em- ment.) 2 cr. Cr/F. phasis on occurrence, location, and development of groundwater, but with consideration of ground- 764/864. FOREST INDUSTRY water as a transporting medium. Major topics in- ECONOMICS clude well hydraulics, regional groundwater flow, Business methods and economics in the forest in- exploration techniques, and chemical quality. Lab- dustry; planning for minimum cost operations and oratory exercises involve use of fluid, electrical, profitable use of capital in a forest enterprise. In- and digital computer models to illustrate key con- dividual projects. Prereq: permission. Staff 4 cr. cepts. Prereq: calculus. Mr. Hall. Lab. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) 795, 796. INDEPENDENT WORK IN 798. FOREST RESOURCES HYDROLOGY MANAGEMENT SEMINAR A) Hydrology; B) Chemistry of Water; C) Water The integration of demands trom human popula- Resource Management. Stuclent may choose topic tion changes and needs on forest productivity and faculty consultant. Staff. 1-4 cr. through planning. The recognition of environmental quality and ecological concepts as planning cri- 803. ADVANCED HYDROLOGY teria. Class discussions and group planning are a Application of quantitative methods to selected hy- critical component. Prereq: FoRs 745. Stan. Lab. drologic problems. Critical examination of deter- 4 cr. ministic and stochastic models, with emphasis on conceptualizing the hydrologic problem, develop- 801. FOREST MANAGEMENT SEMINAR ing appropriate models, obtaining solutions, and Seminar discussions ot current literature, plans, evaluating models and solutions in terms of basic principles, and new developments in the general assumptions, data requirements, and verification of field of forest management. Transportation fee. results. Prereq: prin of hydrology; computer meth- Prereq: permission. Staff. 2 cr. ods; basic statistics. Mr. Hall. 3 cr.

805. UTILIZATION SEMINAR 804. WATER QUALITY CONCEPTS Conferences, discussions, and reports on assigned AND MODELING topics. Consideration of current literature and de- Principles of chemical transport in fresh water and velopments in the general field of wood utilization. experience in modeling selected systems. Combi- Prereq: permission. Mr. Hill. 2 cr. nation of literature review and application of existing models. Topics include the movement of: 806. OPERATIONS CONTROL SEMINAR phosphorus in lakes; oxygen and dyes in streams; Conferences, discussions, and reports on assigned and selected substances in ground water. Term topics. Considerations of current developments in project to be selected and implemented by each the field of quantitative control of forest opera- student. Prereq: physical chemistry, geochemistry, tions. Prereq: permission. Mr. Howard. 2 cr. (Not or soil chemistry or equivalent; computer methods; offered every year.) hydrology or limnology; or permission. Mr. Hall. 3 cr. 809, 810. WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT SEMINAR 808. WATER RESOURCE Discussions and assigned reports on current inves- MANAGEMENT tigations and developments in wildlife manage- Hydrologic and statistical aspects of water resource ment. Prereq: undergraduate courses in wildlife management; nature of water resource problems management; permission. Mr. Olson. 1-4 cr. and application of models in their solution; geo- graphical aspects of water-resource problems in the 895, 896. INVESTIGATIONS IN: U.S.; economic, social, institutional, and environ- A) Forest Ecology; B) Remote Sensing; C) Wood mental aspects of water resource problems. Prereq: Utilization; D) Game Management; E) Men- prin of hydrology; basic statistics; /or permission. suration; F) Forest Economics; G) Forest Manage- Mr. Dingman. 4 cr. ment; H) Operations Control and Analysis;

I) Recreation; J) Policy; K) Wildlife Physiology; L) Forest Genetics. Elective only after consultation Resource Economics (REco) with the instructor in charge. 1-4 cr. 705. PLANNED CHANGE IN NONMETROPOLITAN COMMUNITIES Hydrology (Hydr) Discussion and application of community development theory and principles using appropriate re- 705. PRINCIPLES OF HYDROLOGY search methodologies. Areas of study chosen from: Physical principles important in the hydrologic population growth, community planning and de- cycle, including: basic equations, properties of velopment, provision and distribution of services, water, movement of water in natural environ- rural-urban difference, and systems management. ments, formation of precipitation, relations be- Emphasis on empirical research studies. Students tween precipitation and streamflow, snow-melt, may participate in community-development activ- evapotranspiration, interception, infiltration, rela- ities. May include placement in field agency. tions between groundwater and streamflow, and Prereq: applied community development; statistics; permission. Mr. Luloff 4 cr. (Offered in even years only.)

81 Intercollege Course

706. ECONOMICS OF RESOURCE of these theories to patterns of industrial location, DEVELOPMENT systems of cities, and land-use competition in gen- Resource scarcity and theories ot economic devel- eral. Problems of locational change and adjustment opment; major resource development problems of and the effects of public policy on spatial economic land and natural resources, urban-rural conflicting activities. Prereq: elem calculus; linear algebra; demands, and conservation and water supply; cap- regression; micro- and macroeconomics; /or per- ital needs, externalities, and market failure. Prereq: mission. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) intermediate economic theory. Mr. Jansen. 4 ci". (Offered every third semester.) 895-896. INVESTIGATIONS IN: A) Agricultural Marketing; B) Agricultural Pro- 710. RESOURCE ECONOMICS SEMINAR duction and Farm Management; C) Economics of A) Agricultural Economics and Food Policy; Human Resources; D) Economics of Population B) Rural Development; C) Marine Economics; and Food; E) Land Economics; F) Marine Eco- D) Location of Economic Activity; E) Land and nomics; G) Rural Economic Development; Water Economics; F) Quantitative Methods; H) Regional Economics; I) Water Economics. Spe- G) Environmental Economics. In-depth treatment cial assignments in readings, investigations, or field of area, including classic works. Seminars arranged problems. May be repeated. Prereq: permission. to students' needs and offered as demand warrants. Staff 2-4 cr. May be repeated. Staff 2-4 cr.

717. LAW OF COMMUNITY PLANNING Soil Science (Soil) Common law and the Constitution with respect to property law, including eminent domain, land-use 701. PHYSICS OF SOILS planning, urban renewal, and zoning. Makes the Soil as a physical system; textural and structural nonlawyer aware of the influence and operation ot analysis of soils, water flow and retention, and heat the legal system in community development. Mr. and gas transfer; physical properties of soil and Tucker. 4 cr. plant growth; methods of soil physical analysis. Prereq: soils and the environ or permission. Staff. 756. REGIONAL ECONOMIC ANALYSIS Lab. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) Concepts and methods of delineating regional economies, methods of measuring activity, re- 702. CHEMISTRY OF SOILS gional development, and public policies. Emphasis Chemical composition of soil; colloidal phenomena on empirical research studies. Prereq; intermediate and the exchange and fixation of elements, cation economic theory; /or permission. Mr. Lindsay. exchange capacity and source of negative charge; 4 cr. (Offered every third semester.) inorganic reactions in soil and their effect on soil properties. Prereq: one year of college chemistry 804. APPLIED ECONOMICS OF or permission. Mr. Harter. 3 cr. RESOURCE USE The theory of resource allocation used in solving 704. SOIL CLASSIFICATION AND public and private economic problems. Resource- MAPPING product relationships, nature ot cost, returns to Soil genesis, morphology, classification, and map- scale, factor valuation and pricing, and uncertainty ping; major classification systems used in the U.S. are analyzed with appropriate methodology. Pri- and throughout the world as they relate to human mary emphasis will be placed on empirical research uses of the soil. Prereq: soils and the environ; intro studies and their implications. Prereq: applied sta- geology; /or permission. Transportation tee. Mr. tistics; intermediate microeconomic analysis. 4 cr. Peterson. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) 795, 796. INDEPENDENT WORK IN SOIL 809. AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS SCIENCE Analysis of supply, demand, and price relation- A) Soil-Plant Relationships; B) Physics of Soils; ships. Appraisal of the economic theory relevant C) Chemistry of Soils; D) Soil Classification; to decision making in food production, marketing, E) Forest Soils. Prereq: permission. 1-4 cr. and consumption; the competitive structure ot the food industry. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) 802. SPECIAL TOPICS IN SOIL SCIENCE Topics may include soil mineralogy, advanced soil 820. ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS chemistry, soil physical chemistry, or others as the SEMINAR need arises. Seminar or lecture format as appro- The use of economic concepts for analyzing current priate to the topic. Prereq: permission. 1-3 cr. environmental problems. Student reports and class Cr/F. (Offered only with sufficient demand.) discussion will deal with the application of economic analysis to real world environmental prob- 895-896. INDEPENDENT WORK IN SOIL lems at the local, state, and national levels; costs SCIENCE and benefits of alternative methods of dealing with A) Soil-Plant Relationships; B) Physics of Soils; environmental objectives; and other economic C) Chemistry of Soils; D) Soil Classification; goals of society. Prereq: intermediate micro- and E) Forest Soils. Elective only after consultation macroeconomic analysis or equivalent; permission. with the instructor in charge. 1-4 cr. Staff 2 cr. (Not offered every year.)

838. INTRODUCTION TO THE LOCATION OF ECONOMIC ACTIVITY Intercollege Course (Inco) Economic theories explaining the behavior ot individual firms and consumers in selecting sites tor 890. COLLEGE TEACHING carrying on economic activities. The relationship Acquisition of theoretical and practical knowledge of the basics of college teaching; the role of the

82 Mathematics

college teacher in facilitating learning. Course par- Additional Degree Requirements for the ticipants will work to improve three aspects of Ph.D. in Mathematics: 4) proficiency in reading their work: teaching methods with large and small mathematical literature in two of three languages: groups, planning teaching sessions, and assessment French, German, and Russian; 5) advanced work of student learning. Participants will be encouraged in a major (the field of the thesis) and a minor to develop a teachmg style that is effective and (usually another field of mathematics), with an oral compatible with their philosophy, attitudes, and examination in these two helds; and 6) thesis—new aptitudes. 2 cr. (Not offered every year.) and original mathematical results will be required. Thesis work is available in algebra, applied mathematics, statistics, analysis, and topology. Mathematics (Math) Additional Degree Requirements for the Ph.D. in Mathematics-Education: 4) language requirement as in Ph.D. in mathematics except that Chairperson: Richard H. Balomenos mastery of an approved research tool may be sub- PROFESSORS: Richard H. Balomenos; Homer stituted for one language; 5) advanced work in a major (mathematics-education) and a minor (usu- F. Bechtell, Jr.; David M. Burton; Arthur H. ally education) with an oral examination in these Copeland, Jr.; A. Robbjacoby; Loren D. two fields; 6) thesis new and original results in- Meeker; Eric A. Nordgren; James Radlow; — volving pedagogical problems in mathematics will Shepley L. Ross; Albert O. Shar; Robert J. Silverman; Donovan H. Van Osdol be required. ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Albert B. Bennett, A maximum offour of the following courses may Jr.; William E. Bonnicc; William E. Geeslin; Donald W. Hadwin; Samuel D. Shore be applied to the degree of Master of Science in mathematics. ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: Kenneth B. Constantine; Marie A. Gaudard GRADUATE PROGRAM COORDINATOR: 735. PROBABILITY Samuel D. Shore Sample spaces (discrete and continuous); random variables; conditional probability; moments; binomial, Poisson, and normal distributions; limit Master of Science for Teachers theorems for sums of random variables. Prereq: multidim calculus. 4 cr. Admission Requirements: Completion of all requirements for secondary school teacher certifi- 736. cation in mathematics. STATISTICS Sampling theory, parameter estimation, hypothesis Degree Requirements: 1) Ten semester courses testing, regression, analysis of variance, nonpara- approved by the department. These will normally metric methods. Prereq: 735. 4 cr. be taken from the courses numbered 801-829 and Math will usually include the six courses numbered SOS- 737. DECISION SOB. 2) A comprehensive examination based pri- THEORY AND BAYESIAN METHODS marily on material in courses 803-808. It is not Utility, decision problems, prior and posterior dis- possible to study full time during the academic year tributions, sufficiency, estimation and hypothesis toward the Master of Science for Teachers degree. testing, linear models, and sequential sampling. The courses in this program are offered primarily Emphasis on applications to business and econom- in summer institutes. ics. Prereq: Matn 735. (Also offered as Econ 737.) 4 cr. (Offered in alternating years.) Master of Science in Mathematics 738. MULTIVARIATE STATISTICAL Admission Requirements: A year of algebra ANALYSIS or a year of analysis. Preference will be given to Multivariate distributions, estimation and hypoth- applicants who have completed both these sequences. esis testing, principal components, canonical cor- relations, factor analysis, discriminant analysis. Degree Requirements: Ten semester courses Prereq: 735 and 762. 4 cr. (Offered in alter- approved by the department. These must be chosen Math nating years.) from courses numbered 701-799 or 830-849. At least six of the ten must be from the 830-849 group. 739. LINEAR STATISTICAL MODELS An oral comprehensive examination is required. Estimation, testing, and diagnostic methods for linear regression, analysis of variance, and analysis Doctor of Philosophy of covariance. Some experience in the use of pack- aged statistical computer programs. Prereq: statis- The department offers the Ph.D. under two la- tics and linear algebra. 4 cr. (Offered in alternating bels: mathematics and mathematics-education. (A years). detailed description of the Ph.D. program is available from the department.) These programs have 740. STATISTICAL a common core as follows: NONPARAMETRIC Admission Requirements: same as for the METHODS Methods of nonparametric statistical inference for Master of Science in Mathematics. one-sample and two-sample problems, one-way Basic Degree Requirements: 1) all of the and two-way layouts, correlation, and regression. courses numbered 833-839; 2) experience in teach- Prereq: statistics. 4 cr. (Offered in alternating ing equivalent to at least half-time for one year; years). and 3) written comprehensive examination; this involves algebra, analysis (real and complex), and 745-746. general topology, and should be taken after three FOUNDATIONS OF APPLIED semesters in residence. MATHEMATICS Basic concepts and techniques of applied mathe-

83 Mathematics

madcs intended for graduate students of mathe- 785. ALGEBRAIC METHODS IN matics, engineering, and the sciences. Fourier scries TOPOLOGY and transforms, Laplace transforms, optimization, Introduction to some methods of algebraic topol- linear spaces, eigenvalues, Sturm-Liouvillc sys- ogy from topology of manifolds, homology the- tems, numerical methods, conformal mappmg, ory, knot theory. Prereq: Math 784 and/or Math residue theory. 4 cr. 761. 4 cr. (Offered in alternating years.)

753. NUMERICAL METHODS AND 788. COMPLEX ANALYSIS COMPUTERS I Complex tunctions, sequences, limits, differentia- Use of scientific subroutine and plotter-routine bility and Cauchy-Riemann equations, elementary packages, floating point arithmetic, polynomial functions, Cauchy's theorem and formula, Taylor's and cubic spline interpolation, implementation and Laurent's series, residues, conformal mapping. problems for linear and nonlinear equations, ran- Prereq: Math 767. 4 cr. dom numbers and Monte Carlo method, Rom- berg's method, optimization techniques. Selected 791. MATHEMATICS EDUCATION algorithms will be programmed for computer so- Methods ot teaching mathematics in junior and lution. Prereq: calculus II; intro programming and senior high school; acquaintance with professional FORTRAN. (Also offered as C S 753.) 4 cr. organizations and publications; and review of major curriculum projects. Prereq: exploring teach- 754. NUMERICAL METHODS AND ing. 4 cr. COMPUTERS II Mathematical software. Computer solutions of differential equations, eigenvalues and eigenvectors. The following courses may be applied to the de- Prereq: intro programming and FORTRAN. (Also gree of Master of Science for Teachers in mathe- offered as C S 754.) 4 cr. matics and to no other degree in mathematics.

761. ABSTRACT ALGEBRA 801-802. MATHEMATICS AND Basic properties of groups, rings, fields and their COMPUTING FOR TEACHERS homomorphisms. 4 cr. An introductory course designed to familiarize the students with the capabilities of a computer and to 762. LINEAR ALGEBRA enable them to use it confidently. Applications to Abstract vector spaces, linear transformations and algebra, analysis, logic, and game theory are ex- matrices. Determinants, eigenvalues and eigenvec- amined. 3 cr. tors. Prereq: Math 761. 4 cr. 803-804. HIGHER ALGEBRA FOR 764. ADVANCED ALGEBRA TEACHERS Topics to be selected trom among rings, modules, The integers, integral domains, and topics from algebraic fields, and group theory. Prereq: Math number theory; equivalence relations and congru- 761. 4 cr. (Offered in alternating years.) ences; real numbers, complex numbers, fields, and polynomials; group theory; matrix theory; vectors 767. ONE-DIMENSIONAL REAL and vector spaces; rings; Boolean algebra. 3 cr. ANALYSIS Theory of limits, continuity, differentiability, in- 805-806. HIGHER GEOMETRY FOR tegrability. 4 cr. TEACHERS Systems of postulates of various geometries; geo- 768. ABSTRACT ANALYSIS metric invariants; synthetic and analytic projective Metric spaces, function spaces, theory of uniform geometry; an introduction to non-Euclidean ge- limits. Prereq: Math 767. 4 cr. (Offered in alter- ometry and topology. 3 cr. nating years.) 807-808. HIGHER ANALYSIS FOR 769. MULTIDIMENSIONAL REAL TEACHERS ANALYSIS The real number system; functions and limits; ele- Continuity and differentiability of mappings from ments of set theory; numerical sequences and series; n-space to m-space; multiple integrals; line and sur- continuity; the derivative and the Riemann integral; face integrals. Prereq: Math 767; Math 762. 4 cr. maxima and minima. 3 cr. (Offered in alternating years.) 809. PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS 776. LOGIC FOR TEACHERS Induction and recursion; sentential logic; first-order Permutations and combinations; finite sample logic; completeness, consistency, and decidability; spaces; random variables; binomial distributions; recursive function. 4 cr. (Offered in alternating statistical applications. 3 cr. years.) 810. MATHEMATICS EDUCATION 783. SET THEORY Current developments and issues in mathematics Axiomatic set theory, including its history, Zer- education; content, curricula, methods, and psy- melo-Fraenkel axioms, ordinal and cardinal num- chology of teaching mathematics. 1-4 cr. bers, consistency, independence, and undecid- ability. 4 cr. (Offered in alternating years.) 811. COMPUTERS AND THEIR USES 3cr. 784. TOPOLOGY Open sets, closure, base, and continuous functions. 814. TOPOLOGY FOR TEACHERS Connectedness, compactness, separation axioms, Fundamental concepts of elementary topology; and metricizability. 4 cr. network and map problems; sets, spaces, and transformations. 3 cr.

84 Mathematics

816. THEORY OF NUMBERS FOR 838. ALGEBRAIC TOPOLOGY TEACHERS Chain complexes; homology of simplicial com- Divisibility and primes; congruences; quadratic re- plexes, singular homology and cohomology; axi- ciprocity; number theoretic functions; Diophantine omatic homology; cup and cap products. Prereq: equations; perfect and amicable numbers. 3 cr. undergrad abstract algebra and topology. 3 cr.

817. THEORY OF SETS AND 839. GENERAL TOPOLOGY ELEMENTARY LOGIC Subspace, product, and quotient topologies; An introduction. 3 cr. embedding; separation and countability axioms; connectedness; compactness and compactifications; 819. THE REAL NUMBER SYSTEM paracompactness, metricization, and metric com- A postulational approach. Algebraic structure; se- pletions. Prereq: undergrad general topology. 3 cr. quences, limits, and continuity. 3 cr. The following more specialized courses are of- 820. HISTORY OF MATHEMATICS fered on an irregular schedule whenever mutual A problem-study approach to mathematical prob- faculty and student interest justifies it. Content will lems from the period of Greek mathematics until vary from year to year and will normally be chosen the modern era. 3 cr. from among the topics listed. With the permission of the instructor, each of these courses may be taken 821. A MODERN APPROACH TO more than once for credit. GEOMETRY The foundations and development of Euclidean 841. TOPICS IN LOGIC AND geometry, with emphasis on the recent recommen- FOUNDATIONS dations in the field of high school geometry. 3 cr. Recursive functions; independence proofs; models; forcing techniques. 3 cr. 826. SELECTED TOPICS IN ALGEBRA Topics selected to supplement the teacher's previ- 842. TOPICS IN ALGEBRA ous training in algebra, chosen from among the Homological algebra; algebraic number theory; lo- following: linear algebra, vector spaces, groups, cal algebra; category theory; group theory; ring rings and ideals, and fields. 3 cr. theory; field theory. 3 cr.

827. SELECTED TOPICS IN GEOMETRY 843. TOPICS IN TOPOLOGY Topics selected to supplement the teacher's previ- Topological groups; algebraic topology; general ous training in geometry, chosen from among the topology. 3 cr. following: analytic projective geometry, non-Eu- clidean geometry, transformation theory, elemen- 844. TOPICS IN ANALYSIS tary metric differential geometry, topology. 3 cr. Calculus ot variations; harmonic analysis; integral equations; operator theory; linear topological 828. SELECTED TOPICS IN ANALYSIS spaces; partially ordered spaces; topological alge- Topics selected to supplement the teacher's previ- bras; complex variables. 3 cr. ous training in analysis, chosen from among the following: sequences and series of real functions, 845. TOPICS IN DIFFERENTIAL Riemann integration, partial differentiation, com- EQUATIONS plex functions, differential equations. 3 cr. Linear systems; general autonomous systems; two- dimensional systems; boundary value problems; 829. DIRECTED READING qualitative theory; stability theory; partial differ- A directed reading project on a selected topic in ential equations; functional analytic methods. 3 cr. mathematics. 3 cr. 846. TOPICS IN APPLIED MATHEMATICS The following are the basic courses for both the Distribution theory; potential theory; mechanics; Master ofSciettce and Doctor ofPhilosophy degrees control theory; mathematical biology; model the- in mathematics. ory; operations research. 3 cr.

833-834. ALGEBRA 847. TOPICS IN MATHEMATICS Groups; rings, modules; fields; linear algebra. EDUCATION Prereq: undergrad abstract algebra. 3 cr. The psychology of teaching and learning mathematics; supervision in mathematics teaching; cur- 835. MEASURE AND INTEGRATION riculum theory; new curriculum projects; curricu- Outer measures and measures; Lebcsque integrals; lum evaluation. 3 cr. convergence theorems. Prereq: undergraduate real analysis. 3 cr. 848. TOPICS IN GEOMETRY Analysis on manifolds; differential geometry; Rie- 836. FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS mannian geometry; algebraic geometry; convexity. Banach spaces; representation of linear functional; 3cr. weak and weak* topologies. Prereq: Math 835. 3 cr. 849. TOPICS IN PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS 837. COMPLEX ANALYSIS Time series analysis; analysis of variance; stochastic Open mapping theorem; maximum modulus theo- processes; probability; design of experiment; hy- rem; normal families and Riemann mapping theo- pothesis testing; estimation theory; nonparametric rem; harmonic functions; representation theorems; statistics. 3 cr. analytic continuation. Prereq: undergrad complex analysis. 3 cr.

85 Mechanical Engineering

The following courses are introductions to re- New Hampshire for a Bachelor of Science degree search opportunities for Doctor of Philosophy can- in the field. didates. With the permission of the instructor, each A candidate for the degree of Master of Science of these courses may be taken more than once for shall satisfy the requirements of either a thesis plan credit. or a project plan. The thesis plan requires 24 semester hours of coursework in addition to M E 861, 862. ADVANCED TOPICS IN 899, Master's Thesis; the project plan requires 30 ALGEBRA semester hours of coursework in addition to M E 3cr. 892, Master's Project. At least eight credits must be earned in 800-level courses other than M E 892 865, 866. ADVANCED TOPICS IN Master's Project and M E 899 Master's Thesis. No GENERAL TOPOLOGY more than two graduate courses taken prior to 3cr. admission to the Graduate School may be applied to the master's degree. An oral examination cov- 867, 868. ADVANCED TOPICS IN ering the candidate's graduate work will be given, ALGEBRAIC GEOMETRY tor both the thesis and project plans. 3cr. Students interested in graduate study beyond the master's degree should refer to the interdepartmen- 869, 870. ADVANCED TOPICS IN tal Engineering Ph.D. Program, which includes FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS the following areas of specialization: engineering 3cr. systems design, signal processing, theoretical and applied mechanics, and transport phenomena. For 871, 872. ADVANCED TOPICS IN details refer to the section entitled Engineering ALGEBRAIC TOPOLOGY Ph.D. Program. 3cr. Permission of the instructor and consent of the adviser are required for enrollment in all mechan- 873, 874. ADVANCED TOPICS IN ical engineering graduate courses. APPLIED MATHEMATICS 3cr. 701. MACROSCOPIC THERMODYNAMICS 879, 880. ADVANCED TOPICS IN Thermodynamic principles using an analytic, pos- MATHEMATICS EDUCATION tulational approach and Legendre transformations 3cr. to obtain thermodynamic potentials. 4 cr.

898. READING COURSES 702. STATISTICAL THERMODYNAMICS A) Algebra: B) Analysis; C) Topology; D) Ge- Macroscopic thermodynamic principles developed ometry; E) Functional Analysis; F) Differential by means ot microscopic analysis. Prereq: ther- Equations; G) Applied Mathematics; H) Proba- modynamics. 4 cr. bility and Statistics; I) Mathematics Education. 1-6 cr. 703. HEAT TRANSFER Analysis of phenomena; steady-state and transient 999. DOCTORAL RESEARCH conduction, radiation, and convection; engineering applications. Co- or prereq: fluid dynamics. 3 cr.

Mechanical Engineering 707. ANALYTICAL FLUID DYNAMICS Development of the Navier-Stokes equations; vor- (ME) ticity theorems; turbulence and boundary-layer theory. Prereq: fluid dynamics. 4 cr. Chairperson: Russell L. Valentine 708. GAS DYNAMICS PROFESSORS: Robert W. Corell; Godfrey H. Basic equations of motion of one-dimensional, Savage; Charles K. Taft; Russell L. Valentine; subsonic and supersonic flows of compressible, Asim Yildiz ideal fluids. Wave phenomena. Rankinc-Hugoniot ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: E, Eugene relations. Linear approach to two-dimensional flow Allmendinger; Wayne M. Beasley; Barbaros problems. Prereq: fluid dynamics. 4 cr. Celikkol; Frederick G. Hochgraf; David E. Limbert; Harvey Lyons; William Mosberg; M. 710. SOLAR HEATING SYSTEMS Robinson Swift; John A. Wilson Analysis and computer modeling of solar radiation GRADUATE PROGRAM COORDINATOR: as an energy source for heating. Phenomena, avail- Wayne M. Beasley ability, collection, performance, and economy of solar energy for heating systems. Prereq: M E 703. The mechanical engineering department offers 3cr. programs of study from the viewpoint both of the engineering sciences and ot engineering design, in 717. CRYOGENICS the areas of mechanics, materials science, automatic Phenomena and processes at very low tempera- control, and the thermal sciences, leading to the tures. Basic engineering sciences applied to prob- degree of Master of Science in Mechanical Engi- lems of low temperature refrigeration, liquefaction, neering. The programs provide the background separation, and storage; transport of cryogenic required for careers in research, engineering design, or teaching, or for further graduate study. Students admitted to graduate study in mechanical engineering should have completed work equivalent to that required by the University of

86 Mechanical Engineering

fluids; measurement systems; vacuum technology. 741. FLUID CONTROL SYSTEMS Prereq: thermodynamics, 4 cr. Mathematical modeling of hydraulic, pneumatic, and fluidic control elements and control systems. 723. ADVANCED DYNAMICS Methods for: 1) analysis of systems using gases or Classical dynamics oriented to contemporary en- liquids as the working fluid; 2) synthesis of the gineering applications. Review of particle dynam- parameters of the control elements used in fluid ics. Hamilton's principle and the Lagrange control systems; 3) design of these systems. (Also equations. Kinematics and dynamics of rigid bod- offered as E E 741.) 4 cr. ies, gyroscopic effects in machinery and space structures. 4 cr. 751. NAVAL ARCHITECTURE IN OCEAN ENGINEERING 724. VIBRATION THEORY AND Selected topics in the fundamentals of naval archi- APPLICATIONS tecture pertinent to ocean engineering, including Discrete vibrating systems. Linear system con- hydrostatic characteristics, basics of resistance and cepts; single-degree-of-freedom systems with gen- propulsion and rules and regulations for surface, eral excitation. Matrix theory and eigenvalue semisubmersible, and submersible marine vehicles. problems. Many degrees of freedom, normal mode Computer applications. Prereq: fluid dynamics; theory for free and forced vibration. Numerical mechanics; /or permission. 4 cr. methods; introduction to continuous systems; ap- pHcations to structural and mechanical systems. 752. SUBMERSIBLE VEHICLE SYSTEMS Prereq: intro vibrations. 4 cr. DESIGN Conceptual and preliminary design of submersible 726. EXPERIMENTAL MECHANICS vehicle systems; submcrsibles, environmental fac- Experimental methods and theoretical bases ap- tors, hydromechanic and structural principles, ma- plied to measurement of stress, strain, and motion. terials, intra/extravehicle systems, operating Transmitted and scattered-light photoelasticity; considerations, predesign and design procedures. strain gauge applications; brittle coating and grid Design projects selected and completed by student techniques; dynamic measurements, and associated teams. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. instrumentation. 4 cr. 757. COASTAL ENGINEERING AND 727. ADVANCED MECHANICS OF PROCESSES SOLIDS Introduction to small amplitude and finite ampli- Beams on elastic foundation, curved bars, inelastic tude wave theories. Wave forecasting by significant behavior, instability, introduction to thin plates wave method and wave spectrum method. Coastal and shells, introduction to elasticity, energy meth- processes and shoreline protection. Wave forces ods, and numerical methods. 4 cr. and wave structure interaction. Introduction to mathematical and physical modeling. Prereq: fluid 730. MECHANICAL BEHAVIOR OF dynamics or permission. 3 cr. MATERIALS Elastic and inelastic behavior of materials in terms 760. PHYSICAL METALLURGY I of micro- and macromechanics. Stress, strain, and Introduction to the electron theory of metals, in- constitutive relations related to recent develop- termetallic compounds, ferromagnetism, disloca- ments in dislocation theory and other phenomena tions, and slip phenomena. 4 cr. on the atomic scale and to the continuum mechanics on the macroscopic scale. Elasticity, plasticity, 761. X-RAY DIFFRACTION viscoelasticity, creep, fracture, and damping. An- Physics of x-ray diffraction, the reciprocal lattice, isotropic and heterogenous materials. 4 cr. lattice parameter determinations, space group identification, phase identification, characterization ot 737. OCEAN MECHANICS I preferred orientation. Lab. 4 cr. Ocean as a continuous medium, its mechanical and thermodynamic properties. Shallow- and deep- 763. MICROSTRUCTURE OF SOLIDS ocean modeling for the investigation of gravity and Basic concepts and measurements; statistically ex- sound waves. Ocean subbottom and its soil me- act expressions for points, lines, surfaces, and vol- chanical and sound propagation properties. Instru- umes; random, partially oriented and oriented mentation, rudimentary data collecting and structures; particle and grain characteristics and dis- processing procedures, and computer usage. tributions; projected images and shape specifica- Prereq: fluid dynamics; mechanics; diff eqns; mul- tion; practical applications. 4 cr. tidim calculus. 4 cr. 766. PHYSICAL CERAMICS 738. OCEAN MECHANICS II Characteristics of crystalline and noncrystalline ce- Ocean dynamical laws generalized to include tem- ramic solids; defect structures; diffusion in ceramic perature and salinity variations in the water col- materials; nucleation and crystal growth, spinodal umn. Conservation laws with generalized equation decomposition, and sohd-state reactions; kinetics of state. Air-sea interaction, energy transport phe- of grain growth; sintering, and vitrification. nomena, reflection from different coastal geome- Prereq: permission. 4 cr. try, harbor resonances, internal currents. Sound reflection from subbottom, sound probing tech- 771. DYNAMIC SYSTEMS MODELING niques to determine subbottom properties by ray Lumped parameter models for mechanical, elec- theory and generalization of subbottom soil from trical, fluid, thermal, and fixed systems. Time-do- an elastic to a viscoelastic medium. Prereq: M E main solutions, frequency-response plots, matrix 737; M E 781 desirable but not required. 4 cr. representations, eigen vectors, and eigenvalues are used to explore system response. Introduction to nonlinear analysis, simulation, computer applications. 3 cr.

87 Mechanical Engineering

781. MATHEMATICAL METHODS IN around airfoils. Schwarz Christoffcl theorem and ENGINEERING SCIENCE I vortex motion. 4 cr. Solution of discrete and continuous systems. Re- view of calculus, linear algebra, complex numbers, 822. CONTINUUM MECHANICS Fourier series, differential and partial differential Conservation laws tor gases, liquids, and solids in equations with examples from acoustics, vibration a continuum are developed starting trom Liouville theory, hydrodynamics, elasticity, solid mechan- and Boltzmann equations. Passage from a discrete ics, transport theory, and particle mechanics. 4 cr. system to a continuum is discussed. Constitutive equations for viscoelastic and thermoelastic fields; 782. CONTROL SYSTEMS and nonlinear gas, liquid, and elastic fields. General Fundamental principles involved in the design and discussion of rheological behavior. Causality con- analysis of feedback control systems. Topics in- ditions for continuum fields. Examples for solids, clude stability criterion, time-domain analysis, fre- liquids, and gases, and biomechanics. Introduction quency-domain analysis, and introduction to to phenomenological Lagrangian theories. 4 cr. nonlinear systems. Lab. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. (Also offered as E E 782.) 824. VIBRATIONS OF CONTINUOUS MEDIA 793A-D-794 A-D. SPECIAL TOPICS IN Classical and numerical methods are employed to ENGINEERING study the vibration of continuous elements and Course numbers refer to topics in structures. Topics considered are axial and tor- A) Thermodynamics; B) Mechanics; C) Engi- sional vibration of rods, transverse vibration of neering Design; and D) Materials, respectively. beams and thin plates, wave propagation, and vi- Content of these courses may vary from year to bration of simple structures. 4 cr. year. 2-4 cr. 826. THEORY OF ELASTICITY 795A-D-796 A-D. INDEPENDENT The analysis of stress and deformation in elastic STUDY solids; conservation laws for elastic media; stress Course numbers refer to topics in A) Thermal Sci- and strain relations by continuous functions; Airy ence; B) Solid Mechanics; C) Engineering Design; stress functions; elastodynamic fields; inhomogen- and D) Materials, respectively. 2-4 cr. ous, anisotropic, wave equations; wave propagation and stress concentration problems; general- 801. IRREVERSIBLE izations to thermoelasticity ana viscoelastic fields. THERMODYNAMICS Complex variable techniques will be used. 4 cr. Nonequilibrium thermodynamics from the viewpoint of fluctuation theory. The Onsager reciprocal 827. THEORY OF PLASTICITY relations. Prereq: M E 701. 4 cr. Analysis of stress and deformation in inelastic solids; general development of stress invariants, var- 803. CONDUCTION HEAT TRANSFER iational principles, constitutive relations, and yield Heat conduction equation temperature fields and and loading functions. Special emphasis on ideal heat flux vector; analytical solution of the conduc- plasticity, strain-hardening, creep, limit analysis, tion equation in several variables; initial and and limit design. 4 cr. boundary value problems; numerical methods of solution. 4 cr. 829. THEORY OF PLATES AND SHELLS Theory of elasticity developed for plates and shells; 804. RADIATION HEAT TRANSFER conservation laws for elastic media; stress and The fundamentals of radiant heat transfer. Devel- strain relations by continuous functions; Airy stress opment and solution of the wave equation for elec- functions; stress and strain relations in curvilinear tromagnetic radiation. Analysis of Planck's law of coordinates; thin and thick plate and shell theories; radiation and earlier theories. Methods of solution vibration of spherical, cylindrical, and conical shells of radiant interchange in real systems with and and plates. 4 cr. without absorbing media. 4 cr. 838. THEORETICAL ACOUSTICS 806. CONVECTION HEAT TRANSFER Fundamentals are presented with emphasis on the- An analytical study of heat transfer to laminar and ory and applications in underwater acoustics and turbulent boundary layers of compressible and in- in the acoustic determination of dynamic material compressible fluids. Basic differential equations properties. Topics include: a review of vibration governing the heat transfer are derived and analyt- theory; derivation of nonlinear acoustic field equa- ical solutions are obtained where possible and tions; linearization; Green's function techniques checked with experimental results. 4 cr. and solution of boundary value problems; scattering, reflection theories of boundary roughness; de- 807. COMPRESSIBLE FLUID FLOW velopment of ray theory (geometric optics) from General equations of motion tor real and ideal com- field equations; and Eikonal approximations. 4 cr. pressible fluid flow including normal and oblique shocks, Prandtl Meyer flow, and methods of so- 842. DISCONTINUOUS CONTROL lutions. Applications to jet propulsion and turbo Analysis and synthesis of feedback control systems machinery. Prereq: M E 707 or 708. 4 cr. operating on quantized information; compensation and performance improvement methods that use 808. THEORETICAL AERO/HYDRO- the quantized nature of the information are also MECHANICS developed. Design methods for pulse-width mod- The mathematical development of the equations of ulation, optimum quantizers and limit cycle behav- frictionless fluid flow, using both tensor notation ior of quantized systems are developed. (Also and various coordinate systems. Conformal map- offered as E E 842.) 4 cr. ping; Blasius theorem; Joukowski hypothesis; flow Microbiology

844. NONLINEAR CONTROL SYSTEMS fine geometry. Coordinate transformations and Analysis and design of nonlinear control systems point transformations. Affmors, tensors, and their from the classical and modern viewpoints are dis- algebraic properties. Invariant differential opera- cussed. Liapunov's stability theory; phase space tors. Lie derivative, holonomic and anholonomic methods; linearization techniques; simulation; fre- coordinate systems. Curvature tensor, Bianchi ?iuency response methods; generalized describing identity, tensor densities. Green's theorem. Green's unctions; transient analysis utilizing functional functions, potential functions, Pfaff's problem. analysis; and decoupling of multivariable systems. 4cr. Prereq: M E 851. (Also offered as E E 844.) 4 cr. 890 A-D, 891 A-D. SPECIAL TOPICS IN 851. ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEMS I ENGINEERING State-space representation of multivariable sys- Course numbers refer to topics in A) Thermo- tems; analysis using state transition matrix. Con- dynamics; B) Mechanics; C) Engineering Design; trollability and observability; pole placement using and D) Materials. Content of these courses may state and output feedback; Luenbergcr observers. vary from year to year. 2-4 cr. Introduction to computer controlled systems (sampling, discrete state representation, hybrid sys- 892. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING tems): nonlinear analysis (Liapunov, Popov, MASTER'S PROJECT describing function). Prereq: E E/M E 782. (Also The student works with a faculty member during offered as E E 851.) 3 cr. one or two semesters on a well-defined research and/or original design problem. A written report 852. ADVANCED CONTROL and seminar are presented. 4 cr. SYSTEMS II Special topics in control theory: continuous and 895 A-D, 896 A-D. GRADUATE discrete systems: optimal control systems, includ- INDEPENDENT STUDY ing calculus of variations, maximum principle, dy- Investigation of graduate-level problems or areas namic programming, Weiner and Kalman filtering germane to mechanical engineering. 4 cr. techniques, stochastic systems, adaptive control systems. Prereq: E E/M E 851. (Also offered as E 899. MASTER'S THESIS E 852) 3 cr. 6-10 cr.

855. ESTIMATION AND FILTERING Stochastic systems course with application to con- Microbiology (Micr) trol and communications. Topics include random variables, noise in linear systems, Bayesian and Chairperson: Robert M. Zsigray minimum variance estimation theory, optimal state estimators, Weiner and Kalman filters, combined PROFESSORS: William R. Chesbro; Galen E. estimation and control, prediction, parameter iden- Jones tification, and nonlinear filtering. Prereq: M E/E ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Richard P. equivalent. offered E 851, Math 735 or (Also as E Blakemore; Thomas G. Pistole; Robert M. E 855). 3 cr. Zsigray ASSISTANT PROFESSOR: Florence E. Farber 861. PHYSICAL METALLURGY II GRADUATE PROGRAM COORDINATOR: solutions mixtures, Thermodynamics of solid and Richard P. Blakemore kinetics of selected solid state reactions including precipitation and recrystallization, martensite Students admitted to graduate study in micro- transformations. 4 cr. biology are expected to have had adequate preparation in the biological and physical sciences and 865. CONDUCTION PROPERTIES IN in the basic courses in microbiology. SOLIDS The candidate for the Master of Science degree Topics in metal and semiconductor physics. Quan- will be required to complete a thesis. Candidates theory, electron energy states, scattering pro- tum for the Doctor of Philosophy degree must teach at cesses, conduction, band theory, electron and hole least one semester, or have had equivalent experi- and the P-N junction. 4 cr. ence; must demonstrate to the doctoral committee a broad, basic knowledge of the field of microbi- 882. MATHEMATICAL METHODS IN ology; and must complete a dissertation embody- II ENGINEERING SCIENCE ing tne results of original research in microbiology. Continuation variable of M E 781. Complex tech- Departmental research activities emphasize bac- niques, integral transform techniques for the so- terial host-parasite interactions, immunology, lution of differential partial differential and analysis of microbial structures, bacterial and bac- equations. Green's functions. Weiner-Hopf tech- teriophage genetics, virology, cell culture phenom- niques, variational techniques, stochastic problems ena, public health aspects of microbiology and with application to vibration, statistical random virology, bacterial physiology, and marine and soil control theory, turbulence, heat conduction and microbiology. fluctuation phenomena in solids, transport theory, gases, and liquids. to Topics may vary from year 701. TAXONOMY AND ECOLOGY year. Prereq: 781. cr. M E 4 Isolation, identification, and classification of prokaryotic microorganisms by classical and newer 883. TENSOR ANALYSIS AND techniques; analysis ot the interplay between or- DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY ganisms and environment based on energy metab- Mathematical groundwork for applied the- group olism and use of this to deduce a natural ory, transformation groups, affine af- groups and classification; uses of taxonomic and ecological information. Prereq: gen micr; gen bchm. Lab. 4 cr.

89 Mkrobiology

702. PATHOGENIC MICROBIOLOGY 793. PROBLEMS IN MICROBIAL Morphological, cultural, biochemical, serological, CYTOLOGY and pathogenic characteristics of microorganisms A) Research with Electron Microscopy; B) Teach- causing human and animal diseases. Prereq: gen ing Practices in Electron Microscopy. Students micr. Lab. 4 cr. may select sections for advanced study. May include reading, laboratory work, organized semi- 705. IMMUNOLOGY AND SEROLOGY nars, and conferences. Other sections may be Examination of the immune response in verte- offered in some semesters; consult with department brates. Characterization of the major components office for future semester offerings. Prereq: per- of the immune system; study of host-defense mission. 1-4 cr. mechanisms and immunopathology; use of serological techniques for identification and diagnosis. 795, 796. PROBLEMS IN Prereq: Micr 702; permission. Lab. 4 cr. MICROBIOLOGY Prereq: permission. 1-8 cr. 706. VIROLOGY Principles of animal, and in selected instances, plant 802. MICROBIAL PHYSIOLOGY and bacterial virology in relation to infection and Means by which microorganisms survive: nutri- disease. Emphasis on the molecular biology of vi- tional, chemical, physical factors; metabolism and ruses, viral replication, isolation, propagation, as- its regulation; generation of cell ultrastructure; eco- say, pathogenesis, diagnosis, epidemiology and logical interactions. Prereq: gen micr; gen bchm. control. Virus-host interactions, especially the role Lao. (Not offered every year.) 2 or 4 cr. of viruses in malignant transformation. Prereq: Micr 702; permission. Lab. 4 cr. 804. MICROBIAL GENETICS Expression, regulation, recombination and trans- 707. MARINE MICROBIOLOGY mission of genetic information in prokaryotic and Characterization of microorganisms in the sea in- eukaryotic microorganisms. Consideration ot cluding taxonomy, physiology, and ecology; sam- chromosomal and extrachromosomal inheritance. pling, enumeration, distribution; and effects of Prereq: gen micr; permission. Lab. 4 cr. (Not of- marine environment upon microbial populations. fered every year.) Prereq: gen micr; organic chemistry. Lab. 4 cr. 806. ADVANCED IMMUNOLOGY 708. MICROBIAL BIOGEOCHEMISTRY Basic concepts in immunology including immuno- Geochemical processes influenced by biochemical recognition, effector systems, immunogenetics, processes catalyzed by marine and terrestrial mi- immunopathology, and comparative immunology. croorganisms; transformations ot carbon, nitrogen, Prereq: gen Immunol; gen bchm; permission. Lab. and other elements. Petroleum microbiology, nat- 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) ural gas production, sulfur formation, ferro-man- ganese nodules, corrosion, and fossil micro- 851. CELL CULTURE organisms. Prereq: gen micr; organic chemistry. Theory, principles fundamental to culture of cells Lab. 4 cr. in vitro. Introduction to techniques of preparation and maintenance of animal, plant, insect, fish cell 710. MICROBIAL CYTOLOGY AND cultures. Application of cell culture to contempo- ULTRASTRUCTURE rary research in biological sciences. Prereq: gen Ultrastructure and function in prokaryotic cells; micr; permission. Lab. (Also offered as AnSc 851.) discussion of flagella, pill, walls, membranes, cy- 4 cr. toplasmic inclusions, cell division, sporulation, and germination. Cytological features of structurally 893. ADVANCED PROBLEMS AND unique bacteria. Prereq: gen micr. 3 cr. TECHNIQUES IN MICROBIAL CYTOLOGY 711. TRANSMISSION ELECTRON A) Research with Electron Microscopy; B) Sem- MICROSCOPY inar in Microbial Cytology; C) Recent Develop- Electron microscopic techniques for the study of ments in Electron Microscopy; D) Scanning microbial cytology: theory and use of the trans- Electron Microscopy; E) Freeze-Etching; F) En- mission electron microscope; sample preparation ergy-dispersive X-ray Analysis; G) Photo- methods, photomicrography, and photographic graphic Techniques for Cytology; H) Electron darkroom techniques; interpretation of electron Microscope Maintenance. Course sections for ad- micrographs. Prereq: gen micr; Micr 710; permis- vanced work, individual or group seminar. May sion. Lab. 4 cr. include reading, laboratory work, organized seminars, and conferences. Most sections not offered 712. SOIL MICROBIOLOGY every year; consult with department office for fu- Microbial ecology of the soil environment; char- ture semester listings. Prereq: gen micr; electron acteristics of major microbial groups in soil; factors microscopy; permission. 1-8 cr. affecting activity of soil microorganisms; their effects on the environment; and biological interac- 897, 898. MICROBIOLOGY SEMINAR tions which involve them. Prereq: gen micr. Lab. Reports, discussion, microbiological literature, and 4 cr. current developments in microbiology. Prereq;

permission. 1 cr.

899. MASTER'S THESIS 6-10 cr.

999. DOCTORAL RESEARCH

90 Music

Music (Musi) is required to a minimum of 4 credits. A maximum of 9 credits is allowed if the graduate recital option Chairperson: Cleveland L. Howard is elected. Sufficient electives must be taken to total 30 credits. PROFESSORS: Keith Polk; John D. Wicks Admission to this program depends upon a ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Ruth S. Edwards; bachelor's degree in music education or its equiv- Stanley D. Hettinger; Cleveland L. Howard; alent from an accredited institution. A performance Mary H. Rasmussen; John E. Rogers; W. Niel audition and a placement examination in theory,

Sir; Paul F. Verrette; Henry J. Wing, Jr. music history, and aural identification are normally required of all applicants and are taken in the se- The Department of Music offers programs lead- mester preceding entrance into the graduate pro- ing to the degrees of Master of Arts in music and gram. Students not meeting standards in the Master of Science in music education. placement examinations will not be officially admitted to the Graduate School until such exami- Master of Arts in Music nations are passed to the department's satisfaction.

The degree of Master of Arts in music, while designed basically for students interested in broad- History and Literature ening their knowledge of the history of music in all of its dimensions, has proven consistently val- 701. MUSIC OF THE MEDIEVAL uable to students who wish to augment strong PERIOD backgrounds in performance and/or education with Nature of the beginnings of polyphony. The more specialized studies in theory, literature, and preeminent influence of the church in the 13th cen- performance-practice. The following courses (or tury and the rising secular movement in the 14th. their approved equivalents) are required: Musi 855, Music as a dominant force in the political and social 856, 857, 858, 891, and 893 or 894. Courses at the life of the Middle Ages. 4 cr. 700 level in music, or the 600, 700, and 800 level in other departments, may be elected with the ap- 703. MUSIC OF THE RENAISSANCE proval of the student's adviser. It is recommended Works of the 15th- and 16th-century composers that more than two semesters be allowed for com- from Dunstable to Palestrina. 4 cr. pletion of the degree. The cultural advantages ot the city of Boston, 90 minutes away, are a valuable 705. MUSIC OF THE BAROQUE adjunct to the program. Music of Europe from de Rore to Bach. 4 cr. A B.A. degree m music or its equivalent from an accredited institution is required for admission 707. MUSIC OF THE CLASSICAL to this program. A performance audition and a PERIOD placement examination in theory, music history, Growth of musical styles and forms from early and aural identification are normally required ot all classicism through the high classicism of Haydn, applicants and are taken in the semester preceding Mozart, and the young Beethoven. 4 cr. entrance into the graduate program. Students not meeting standards in the placement examinations 709. MUSIC OF THE ROMANTIC will not be officially admitted to the Graduate PERIOD School until such examinations are passed to the A survey of Romanticism in music from Bee- satisfaction of the department. A reading knowl- thoven's late period to the end of the 19th century. edge of both German and French is strongly rec- The works of Schubert, Berlioz, Schumann, Men- ommended before entering the program; a German delssohn, Chopin, Wagner, Verdi, Brahms, Aus- reading examination will be administered by the trian symphonists, French pre-impressionists, and department. On recommendation of the graduate national styles in European music. 4 cr. adviser, this requirement may be waived for students who do not plan further study beyond the 711. MUSIC OF THE 20TH CENTURY M.A. degree. Completion of the program requires Styles and techniques of composers from Debussy an oral exam and a written essay of substantive to the present. Special emphasis on tonal music nature on a topic of the candidate's special interest. before World War I; neoclassical trends; the emergence of atonality and serial techniques; antiration- Master of Science in Music Education alist music; electronic music. 4 cr.

The goal of the Master of Science in music ed- 721. THE LIFE AND WORKS OF ucation degree is to develop a broad knowledge at BEETHOVEN the graduate level in the fields of music education, Detailed study of Beethoven, his times, and his art performance, history, theory, and independent as exemplified by his symphonies, piano music, study. Each candidate will be required to complete chamber music, sacred music, and works for the one of the following: a professional paper; a field stage. 4 cr. study in music education; a satisfactory recital ap- pearance; a major composition, orchestration, or 732. THE ART SONG band arrangement; or the preparation and con- History and literature of the solo song with piano ducting of a major work in public performance for accompaniment. Survey of national styles of the band, orchestra, or chorus. The following courses 19th and 20th centuries and deeper study of the are required: Musi 855, 893 or 894; MuEd 796, 883 central core of the art song—the German Lied. or 884. Also required are two courses in the De- 4 cr. partment of Education from courses such as the Following: Educ 820, 827, 841, 853, 858, 861, 865, 733. SURVEY OF OPERA 883, 884, 886, and in special cases, 700, 701, and History of the genre from Monteverdi to the pres- 705. Vocal or instrumental study at the 800 level ent. Representative masterpieces by Handel, Moz-

91 Music

art, Beethoven, Weber, Wagner, Verdi, Mus- 773. ADVANCED COUNTERPOINT sorgsky, Debussy, Berg, and others. 4 cr. Continuation of Musi 772. Prereq: Musi 772 or permission. 2 cr. 735. SURVEY OF PIANO LITERATURE Keyboard hterature from the baroque to the pres- 775-776. COMPOSITION ent. Analysis, discussion, and illustration of works Construction of phrases, periods, and short com- by Bach, Haydn, Mozart, Beethoven, the romantic positions following classical models. Problems of composers, and contemporary writers. 4 cr. text-setting. Prereq: music theory II or permission. 3cr. 795. SPECIAL STUDIES IN MUSIC and 777. COMPOSITION A) J. S. Bach; B) Franz Schubert; C) Debussy ADVANCED Ravel; D) The World of Jazz; E) The Iconography Continuation of Musi 776. Individual composi- of Western-European Musical Instruments; tional projects. Prereq: Musi 776 and permission. F) 19th-century French Music; G) Advanced May be repeated for credit. 3 cr. Analysis; H) Advanced Study in Electronic Music;

I) Composition through Computer-generated 779. ORCHESTRATION Brass Litera- Characteristics of band and orchestral instruments Sound; J) Woodwind Literature; K) ture; L) String Literature; M) Medieval Perfor- both individually and in small (homogeneous) and mance Practice; N) Renaissance Performance large (mixed) groupings. Students study scores, Practice; O) Baroque Performance Practice; write arrangements, and have arrangements per- P) Classical Performance Practice; Q) 19th-cen- formed if at all possible. Some aspects of vocal tury Performance Practice; R) 20th-century Per- writing. Prereq: music theory II or permission. formance Practice; S) Woodwind Repair; T) String 4 cr. Repair; U) Advanced Jazz Improvisation; V) Advanced Piano Pedagogy; W) Advanced Ac- 781. FORM AND ANALYSIS companying; X) Advanced Conducting; Y) Inde- Formal and textural elements; concepts and ex- pencfent Study. Prereq: permission. May be amples. Thorough analysis of smaller and larger repeated for credit with permission. 1-4 cr. masterworks from the standpoint of harmony, counterpoint, structural line, and formal articula- 855. INTRODUCTION TO tion. Prereq: music theory II or permission. 4 cr. BIBLIOGRAPHY An intensive survey of basic reference works, mu- 785. ELECTRONIC SOUND SYNTHESIS sic periodicals, collected editions, series, treatises, Part I: "traditional" or "analog" electronic sound books on musical instruments and performance synthesis; work with the Buchia Synthesizer in the practice, and the important monographs on major electronic music studio. Part II: 1) elementary pro- composers from Machaut to Schoenberg. A read- gramming in FORTRAN; 2) the logic of computer ing knowledge of German and French is very use- sound syntheses; and 3) programming in MUSIC ful 3 cr. 4BF. Students will have the opportunity to run programs on a DEC KLIO computer equipped 856. READINGS IN MUSIC HISTORY: with 4-channel digital-to-analog and analog-to- ANTIQUITY TO 1600 digital converters. Part III: completion of a major An opportunity to read and study in detail a re- independent study project in electronic music. stricted number ot monographs and editions. 3 cr. Prereq: permission. 4 cr.

857. READINGS IN MUSIC HISTORY: 795. SPECIAL STUDIES IN MUSIC 1600-1820 Refer to History and Literature section. An opportunity to read and study in detail a re- strictea number of monographs and editions. 3 cr. 893. THEORY SEMINAR Through reading, analysis, and composition, the 858. READINGS IN MUSIC HISTORY: student is acquainted with music theory from the 1820 TO THE PRESENT Middle Ages to Monteverdi. Prereq: permission. An opportunity to read and study in detail a re- 3cr. stricted number of monographs and editions. 3 cr. 894. THEORY SEMINAR 891, 892. RESEARCH SEMINAR Theory and practice from the Baroque to contem- Guidance in individual research projects. Prereq: porary music. Performance practice in the Baroque permission. Variable cr. and later periods. Score analysis. Prereq: permission. 3 cr. 895. INDEPENDENT STUDY IN THE HISTORY AND THEORY OF MUSIC 895. INDEPENDENT STUDY IN THE Opportunity for especially qualified students to in- HISTORY AND THEORY OF MUSIC vestigate, with guidance, specific areas of their Refer to History and Literature section. scholarly concern. Prereq: permission. 1-4 cr. Performance Theory and Composition 795. SPECIAL STUDIES IN MUSIC 771-772. COUNTERPOINT Refer to History and Literature section. Contrapuntal techniques of tonal music. Melodic construction and dissonance treatment through 841-851. APPLIED MUSIC FOR work in species counterpoint and studies in har- GRADUATE CREDIT monic elaboration and prolongation. Analysis of The following courses offer further development selected compositions emphasizes the connection of technique, music interpretation, and repertory between fundamental contrapuntal techniques and on the various instruments. Emphasis may also be the voice-leading of composition. Prereq: music

theory II or permission. 2 cr. 92 Music Education

directed toward the functional use of the instru- 747-748. TECHNIQUES AND METHODS ment in the school room. Private lessons are based IN WOODWIND INSTRUMENTS on a half-hour of individual instruction per week. Basic fundamentals of performance, class instruc- One semester-hour credit may be earned with one tion, associated acoustical problems, and study of lesson per week; 2 or 4 semester hours of credit woodwind literature. First semester: clarinet, flute, may be earned with two lessons per week. Five and saxophone. Second semester: double-reed in- one-hour practice periods are expected for each struments. 2 cr. credit of private study. The special fee for a one- half hour lesson per week is $35 per semester in 749. TECHNIQUES AND METHODS IN addition to normal tuition charges. The fee includes BRASS INSTRUMENTS the use of a practice room for the required preper- Basic course in embouchure formation, tone, ation. Prereq: student must exhibit sufficient pro- tonguing, fingering, flexibility, accuracy, and ficiency to warrant graduate study and must nave range development as applied to the trumpet or permission of the department chairperson and the baritone horn, French horn, and trombone; meth- student's graduate adviser. Audition required. A ods, studies, solos, and ensembles most likely to student may register for credit in the same courses be useful with grade school, junior high school, in successive semesters with the approval of the and high school players of brass instruments. 2 cr. major adviser. Music staff 1, 2 or 4 cr. 751. TECHNIQUES AND METHODS IN 841. GRADUATE VOICE PERCUSSION INSTRUMENTS Basic performance skills on snare drum, timpani, 842. GRADUATE PIANO mallet instruments, and other percussion instruments used in bands and orchestras. Materials and 843. GRADUATE HARPSICHORD methods of instruction. 2 cr.

844. GRADUATE ORGAN 785. MUSIC FOR THE ELEMENTARY CLASSROOM TEACHER 845. GRADUATE VIOLIN, VIOLA Designed for the nonspecialist. Correlation and integration of music in the school curriculum, and 846. GRADUATE VIOLONCELLO, basic skills and techniques necessary. 4 cr. STRING BASS 787-788. THE TEACHING OF 847. GRADUATE WOODWIND ELEMENTARY AND MIDDLE SCHOOL MUSIC 848. GRADUATE BRASS Aims, scope, and organization of materials and activities in elementary and middle schools. Mod- 849. GRADUATE PERCUSSION ern trends in educational philosophy; development of the child's voice; demonstration of materials and 850. GRADUATE HARP methods for the various grades. Observation and teaching in schools. 2 cr. 851. GRADUATE EARLY WIND INSTRUMENTS 791-792. THE TEACHING OF SECONDARY SCHOOL MUSIC Educational principles applied to music teaching Music Education (MuEd) and learning; curriculum organization for junior and senior nigh school. Adolescent voice, voice 741-742. TECHNIQUES AND METHODS classification, selection of vocal and instrumental IN CHORAL MUSIC materials, and building unified concert programs. Problems in the organization and performance ot Problems of administration; management; relation- high school, college, and community choruses. ship of the teacher to school and community. Ob- Techniques of choral conducting and rehearsal, servation of secondary school music programs. repertory, and materials. 2 cr. 2cr.

743. MATERIALS AND METHODS IN 795. SPECIAL STUDIES IN MUSIC PIANO MUSIC EDUCATION Gives potential piano teachers a coherent but flex- Allows upper-level students to explore individually ible approach to the instruction of students of dif- or in groups areas related to their specific profes- ferent ages and levels of talent through evaluation sional interests. Prereq: permission. 1-4 cr. of methods and materials and discussion of the role of the private teacher. 2 cr. 796. ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF SCHOOL MUSIC 745-746. TECHNIQUES AND METHODS GROUPS IN STRING INSTRUMENTS Problems of organizing and administering school Class and individual instruction. Four-hour prac- orchestras, bands, glee clubs, choruses, and small tice per week required. Intensive training on the ensembles; objectives, motivation, schedule, dis- violin, viola, cello, and double bass enables partic- cipline, equipment, programs, finances, rehearsal ipants to perform in string ensembles. Classroom techniques, contests and festivals, materials, per- procedures, establishment of string programs, and sonnel selection, and grades. 4 cr. evaluation of available methods materials. 2 cr. 883. INSTRUMENTAL LITERATURE AND ITS PERFORMANCE Exploration of representative solo and ensemble music for string, wind, and percussion instru-

93 Occupational Education

merits. Typical literature from each period of music programs; development of strategies of program is studied. As much as is possible, live performance planning, instruction, evaluation, and supervision. IS mcluded; recordmgs are used as required. De- 4 cr. tailed attention given to interpretation. Project required. 3 cr. 784. THE COMMUNITY-JUNIOR AND VOCATIONAL-TECHNICAL COLLEGES 884. CHORAL LITERATURE AND ITS Rise and development of community-junior col- PERFORMANCE leges and two-year vocational-technical colleges in Analysis, discussion, and conducting of excerpts American education; their history, potential, phi- from choral masterpieces from all major periods losophy, and functions. 4 cr. and styles. Students will have the opportunity to act as assistant conductors for some of the choral 785. ADVANCED METHODS AND organizations on campus. Evaluation of current MATERIALS OF INSTRUCTION high school and college repertoires. 3 cr. Organization and delivery of performance-based instruction. Provides opportunities for exploration 895. SPECIAL PROJECTS IN MUSIC in instructional planning, execution, evaluation, EDUCATION management, and guidance. Open to teachers of Independent study, investigation, or research in vocational-technical education and others by per- music education. Creative projects may be in- mission. Required of master's degree candidates. cluded. Prereq: permission. 1-4 cr. 4cr.

786. CONCEPTS OF OCCUPATIONAL Occupational Education EDUCATION Development of vocational-technical education in (OcEd) the U.S.; socio-economic influences responsible for its establishment. Federal and state requirements Chairperson: William H. Annis for secondary and post-secondary schools. Coor- dination of programs with general education and PROFESSORS: William H. Annis; Maynard C. other vocational fields. Required of master's degree Heckel candidates. 4 cr. ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR: Lewis Roberts, Jr. ASSISTANT PROFESSOR: Gregory D. Gill 787. ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION OF VOCATIONAL The Master of Occupational Education degree EDUCATION is designed for teachers and administrators of oc- Students identify and develop competencies re- cupational education, county Cooperative Exten- quired of vocational administrators, using a voca- sion Service personnel, and others m adult tional administrator task analysis, which includes education. Applicants must submit scores achieved fair hiring and firing practices, staff development, on either the Graduate Record Examination, apti- long-range planning, federal administration for vo- tude section, or the Miller Analogies Test. All stu- cational programs, and evaluation of program ef- dents are required to complete Occupational fectiveness. Philosophy of, and federal regulations Education 785 and 786. The remainder of the 30 + governing, vocational education. 4 cr. credits required to complete the degree program will be selected m consultation with the student 791. PLANNING FOR TEACHING and advisers according to the student's career plans, Organization of materials of instruction to meet needs and goals. Students may elect the thesis plan. group and individual needs. Techniques of instruc- Candidates completing a thesis will be required to tion, planning for teaching, function of consulting complete an oral examination. Students following committees, working with youth groups, program the nonthesis plan will be required to complete evaluation. Course scheduled concurrently with written and oral examinations plus a professional Educ 694. Prereq: microteaching. 4 cr. paper. For further information, contact Chairper- son William H. Annis. 796. INVESTIGATIONS IN OCCUPATIONAL EDUCATION 700. WORKSHOPS IN OCCUPATIONAL A) Career Education; B) Secondary Education; EDUCATION C) Post-Secondary Education; D) Adult Educa- Modularized instruction for in-service education of tion; E) Extension Education; F) Exemplary Pro- teachers of vocational education and others in oc- grams; G) Cooperative Education Programs; cupational education. May be repeated up to 8 H) Disadvantaged and Handicapped Education credits. 1-2 cr. Programs. Student-selected problems in one of the areas listed. Elective after consultation with the 750. SHOP ORGANIZATION AND instructor. Hours to be arranged. May be repeated. CONTROL METHODS 2-4 cr. Purposes: 1) to examine all facilities of vocational programs in New Hampshire to insure safety, 798. OCCUPATIONAL EDUCATION quality instruction, and adequate usage of space; SEMINAR 2) to examine the role of the vocational instruction Discussion of current issues, problems, and re- relating to liability, maintenance of equipment, search and development in OcEd. Students, fac- planning for improvements in facilities, and plan- ulty, and other personnel serve as discussion ning for new facilities. 4 cr. leaders. Required of OcEd majors, and graduate students. 0-2 cr. (Fall semester only.) 783. CONDUCTING AND SUPERVISING ADULT EDUCATION PROGRAMS Analysis of formal and informal adult education

94 Physical Education

804. PROGRAM PLANNING IN Physical Education (PhEd) OCCUPATIONAL EDUCATION A systematic approach to the development of Chairperson: D. Allan Waterfield course materials for occupational education. Topics included are: occupational analysis, establishing ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Katherine performance objectives, selection of content, de- Amsden; Gavin H. Carter; Phyllis A. Hoff; velopment of supplemental material, and evalua- Robert Kertzer; D. Allan Waterfield; Robert E. tion. Prereq: a course m teaching methods or Wear; Walter E. Weiland permission. 4 cr. ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: Lori A. Alexander; D. Michael McKeough 805. THE DEVELOPMENT OF GRADUATE PROGRAM COORDINATOR: COOPERATIVE EDUCATION Katherine Amsden PROGRAMS IN OCCUPATIONAL EDUCATION The Department of Physical Education offers a Topics included are: relationship with community; graduate program leading to the Master of Science student selection and development of individual degree in Physical Education, with the following programs; the supervision and evaluation of these areas of concentration: exercise specialist, motor programs. 4 cr. behavior, and teaching/coaching. Admission is based on undergraduate preparation, academic rec- 806. DEVELOPING VOCATIONAL ord, Graduate Record Examination aptitude test PROGRAMS FOR SPECIAL NEEDS scores, and letters of recommendation. Applicants LEARNERS must be above-average students and show adequate Designed for teachers and administrators in voca- preparation in the basic support courses of the em- tional education who are working with or prepar- phasis area of intended study. Applicants who have ing to work with disadvantaged an/or handicapped not met specific course prerequisites should expect individuals. Focus on issues associated with plan- .to take additional undergraduate work without re- ning, developing, implementing, and evaluating ceiving graduate credit. vocational programs for special needs learners. Students may satisfy program requirements 4 cr. through the thesis or nonthesis program plans. All degree candidates will be required to take PhEd 807. ORGANIZATION AND 801, one of the following statistics courses (INER SUPERVISION OF YOUTH 701. Math 636, Psyc 601, or Soc 602), and two ORGANIZATIONS courses from the selected area of concentration. The purposes and organization of youth organi- Concentration courses: exercise specialist (PhEd zations, establishing the local organization, plan- 720, 731, 732, 895); motor behavior (PhEd 740, ning and developing a program of work, ways and 775, 780, 850); teaching/coaching (PhEd 730, 731, means of improving the local organization, and 750, 780). All remaining course work may be taken methods of evaluation. 4 cr. within the Department of Physical Education; however, approval may be granted to take relevant 809. COMMUNITY ORGANIZATION courses outside the department. AND PUBLIC RELATIONS Thesis Plan: A minimum of 30 approved grad- The composition, purposes, and objectives of the uate credits including a thesis (24 graduate course various social and economic organizations operat- credits plus 6 thesis credits) is required in the thesis ing in local communities. The importance ot their plan, plus an oral defense of the thesis. membership to the general welfare of the area and Nonthesis Plan: A minimum of 32 approved the development of a public relations program. graduate credits is required in the nonthesis plan. 4 cr. Four credits of PhEd 895 (Advanced Studies) are required. A student may take PhEd 895 only after 811. INTERNSHIP IN OCCUPATIONAL completing at least three approved graduate EDUCATION courses, including PhEd 801. Internship in a field of occupational education ei- The program is sufficiently flexible to meet ther in methodology of teaching or technical sub- professional interests and special abilities. With the ject matter. Students may elect internship only after nelp of the graduate adviser in physical education, completing the qualifying examinations for the the student's program will be individually planned. master's degree, with permission of their major adviser. May be repeated up to 8 cr. 0-8 cr. 702. ADVANCED ATHLETIC TRAINING Assessment, rehabilitative treatment, preventive 812. INTRODUCTION TO RESEARCH strapping, and protective equipment used in ath- The course is designed to develop a knowledge and letic training. Administration of a training room understanding that will contribute to the effective facility. Prereq: basic athl train. Lab. 4 cr. use of research in teaching and administering occupational education. The research process will be 703. LABORATORY PRACTICE IN examined in terms of selection and formulation of ATHLETIC TRAINING research problems, design, techniques of data col- 150 hours of experience in UNH athletic training lection, analysis, and interrelation of data and re- room under N.A.T.A. certified trainer. Prereq: porting. 4 cr. basic athl train. (Only two credits may be applied toward master's degree requirement.) 2 cr. 895. INDEPENDENT STUDY IN OCCUPATIONAL EDUCATION 710. UNDERWATER RESEARCH Individual study problems in various phases of oc- METHODS cupational education. Prereq: permission. May be Lecture, open water, and pool instruction in un- repeated. 2-6 cr. derwater research techniques and hyperbaric physiology lab. Prereq: basic certification and per- 899. MASTER'S THESIS mission. Fee. 4 cr. 6-10 cr. 95 Physics

720. INTERPRETATION AND 801. ANALYSIS OF PROFESSIONAL ASSESSMENT OF PHYSICAL FITNESS LITERATURE Planning and implementation of programs of con- Critical interpretation of professional literature. ditioning and fitness in the general program of 4 cr. education in the school. Personal fitness; components of physical fitness and conditioning; current 841. SOCIAL DIMENSIONS OF SPORT tests; rehabilitation of individuals of all ages, par- Sport viewed from a social-cultural, action-system ticularly in college and adult programs. Prereq: frame of reference and studied on the level of cul- physiol of exercise or equivalent. 4 cr. tural values and their related social structures. Prereq: intro soc or equivalent. 4 cr. 730. CURRICULUM PLANNING IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 850. SEMINAR IN MOTOR LEARNING Criteria and factors involved in planning and con- Theoretical models of skill acquisition, motor skill struction of school programs. 4 cr. taxonomies, and current issues in motor-learning research. Prereq: PhEd 775 or equivalent. 4 cr. 731. CONDITIONING FOR MAXIMUM PERFORMANCE 895. ADVANCED STUDIES Anatomical and physiological factors related to Independent study problems. Prereq: permission maximum physical performance. Evaluation of of graduate adviser. May be repeated up to 8 cr. present programs of training. Prereq: physiology 2-4 cr. of exercise or equivalent. 4 cr. 899. MASTER'S THESIS 732. ELECTROCARDIOGRAPHY AND 6cr. GRADED EXERCISE TESTING Introduction to the electrocardiogram, with specific application to graded exercise testing. Re- Physics (Phys) quired for exercise specialist: two hours of lecture, two hours of lab. Prereq: exercise laboratory tech- Chairperson: Roger L. Arnoldy niques. 3 cr.

PROFESSORS: Roger L. Arnoldy; L. Christian 740. PERCEPTUAL MOTOR DYSFUNCTION Balling; Edward L. Chupp; John F. Dawson; Lennard A. Fisk, Jr.; Jocnen Heisenberg; Theoretical rationale and clinical perceptual-motor Robert E. Houston, Jr.; Richard L. Kaufmann; training programs of Ayres, Kephart, Cratty, Robert H. Lambert; John A. Lockwood; Barsch, and Getman, as they relate to sensory-mo- Lyman Mower; John E. Mulhern, Jr.; Harvey tor integration and the remediation of learning dis- K. Shepard; William R. Webber; John J. abilities. Prereq: PhEd 775, or permission. 4 cr. Wright ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Barry 750. J. ANALYZING TEACHING IN Harrington; Robert E. Simpson PHYSICAL EDUCATION RESEARCH ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: John Examination ot teaching practices, theories, and R. Calarco; Joseph V. Hollweg research implications. Varied approaches to the GRADUATE PROGRAM COORDINATOR; study and improvement teaching, including of Richard L. Kaufmann analysis of films and tapes. Prereq: theory of teach phys in sec school, ed theory of teach phys ed in The physics department offers courses leading to elem school, or permission. cr. 4 three graduate degrees: Master of Science for Teachers; Master ot Science and Doctor of Philos- 775. PERCEPTUAL MOTOR LEARNING ophy in physics. Graduate students entering the Variables affecting the learning and performance of Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy pro- skilled activity; ability and motivational character- grams are expected to demonstrate a proficiency in istics of the learner; processes skill for acquisition. undergraduate work equivalent to that in the senior Prereq: intro to psycn. Lab. 4 cr. year at the University of New Hampshire.

780. PSYCHOLOGICAL FACTORS IN SPORT Master of Science for Teachers Factors of outstanding athletic achievement; psy- The degree of Master of Science for Teachers is chological variables in competition; the actions and offered for candidates who satisfy the general ad- interactions of sport, spectator, and athlete. Prereq: mission requirements (see page 12) or who hold intro to /or 775. cr. psych; PhEd 4 secondary school teacher certification in physics or in general physical science. The courses leading to 791. HISTORY OF PHYSICAL this degree will normally be chosen so as to im- EDUCATION prove candidates' ability to teach physics or general From ancient Egypt to times. Influences modern physical science at the secondary school level. of Greece, the Renaissance Rome, and Reformation These courses should total at least 30 semester periods, and modern European nationalism. Anal- hours and should be chosen in consultation with ysis of events the beliefs of in and leaders the de- the graduate adviser in physics. velopment of systems of physical education. 4 cr. M.S.T. students are not required to take the qualifying examination. Teaching experience is re- 795. SPECIAL TOPICS quired for this degree. Persons interested in this New or specialized courses not normally covered degree should confer with the graduate adviser. in regular course offerings. Prereq: permission. May be repeated up to 8 cr. 2-4 cr.

96 Physics

Master Science Degree 710. INTRODUCTION TO MODERN of COSMOLOGY For admission to graduate study leading to a Review of the sun, stars, Milky Way, external gal- Master of Science degree, students should: have axies, and expansion of the universe. Recent dis- completed 24 to 30 semester hours in physics, or coveries of radio galaxies, quasi-stellar objects, physics and closely allied fields. The courses re- cosmic black-body radiation, X-rays, and gamma quired for the Master of Science in physics degree rays precede a discussion of Newtonian and general include Phys 831, 833 (or 834), 839, 841, and 843. relativistic cosmological models, steady-state/big- Candidates may select one of the following plans: bang theories, and matter-antimatter models.

1) Complete 30 semester hours of courses chosen Prereq: phys mechanics; diff eqns; /or permission. in consultation with the graduate adviser. 4 cr. 2) Complete 24 semester hours of courses chosen in consultation with the graduate adviser, complete 713, 714. SPECIAL TOPICS I AND II a thesis representing the equivalent of six semester Any selected topics not covered sufficiently in a hours' work, and pass an oral examination on the general course may be studied. 4 cr. thesis. 718. INTRODUCTION TO SOLID STATE Doctor of Philosophy Degree PHYSICS Theory underlying the behavior of solids. Trans- For admission to graduate study leading to a port tneory and the interaction of radiation and Doctor of Philosophy degree, students should sat- matter. Operation of semiconducting and super- isfy the same general requirements as for a Master conducting devices and lasers. Prereq: physical of Science degree. Admission to candidacy for the mechanics, intro quantum mechanics; diff eqns, degree is primarily based upon demonstrated abil- multidim calculus. 4 cr. (Offered with sufficient ity in formal coursework; experience in teaching, demand.) equivalent to at least half-time for one year; and passing a written qualifying examination. This ex- 795, 796. INDEPENDENT STUDY amination is normally taken during the second Individual project under direction of a faculty ad- year. Exceptions to the timing are possible only by viser. Prereq: department permission. 1-8 cr. petition. Students are allowed a total of two attempts to achieve candidacy. Finally, upon com- 831-832. MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS pletion of a thesis, doctoral candidates will take an Complex variables, differential equations, asymp- oral examination based upon the area of their re- totic methods, integral transform, special func- search. tions, linear vector spaces and matrices. Green's The courses required for a Doctor of Philosophy functions, and additional topics selected from in- degree in physics are: 1) 831-832, 833 (or 834), 835, tegral equations, variational methods, numerical 839, 841-842, 843-844; and 2) any additional five methods, tensor analysis and group theory. 3 cr. full courses at the 800 level, excluding 889, 890, 897, 898, 899, and 999. (For students doing Ph.D. 833, 834. EXPERIMENTAL PHYSICS I research in astrophysics or space physics, one of AND II these five courses must be 850 or 852.) Modern research techniques, including discussion and laboratory exercises in electromagnetism, nu- Interdisciplinary Research clear, and atomic phenomena. Prereq: passing an electronics proficiency test or basic experimental

The department encourages research in areas re- physics I. 3 cr. lated to physics or applied physics. Should students desire to do researcn in a field related to physics, 835. STATISTICAL PHYSICS I special provisions may be made. A cooperative A review of thermodynamics and kinetic theory, program with the Department of Electrical and followed by an introduction to classical and quan- Computer Engineering is available to master's stu- tum statistical mechanics. Microcanonical, canon- dents in physics. Contact the department chairper- ical, and grand canonical ensembles; ideal Fermi son or graduate adviser for details. and Bose gases. Prereq: Phys 831; Phys 843; /or permission. 3 cr. 701-702. INTRODUCTION TO QUANTUM MECHANICS I AND II 836. STATISTICAL PHYSICS II Modern physics, nonrelativistic Schroedinger Basic formulation and application of statistical me- equation, the hydrogen atom, applications to chanics to selected physical problems. Prereq: Phys atomic and molecular structure. Prereq: diff eqns; 844. (Offered on request.) 3 cr. multidim calculus; /or permission. Intro mathematical physics course desirable. 4 cr. 839. THEORETICAL MECHANICS Newtonian, Lagrangian, and Hamiltonian formu- 703-704. ELECTRICITY AND lation of the classical mechanics of particles and MAGNETISM I AND II rigid bodies, with particular attention to those top- Foundation of electromagnetic theory; electrostat- ics that serve as background for the study of mod- ics, dielectric theory, electromagnetism, magnetic ern physical theories. 3 cr. properties of matter, alternating currents, Max- well's field theory. Prereq: diff eqns; multidim cal- 841-842. ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY culus; /or permission. Intro mathematical physics The formulation and detailed application of elec- course desirable. 4 cr. tromagnetic theory to physical problems. Prereq: permission. 3 cr.

843-844. QUANTUM MECHANICS Wave mechanical and Dirac formulations of nonrelativistic quantum mechanics. Prereq: permission. 3 cr. 97 Plant Science

850. PLASMA PHYSICS I 893, 894. PROBLEMS IN Topics to be discussed will be selected from the EXPERIMENTAL PHYSICS following: magnetohydrodynamics and plasma May be repeated to six credits. 1-3 cr. (Offered on flow, waves, shocks and discontmuities, instabili- request.) ties, and adiabatic motion of charged particles. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) 895, 896. SPECIAL TOPICS Any special fields of study not covered by the 852. PLASMA PHYSICS II above courses may be included. Topic choices in Topics to be discussed will be selected from the f)revious years: astrophysics; elementary particles; following: kinetic theory of plasmas, plasma asers/masers; many-body theory; general relativity waves, instabilities, and nonlinear plasma phenom- and cosmology; group theory; atomic physics; ena. Prereq: Phys 835; /or permission. 3 cr. (Of- quantum theory of light. May be taken more than fered on request.) once. 1-3 cr.

853. SOLAR 897, 898. COLLOQUIUM MAGNETOHYDRODYNAMICS Required of all graduate students. Topics to be Introduction to solar physics, with emphasis on selected. cr. gas dynamics and magnetic fields. Interior structure, the theory of convection, wave motions in 899. MASTER'S THESIS the presence of magnetism and gravity, coronal 6cr. heating theories, steady and nonsteady flows, dy- namo theory, and the theory of solar flares and 999. DOCTORAL RESEARCH other transient phenomena. Salient observational data will be reviewed. Prereq: permission. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) Plant Science (PlSc)

861-862. ADVANCED QUANTUM Chairperson: Owen M. Rogers MECHANICS propagator theory and Relativistic wave equations, PROFESSORS: George O. Estes; Kurt C. Feynman diagrams, quantum theory of radiation, Peirce; Feltner; J. Brent Loy; Lincoln C. Owen second quantization, introduction to quantum field M. Rogers; Douglas G. Routley theory and related topics. Prereq: Phys 839; Phys ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Yun-Tzu Kiang; 844. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) David W. Koch; James R. Mitchell; James E. Pollard; Jerry A. Warren; Otho S. Wells 863-864. NUCLEAR PHYSICS ASSISTANT PROFESSOR: John M. Roberts Introduction to nuclear processes including nuclear ADJUNCT ASSISTANT PROFESSOR: Merrill forces, nuclear structure and models, static prop- C. Hoyle erties, beta and gamma emission, and nuclear re- experimental methods. actions. Selected topics in The graduate research program in plant science Prereq: Phys 844. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) is concerned with solving basic and applied problems associated with growth of crop plants and 865-866. SOLID STATE PHYSICS their response to the environment. Facilities include theory of Development of quantum mechanical laboratories, greenhouses, growth chambers, and solids, transport phenomena, etc. Prereq: Phys 843; two experimental farms. Phys 835. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) The program emphasizes two principal disciplines: 1) breeding and genetics; and 2) physiology 887. INTRODUCTION TO SPACE and biochemistry. Research and teaching in plant SCIENCE I genetics, cytogenetics, and plant breeding are ma- following: iono- Topics will be selected from the jor strengths complemented by University pro- physics; magnetospheric physics; interpla- spheric grams in genetics and statistics. A strong research netary physics; solar physics; cosmic ray physics; and teaching program is also available in plant motion, radio, x-ray, and gamma-ray astronomy; physiology, including advanced courses in plant origin, acceleration of transport, energy loss, and nutrition, metabolism, and growth and develop- charged particles in the magnetosphere; interpla- ment. netary medium, and galaxy; cosmological prob- Undergraduates should obtain adequate back- offered every year.) lems. 3 cr. (Not ground in the biological and physical sciences, including botany and chemistry. Students lacking 888. INTRODUCTION TO SPACE these requirements may be admitted on condition SCIENCE II that certain courses be completed without graduate of the topics Extended investigation of one or more credit. The aptitude section of the Graduate Record introduced 887. Offered on request. 3 cr. in Phys Examination is required for application. Candidates for the Master of Science degree will 889. 890. SPACE PHYSICS SEMINAR be required to prepare a thesis and to pass an oral Lectures and discussions of current research in the examination. Candidates for the Ph.D. degree fields particles in space. 1-3 cr. physics of and must take a written and/or oral qualifying examination and a final oral examination on the disser- 891, 892. PROBLEMS IN THEORETICAL tation, in which the student must demonstrate PHYSICS ability to do original research in the area of spe- credits. 1-3 cr. (Offered on May be repeated to six cialization. Supervised teaching or its equivalent is request.) required for each master's and doctoral student.

98 Plant Science

Advanced Plant Physiology 851. PLANT GENETICS Euploidy, aneuploidy, cytoplasmic inheritance, so- 708. PLANT NUTRITION matic cell genetics, and genetics ot disease resis- Nutritional aspects of higher plants; uptake and tance. Prereq: intro genetics. 3 cr. (Not offered assimilation, metabolic roles and growth response. every year.) Fertilizers: sources, manufacture, application, and energy dependence. Prereq: chemistry. Lab. 4 cr. 853. CYTOGENETICS (Not offered every year.) Chromosome aberrations and their behavior. Ef- fect of radiation on chromosomes. Mapping and 762. PLANT METABOLISM laboratory techniques in cytogenetic analysis. Function, occurrence, synthesis and degradation of Prereq: genetics; cytology. 3 cr. (Not offered every plant constituents; respiration and photosynthesis; year.) metabolism of nitrogenous and aromatic compounds; biochemical mechanisms in seed dor- General Offerings and Independent Studies mancy, fruit ripening, and disease resistance. Prereq: general biochemistry or Bchm 751. 2 cr. 711. STATISTICAL METHODS II (Not offered every year.) Intermediate course; basic concepts ot sampling, linear models and analyses for one-way and mul- 803, 804. TOPICS IN DEVELOPMENTAL tiway classification, factorial arrangement of treat- PLANT PHYSIOLOGY ments, multiple regression, and covariance. A) Fungal Physiology; B) Photosynthesis I; Computer programs used in analyzing data. Ex- C) Photosynthesis II; D) Nitrogen Fixation; amples from environmental sciences. Prereq: ap-

E) Reproductive Physiology of Plants; F) Pho- plied statistics I or equivalent. Mr. Barrett, Mr. tomorphogenesis; G) Plant Hormones; H) Water Warren. 4 cr. and Solute Translocation; I) Stress Physiology;

J) Genetic Control of Plant Development; 720. LABORATORY TECHNIQUES IN K) Regulation of Gene Expression; L) Metabolic PLANT SCIENCES Control Mechanisms in Plants. A series of seven- Use' of laboratory instruments and techniques in- week, 2-credit, in-depth modules; two modules cluding extraction procedures, spectrometry, fluo- per semester (may vary; consult Time and Room rometry, electrophoresis, chromatography, atomic Schedule). Consult PlSc or Bot departments for fu- absorption spectrometer, measurement of respira- ture semester offerings. Prereq: permission. PISc tion and photosynthesis, photography, use ot mi- and Bot staff 2-26 cr. croscopes, and use of instruments for monitoring the environment. Prereq: chemistry (three semes- Advanced Genetics (See Genetics Program) ters) or permission. 2 cr. Cr/F.

705. POPULATION GENETICS 750. TOPICS IN AGRICULTURAL Population growth and regulation; genetic varia- APPLICATIONS OF STATISTICS AND tion; factors affecting gene frequency; ecological COMPUTING genetics. Prereq: prin of genetics or permission. Two-credit, seven-week modules ottered in the 4 cr. (Offered fall 1982.) middle of the spring semester. A) Current Appli- cation of Computers in Agriculture; B) Devel- 740. EVOLUTIONARY BIOLOGY opment of Computer Applications in Agri- Origin of life; sources of genetic variation; popu- culture; C) Simulation of Crop Development; lation structure, mechanisms of evolution; molec- D) Agricultural Systems; E) Techniques for Field ular evolution; ecological adaptation in animals, Experiments. Consult department for current of- plants, and man; community structure and evolu- fering. Prereq: permission. Mr. Warren. 2-10 cr. tion. Prereq: prin of gen or permission. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) 776. RADIOISOTOPE TECHNIQUES FOR LIFE SCIENCES 773. METHODS AND THEORY OF Application of radioisotopes to biological systems; PLANT BREEDING characteristics, detection, measurement, and tissue Plant breeding systems for qualitative and quanti- distribution of radioisotopes. Prereq: chemistry. tative plant improvement. Prereq: prin of genetics; Lab. 4 cr. appl statistics; /or permission. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) 795, 796. ADVANCED TOPICS IN PLANT SCIENCE 801. THE RESEARCH PROCESS A) Physiology; B) Genetics; C) Plant Utilization. For first-year M.S. and Ph.D. program students in Independent research, study, or group discussion. biological sciences. Philosophy, logic, ethics in sci- Prereq: permission. Staff 2 or 4 cr. ence; techniques of organization and design of research and of data presentation. 2 cr. Cr/F. 877. SUPERVISED TEACHING FOR GRADUATE STUDENTS 802. DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS Planning and presenting classroom and laboratory The philosophy of experimental design and how material. Biweekly seminars discuss teaching tech-

It relates to standard statistical designs. Topics in- nique and problems. One credit or its equivalent clude the roles of replication and randomization, required of^each plant science master's and Ph.D. factorially arranged treatments, Latin squares, in- candidate. Plant science graduate students only. complete nonfactorial designs, fractional replica- Prereq: permission. 1 cr. Cr/F. tions and confounding, and crossover designs. Prereq: INER 711; digital computer systems; /or 895-896. RESEARCH IN PLANT SCIENCE permission. Mr. Warren. 4 cr. (Not offered every Advanced investigations in a research subject, ex- year.) clusive of thesis. 1-4 cr.

99 Political Science

897-898. GRADUATE SEMINAR remaining courses may be chosen according to the Library research and discussion ot current topics of candidate's interests and needs, and two may be plant science. Required of all graduate students taken in a related field outside the department. majoring in plant science. 1 cr. Where candidates lack proficiency in tools of quantitative analysis or a foreign language essential to 899. MASTER'S THESIS the program of study and research, they will be A thesis requiring study in depth of a phase in plant required to attain and demonstrate to their thesis science. Required of all master's candidates m plant advisers proficiency in the needed skill. science. 6-10 cr. Master of Public Administration (M.P.A.) 999. DOCTORAL RESEARCH Dissertation reflecting independent research in a The Master of Public Administration is an inter- phase of plant science is required. Credit received disciplinary degree designed principally for indi- upon completion. viduals intending to pursue careers in local, state, or national government service in the U.S. or other countries. Candidates will be expected to complete Political Science (Polt) eight full courses (32 credits) and a four-credit internship program (Polt 870: Administrative Intern- ship) tor a Chairperson: David L. Larson total of 36 credits. Candidates who have had appropriate responsibility in public administration PROFESSORS: Robert B. Dishman; Bernard K. may be exempted from the internship upon Gordon; George K. Romoser petition for such exemption. Such candidates will ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Warren R. Brown; be required to undertake independent research on an approved topic related to public administration Robert E. Craig; John R. Kayser; David L. Larson; David W. Moore; Lawrence W. (Polt 895 or 896, four credits). A recreation and parks option, O'Connell; B. Thomas Trout; Susan O. White which draws upon the resources of that department, is offered as an interdisciplinary ASSISTANT PROFESSOR: Clifford J. Wirth program for the degree. Students pursuing this option are held to the general degree requirements Candidates for admission to graduate study in and usually take in recreation and parks the Department of Political Science normally are courses to fulfill the requirements for outside the polit- expected to have majored either in political science work ical science department. The internship is served or a field closely related, and to have achieved an with an appropriate recreation and parks agency. undergraduate academic record of some distinc- the eight courses, at least three shall chosen tion. In unusual and exceptional cases and where Ot be from the courses and seminars in public adminis- undergraduate preparation has been insufficient, tration offered the department (Polt 805: Meth- candidates may be admitted provided that they fol- by ods of Policy Analysis; Polt 806: Theories and low without credit a program of study approved Processes of Public Administration; and Polt 807: by the chairperson. In all cases the Graduate Record Cases in Public Management), and two from other Examination is required of candidates who seek to political science courses offered the department be considered tor admission. The department offers by according to the needs and interests of the candi- the Master of Arts in political science and the Mas- date. three courses chosen ter of Public Administration. The remaining may be from outside the department in such related fields as economics, economics, Master of Arts (M.A.) in Political Science administration, resource sociology, and recreation and parks.

The program leading to the Master of Arts in American Politics and Public political science is normally to be completed in a Administration single calendar year (an academic year plus the following summer) and is based on three elements: 701/801. PUBLIC POLICY the development of advanced knowledge in at least COURTS AND Impact of judicial decisions on public policy at three fields of the discipline in which the depart- federal, state, local, and regional levels. 4 cr. ment offers its courses and seminars; the ability to conduct and complete an individual program of 702/802. research at a high level; and familiarization with PUBLIC PLANNING AND modern methoaology in the discipline. Accord- BUDGETING Analysis, goal setting, and strategic planning in a ingly, every candidate will complete a suitably ar- setting, particular emphasis on ranged program consisting of seven courses and governmental with budgetary processes as a means for controlling pol- seminars (28 credits) and a master's thesis (which icy effectiveness. 4 cr. carries 8 credits), for a total of 36 credits. The first four credits of Polt 899 are normally taken in the 703/803. second semester of the candidate's residence. The URBAN AND METROPOLITAN remaining four credits of Polt 899 are taken during POLITICS Planning and management of the urban commu- the semester in which the student expects to grad- nity, intergovernment relations, administrative uate. Theses topics must be approved by a com- functions, general urban problems. 4 cr. mittee nominated by the chairperson and appointed and by the dean of the Graduate School. 704/804. POLICY AND PROGRAM An essential requirement is that candidates must arrange their programs so that they include at least EVALUATION Policy and program evaluation of federal, state and one seminar or advanced course in each of the four local governmental enterprise; focuses on the pol- fields of the discipline emphasized by the depart- itics, practices, and methods of evaluative investi- ment (political thought, American politics, com- gation. Evaluation as a technique for providing parative politics, and international politics). The rational information for budgetary and policymak- ing decisions. 4 cr.

100 Political Science

797, 798/897, 898. SECTION B: SEMINAR institutions, foreign policy, political parties, or bu- IN AMERICAN POLITICS reaucracy. 4 cr. Advanced analysis and individual research. 4 cr. International Politics 797, 798/897, 898. SECTION F: SEMINAR IN PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 760/860. THEORIES OF Advanced analysis and individual research, includ- INTERNATIONAL POLITICS AND ing opportunities for direct observation of govern- INTEGRATION mental administration. 4 cr. General explanations of the behavior of nations; theory and practice of supra-national integration; 805. METHODS OF POLICY ANALYSIS theories of peace and security and community Research design, survey methods, experimental building at the international level; concepts and techniques, and aggregate data analysis applied to experience in arms limitations and conflict resolu- public policy settings. 4 cr. tion. 4 cr.

806. THEORIES AND PROCESSES OF 761/861. INTERNATIONAL LAW PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION Formalized processes for regularizing state behav- Theories of organization and bureaucracy, the im- ior; development of norms tased on custom, pre- plications of bureaucratization, and the major pro- cedent, and formal institutions, as in treaties and cesses of public administration including bud- cases. Arms reduction and limitation arrangements; geting, personnel, policy making, as well as inspection, and other formal procedures designed attention to contemporary policy issues including to preserve peace. 4 cr. collective bargaining, affirmative action, citizen participation. 4 cr. 778/878. INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION 807. CASES IN PUBLIC MANAGEMENT Collective security and other forms of cooperation Policy case studies emphasizing politics, organiza- among nations through international organizations tional structure, and interorganizational behavior; such as the United Nations and its predecessors, management case studies emphasizing behavior, and through regional bodies. 4 cr. human relations, personality, and intraorganiza- tional dynamics; and simulation and role-playing 797, 798/897, 898. SECTION E: SEMINAR exercises. 4 cr. IN INTERNATIONAL POLITICS Advanced analysis and individual research; empha- Political Thought sis on developments in theory. 4 cr.

720/820. PERSPECTIVES ON POLITICAL General Courses SCIENCE Different views on the study and meaning of pol- 870. ADMINISTRATIVE INTERNSHIP itics. Perspectives of political scientists, political Practical administrative experience in an area of philosophers, and political activists. 4 cr. professional interest. Prereq: M.P.A. candidate. 4 cr. 721/821. ECONOMIC THOUGHT AND POLITICS 895, 896. READING AND RESEARCH IN Economic theories from the perspective of political POLITICAL SCIENCE thought. Economic activity and resource distribu- A) American Politics; B) Comparative Politics; tion in relation to historical and contemporary is- C) International Politics; D) Political Thought; sues such as freedom, equality, authority, E) Public Administration; F) Public Policy. The community, democracy, and quality of lite. 4 cr. graduate student will engage in independent study under the direction of one of the members of the 797, 798/897, 898. SECTION I: SEMINAR department. Requires approval of the graduate IN POLITICAL THOUGHT committee. 4 cr. Advanced treatment and individual research 4 cr. 899. MASTER'S THESIS Comparative Politics Each student will carry out original research that culminates in a master's thesis. Must be taken 4 cr. 741/841. POLITICS OF per semester in each of two semesters. Maximum INDUSTRIALIZED STATES 8 cr. Cr/F. Impact of modern industrialism and its organization upon political life and the conduct of govern- Related Courses in Recreation and Parks ment. 4 cr. For information, contact Associate Professor 742/842. COMPARATIVE COMMUNIST Gus Zaso, Department of Recreation and Parks. SYSTEMS Interests, demands, and decision making in com- 885. COMPREHENSIVE PLANNING munist governments. Ideological issues, political Leisure and tourist planning—local, county, and behavior within communist international organi- regional. Recreation programming and resource zations, intraparty relations, distinctions between development. Legislative aspects, court decisions, ruling and nonruling communist parties. 4 cr. administrative organization, zoning, land use, and other master planning considerations. Prereq: per- 797, 798/897, 898. SECTION C: SEMINAR mission. 4 cr. IN COMPARATIVE POLITICS Advanced analysis and individual research on for- 890. SPECIAL TOPICS AND PROJECTS eign nations or regions, focusing on governmental Advanced study in specific areas; may involve for-

101 Psychology

mal classes, seminars, or independent projects. To be accepted into the program, the applicant Prereq: permission. 4 cr. must desire to pursue the doctoral degree and be deemed qualified to do so on the basis of initial selection procedures. The applicant need not nec- Psychology (Psyc) essarily have been an undergraduate major in psychology. However, before beginning a graduate Chairperson: John A. Nevin career proper, the applicant must have completed a minimum of 15 undergraduate credits in psychology, including courses in elementary statistics PROFESSORS; Raymond L. Erickson; Gordon A. Haaland;John A. Nevin and experimental psychology. ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: William M. The courses and seminars listed below provide the general framework within which the student Baum; James R. Davis; Peter S. Fernald; Earl will develop, with counsel of the adviser, a C. Hagstrom; David E. Leary; John E. Limber; the Daniel C. Williams; William R. Woodward program of research and study leading to the doctoral degree. The range and sequence of seminars ASSISTANT PROFESSORS; Ellen S. Cohn; varies to some extent with the student, though Kenneth Fuld; R. Michael Latta; Carolyn J. Mebert; Rebecca M. Warner there will be common features to all programs. ADJUNCT ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR: Robert The core graduate courses are offered whenever G. Congdon possible in a two-year cycle. Consult the department for exact schedule. Doctor of Philosophy 801-802. GRADUATE PROSEMINAR Students and graduate faculty in psychology meet The Department of Psychology offers a four- every for a mutual exchange current year program of study leading to the Doctor of two weeks on cr. Cr/F. Philosophy degree. The basic goal of the program issues in psychology. is the development of behavioral scientists who can 805-806. both carry out sound research in an area of spe- RESEARCH METHODOLOGY I-II cialization and teach effectively. Integral to the pro- AND STATISTICS A consideration of research techniques and prob- gram is the development of specific skills required in psychology. first se- by the research psychologist who intends to be- lems of methodology The mester stresses the principles of statistical inference, come a college or university teacher. In order to correlational approaches, and their interrelatedness develop these skills, each year the program re- in design. Topics considered include probability quired of all students includes a variety of research theory, linear regression, tunction-free prediction, and instructional activities in addition to the usual the underlying statistical inference, para- academic work. In the third year, each student theory significance, teaches small sections of introductory psychology metric and nonparametric tests of and principles analysis variance. second se- under close staff supervision while concurrently of of The mester extends the correlational approach to the enrolled in a teaching seminar that has among its multiple regression objectives an increased appreciation of the goals techniques and methodology of appropriate use theoretical and problems of teaching. and considers the and bases of complex designs. Prereq: undergraduate Areas in which the student may speciahze are; statistics experimental psychology. cr. history, learning, perception-cognition, develop- and 3 mental, physiological, and social psychology. Tne student's adviser will help the student to plan an 807. RESEARCH METHODS AND effective graduate program. Core courses taken by STATISTICS III The application of multivariate methods of data all students include methodology, statistics, and analysis in psychological research; multiple regres- the seminar and practicum in the teaching of psy- sion, analysis of covariance, Hotelling's T" multi- chology. Work outside the department also is in- variate analysis of variance, path analysis, cluded in each student's program. Depth in a discriminant functions, canonical correlation, fac- particular area is obtained through participation in tor analysis. 3 cr. the graduate courses listed below and by independent study and research conducted unaer the su- 812. pervision of a staff member. Psyc 895-896; Reading PSYCHOLINGUISTICS The use and development of human language; the and Research in Psychology, is specifically de- nature of explanation, contemporary linguistic the- signed to serve this purpose. functions of language, speech per- Prior to the doctoral dissertation, the student ory, semantics, ception and production, learning. 3 cr. will carry out original research that culminates either in a master's thesis or a paper of publishable 814. quality. A master's degree may be awarded upon COGNITIVE PROCESSES The complex mental processes that characterize the successful completion of a program approved people: formation, reasoning, problem- by the department and dean of the Graduate School concept solving, use, creative thinking, imagina- including original research at the master's level. symbol tion, fantasy behavior, pathology ot thought, con- Detailed intormation concerning the qualifying ex- sciousness its alterations, and the relationship amination for advancement to candidacy for the and behavior. cr. Ph.D. degree and other requirements can be ob- between cognition and effective 3 tained from the department. 817. PERCEPTUAL A student admitted to graduate study must meet SENSORY AND the requirements for admission to the Graduate PROCESSES physiology, psychophysics. and percep- School. In applying for admission to the depart- Anatomy, all sensory modalities, with ment's program, candidates must submit Graduate tual processes of the Record Examination scores on the verbal, quantitative, and analytical sections of the aptitude test and the score on the advanced test in psychology.

102 Psychology

emphasis on vision and visual perception. Topics ogy. May be repeated for credit. Prereq: Psyc 851. include physics and measurement of light; bright- 3cr. ness and contrast; color; spatial vision; depth perception; temporal vision; perceptual development. 856. PSYCHOLOGY OF PERSONALITY 3cr. Major theories and research methods in personality. 3 cr. 831. PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY Comprehensive survey of current concepts in the 871. SURVEY OF THE HISTORY OF neurosciences. 3 cr. PSYCHOLOGY I Overview of the history of psychology up to the 833. ADVANCED SEMINAR IN mid-nineteenth century. 3 cr. PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHpLOGY In-depth exammation of a specific topic in the neu- 872. SURVEY OF THE HISTORY OF rosciences. Topics vary depending upon interests PSYCHOLOGY II of instructor and stuaents. Prereq: Psyc 831 or Overview of the history of psychology from the permission. 3 cr. mid-nineteenth century to the mid-twentieth century. 3 cr. 841. PSYCHOLOGY OF LEARNING AND MOTIVATION 873. METHODS AND THEORIES IN Survey of current theory and research, with em- HISTORICAL RESEARCH ON THE phasis on conditioning, reinforcement, and stim- BEHAVIORAL SCIENCES ulus control. 3 cr. Major methods and theories used in historical research applied to the study of the behavioral sci- 845. ADVANCED RESEARCH TOPICS ences. Prereq: Psyc 871, 872, or permission. 3 cr. IN LEARNING Current empirical and theoretical issues in learning. 874. PROBLEM AREAS IN THE Prereq: Psyc 841 or equivalent. 3 cr. HISTORY OF PSYCHOLOGY In-depth studies of particular individuals, move- 850. METHODS OF SOCIAL ments, and/or subfields. Each student pursues own PSYCHOLOGICAL ANALYSIS research project. May be repeated for credit. Procedures, logic, inferential strength, and poten- Prereq: Psyc 871, 872, or permission. 3 cr. tial bias of the various methodologies for studying social behavior. Experimental, quasi-experimental, 875. SPECIAL TOPICS IN THE HISTORY and nonexperimental designs, trie laboratory-field OF PSYCHOLOGY continuum, social psychological aspects of inter- Topic to be determined when course is offered. views and experiments, the nature of artifacts, and May be repeated for credit. Prereq: Psyc 871, 872, other current methodological issues. Emphasis on or permission. 3 cr. design of social psychological research rather than statistical analysis, though statistical matters regu- 881. CHILD PSYCHOLOGY larly arise. Prereq: Psyc 805, Soc 801, or equiva- Devoted to topics of current interest in child psy- lent. 3 cr. chology. Core material will be followed by in- depth study in an area of student's interest. 3 cr. 851. SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY A seminar covering current topics in experimental 882. ADVANCED SEMINAR IN social psychology including attitude change, power DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY and influence, interpersonal perception and attrac- In-depth analysis of one or several specific topics tion, conformity, and social learning. 3 cr. or issues in developmental psychology. Students will be expected to develop a research proposal 852. ATTITUDE AND ATTRIBUTION IN with potential for submission as a pre-doc, post- SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY doc, or regular grant. 3 cr. Various approaches to attitudinal and attributional processes; emphasis on current theoretical issues. 891-892. PRACTICUM AND SEMINAR IN Prereq: Psyc 851. 3 cr. THE TEACHING OF PSYCHOLOGY Practicum offers the student an opportunity to 853. GROUP PROCESS AND SOCIAL teach introductory psychology under close super- INFLUENCE vision from the staff. The seminar is coordinated Problems of the individual in the group and the with this experience and focuses on both practical group as a system; aspects of social influence. and theoretical issues of significance in the teach- Prereq: Psyc 851 or permission. 3 cr. (Not offered ing/learning process at the college level. Required every year.) of all doctoral students, during the third year. 5 cr.

854. SEMINAR IN SOCIAL 894. ADVANCED RESEARCH IN PSYCHOLOGY PSYCHOLOGY Intensive coverage of the experimental and theo- Student designs and conducts original research that retical literature in a selected area of basic or applied culminates in a paper of publishable quality. Com- social psychology. Students will participate directly pletion of either this course or Psyc 899 will satisfy in the conduct of the seminar by means of individ- the department's research requirement for the mas- ual topical discussions, development and/or exeter's degree. May be taken for 3 cr. per semester cution of research designs, and critical assessment in each of two semesters or 6 cr. in one semester. of the current state of the topic area under discus- Maximum 6 cr. Cr/F. sion. Illustrative topics: political behavior, para- linguistics and nonverbal communication, ethnic and racial prejudice, and environmental psychol-

103 Sociology

895-896. READING AND RESEARCH IN specialties within or across the major areas of spe- PSYCHOLOGY cialization, or propose to the Graduate Committee A) Physiological; B) Perception; C) History and other major areas of specialization which fall within Theory; D) Learning; E) Social; F) Cognition; the faculty's competence. G) Statistics and Methodology; I) Developmental; Students' proficiency in theory, statistics, and

J) Psychopathology. As part of the development as methods, and in the major and minor areas of an mdependent scholar, the student is encouraged study, is determined by written examinations. De- to plan: 1) broad reading in an area; 2) intensive tails about the examinations can be found in the investigation of a special problem; or Graduate Student Handbook, which is sent to all stu- 3) experimental testing of a particular question. dents requesting information about the program. Requires approval of both adviser and staff mem- Within the context of a curriculum organized ber directing project. May be repeated. 3-6 cr. largely in the form of seminars and research, students may design, with the approval of advisers 897-898. PROBLEMS AND ISSUES IN and the Graduate Committee, curricula suitable to PSYCHOLOGY their experience and intellectual goals. In line with Seminar on a problem that has been the subject of this flexibility, choice may include courses in an- specialized research and study by a member of the thropology and up to three courses from outside staff. Topic and instructor vary. May be repeated the department. Selection of thesis and dissertation for credit. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) topics is limited only by the areas of expertise available among departmental faculty members. 899. MASTER'S THESIS Upon establishing residence, students will be re- Each student will carry out original research that sponsible for remaining informed about any mod- culminates in a master's thesis. May be taken 3 cr. ifications in the requirements of the degree per semester in each of two semesters or 6 cr. in program in which they are enrolled. one semester. Maximum 6 cr. Cr/F. To be awarded the Master of Arts degree the candidate must fulfill the following requirements: 999. DOCTORAL RESEARCH 1) Complete satisfactorily at least one full year (24 credit hours) of graduate-level course work in so-

Graduate Course Offered Primarily for Students ciology including Sociological Methods I (801), Enrolled in Other Graduate Programs and either 802, 803, or 804; and Sociological The-

ory I (811). 2) Register for one credit of thesis work 823. INDIVIDUAL TESTING during the second semester of residence and submit Training in administration, scoring, and behavioral a draft of a proposal to the thesis committee by the observation necessary for interpretation of individ- end of the semester. The proposal or abstract must ual tests of intelligence with discussion and dem- be circulated to all department faculty. 3) Submit onstration of certain other instruments for for approval a report of a research endeavor to the cognitive measurement. The focus will be on chil- thesis committee. This report may be in the form dren rather than adults, and on technique rather of either a) a thesis or b) a publishable paper in the than interpretation. Each student will be required form outlined in the publication format of any to purchase one set of materials. (Student's back- major sociological journal. ground in statistics, measurement, exceptional Students interested in nonacademic employment child, and personality theory will be evaluated by after completing a degree in sociology should take the instructor.) Prereq: permission. Lab. 4 cr. as one of^ their electives a field experience or internship course involving experience in a nonacademic setting. This can oe done under Sociology Sociology (Soc) 895, by arrangement among the student, a faculty member, and the organization in which the field experience/internship will be located. Experience Chairperson: Arnold S. Linsky of this type is extremely important for placement expectation is that PROFESSORS: Melvin T. Bobick; Walter F. in nonacademic positions. Tne paper will be required in conjunction Buckley; Bud B. Khleif; Arnold S. Linsky; an academic Stuart H. Palmer; Solomon Poll; Murray A. with the fielcl experience. Straus To be awarded the Doctor of Philosophy de- ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: Charles Bolian; gree, the candidate must fulfill the residence re- Peter Dodge; Richard E. Downs; Melville quirement of three years' work after the bachelor's courses in Nielson; Stephen P. Reyna; Fred Samuels; degree including: 1) a minimum of 12 Howard M. Shapiro sociology (at least 8 as seminars), other than thesis ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: Lawrence C. or dissertation research, including Sociological Hamilton; Barbara K. Larson; Sally K. Ward Theory I and II (811 and 812), Sociological Meth- GRADUATE PROGRAM COORDINATOR: ods I and II (801 and 802), and one other course in Peter Dodge methods or statistics (803 or 804), three courses in a major area, and two in a minor area of sociology; The Department of Sociology and Anthropol- 2) a second minor consisting of three related sociological in content no ogy offers M.A. and Ph.D. degrees in sociology. courses whether or not — Tne master's degree program emphasizes theory preliminary examination is required; 3) passing in the major minor areas and methodology. Students in the doctoral pro- written examinations and in advanced the- gram are expected to select from the areas of de- of sociological specialization and ory and methodology; 4) demonstrating reading partmental specialization one major area—and or a research from the areas of expertise found among the fac- level proficiency in a foreign language overall program of the stu- ulty, one minor area—for intensive study and ex- tool appropriate to the not be part of amination. There are four major substantive areas dent (the research tool option must graduate students for possible specialization: deviance, conflict, and the other degree requirement for appropriate research control; social psychology; comparative institu- in sociology; examples of programming, symbolic tional analysis; and family. Students may pursue tools include computer

104 Sociology

logic, historiography, econometric techniques, and on the one hand and the police, judicial, and cor- mathematical statistics. At the time they are ad- rectional components of criminal justice systems mitted to the Ph.D. program, students must sub- on the other. Prereq: intro criminology or permis- mit, for approval by the Graduate Committee, a sion. 4 cr. statement indicating how they intend to meet the language/research tool requirement); 5) fulfilling 720. CURRENT DEVELOPMENTS IN the research and/ or teaching requirement described SOCIOLOGY OF THE FAMILY below; 6) writing and defending an acceptable doc- A current topic will be selected each semester, such toral dissertation. as stratification and the family, intrafamily com- In planning the program of study, the student munication, power structure of the family, kinship will be advised at first by an assigned faculty mem- in modern societies. Critical review of the litera- ber and, subsequently, m the case of doctoral stu- ture; class or individual research project usually dents, by a guidance committee. Specially will be carried out. Prereq: 8 credits of sociology; appointed committees will be organized for the a family course recommended. 4 cr. direction and assessment of the thesis and dissertation. Under such supervision, students are ex- 721. FAMILY INTERACTION pected to go considerably beyond the minimum Analysis of family interaction from a sociological common requirements of the graduate program to perspective. Consideration of individual family establish a knowledgeability and competency pe- members, relationships, and the family as a unit culiarly their own, and they will be permitted to using a social systems approach. Prereq: intro soc take courses outside the department or below the or permission. 4 cr. 700 level within the department only with the ex- press permission of their advisers. 735. COMPLEX ORGANIZATIONS Students are permitted to register for Reading Comparative study of the structure and dynamics and Research in Sociology and Anthropology (895, of complex, formal organizations (business, mili- 896) to pursue their individual interests. Upon tary, political, and governmental, educational, completion, work done under this rubric will be medical). Power and social control in formal sys- reported, in writing, to the Graduate Committee tems; organizational processes, performances, and and the student's adviser by the faculty member effectiveness; effect of complex, formal organiza- who assumes the responsioility for supervising tions on persons and societies. Prereq: permission. such activities. 4 cr. In all cases, students having knowledge equivalent to any of the required courses may substitute 740. CULTURE CHANGE an examination to be given by the faculty member Various types of society; development of theory. responsible for the course. Full credit for the ful- Descriptive studies of institutional as well as the- fillment of requirements may be given to equiva- oretical materials selected from the writings of lent courses taken elsewhere. Comte, Marx, Spencer, Durkheim, Spengler, So- An important part of the graduate program is rokin, Redfield, and others. 4 cr. the opportunity to learn from participation in the teaching and research activities of the department 741. SOCIAL CHANGE AND SOCIETAL faculty. All candidates for doctoral degrees are DEVELOPMENT therefore expected to assist a member of the de- Comparative, interdisciplinary approach. Interre- partment in teaching and/or research. Assignments lationships among economic, political, and social to work with a specific member will be made by factors in determining the structure, dynamics, the Graduate Committee on the basis of students' character, and level of development of societies. experience, the needed areas of training, and the Prereq: permission. Soc 740 recommended. 4 cr. interests and preferences expressed by the students and faculty members. 745. SOCIAL STRATIFICATION To be accepted as a graduate student in sociol- Pattern of distribution of economic, honorific, and ogy, applicants must present, in addition to meet- political variables within the populations of com- ing the general Graduate School requirements. plex societies; allocation of personnel to the roles Graduate Record Examination scores on the verbal, in question, notably through occupational mobil- quantitative, and analytical tests, and the advanced ity; and the impact of such processes upon behav- sociology test. Undergraduate majors in other ior, both individual and social. Prereq: intro soc or fields may be admitteo, in which case advanced social institutions. 4 cr. tests in their majors may be required. However, if the student's undergraduate work has not included 750. THE MIDDLE EAST: ISSUES OF an introductory course in sociological theory, re- ETHNICITY, WORK, AND IDENTITY search methods, statistics, and two other sociology Community studies approach to such topics as: courses, these five courses must be taken—or ethnicity and identity in the interrelationship of equivalent knowledge demonstrated through ex- language, religion, and corporate membership in amination—in addition to the requirements out- a community; ethnic division of labor; work, plu- lined above. ralism, and family networks; mobility and immo- All students entering the program must complete bility; estates vs. classes. 4 cr. the M.A. before admission to the Ph.D. program. The department welcomes both applicants who 757. SOCIAL INSTITUTIONS OF LATIN plan to continue for the Ph.D. as well as students AMERICA AND THE CARIBBEAN planning for the M.A. only. Selective analysis of distinctive institutions and social systems, with particular attention to social as- 715. SOCIOLOGY OF CRIME AND pects of the process of modernization. Prereq: JUSTICE permission. 4 cr. Seminar devoted to analyses of the relationships between violent, property, and "victimless" crime

105 Sociology

761. POPULATION DYNAMICS areas. Course descriptions and prerequisites on file Major population trends including changes in birth in department office during registration. 4 cr. ana death rates, population characteristics, mobility, migration, world population growth, popula- 801. SOCIOLOGICAL METHODS I: tion problems, and policies of countries at different INTERMEDIATE SOCIAL STATISTICS stages of economic development. Interrelationship Application of statistical methods to the analysis of of population and society. 4 cr. social data, with particular emphasis on multiple regression and related topics. 4 cr. 770. CULTURE, PERSONALITY, AND SOCIETY 802. SOCIOLOGICAL METHODS II: A cross-cultural view of the development of per- RESEARCH DESIGN sonality as emergent from genetic, situational, and Systematic investigation of each step in the design socio-cultural determinants; analysis of the dy- and implementation of sociological research. Se- namic interplay of socio-cultural and psychological lected techniques of data collection and analyses behavior systems. Prereq: prior courses in sociol- will be pursued. Prereq: meth of soc res; soc stat; ogy, anthropology, or psychology. 4 cr. or their equivalents; or permission. 4 cr.

780. SOCIAL CONFLICT 803. SOCIOLOGICAL METHODS III: Nature of social conflict, especially war. Setting SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN METHODS AND and initiation of conflict, its dynamics, and factors STATISTICS affecting its course and outcomes. Prereq: permis- Course alternates among special problems, such as sion. 4 cr. measurement, and advanced statistics. 4 cr.

785. THE STUDY OF WORK 804. SOCIOLOGICAL METHODS IV: Understanding society through the structure of FIELD WORK work. Case studies, in an ethnographic manner, of Training for participant observation in the manner high-status and low-status occupations to provide of an anthropologist or Chicago-school sociologist. understanding of social processes and interrelation- Students write and discuss field notes and become ships in the social structure. 4 cr. familiar with case studies, content analysis, and relevant issues. Field notes, basis for a term paper. 790. APPLIED SOCIOLOGY 4 cr. 1) Current level of use of sociological knowledge; 2) the advocate, consultant, and researcher roles in 811. SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY I applied settings; 3) techniques of applied research; The content, presuppositions, and implications of 4) implications of applied sociology, including eth- the body of sociological theory, exemplifying the ical problems. Each student will focus on a social full range of sociological inquiry. Prereq: hist of problem and write a paper covering the above is- soc theory; contemp soc theory; or their equiva- sues. Applied projects where possible. Prereq: lents. 4 cr. meth of soc res. 4 cr. 812. SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY II 794. EVALUATION OF SOCIAL The content, presuppositions, and implications of PROGRAMS contemporary sociological theory. Students will Evaluation research defined: purposes of evalua- engage in theory construction and analysis, and in tion; design of evaluation studies; setting of pro- this endeavor will be encouraged to develop their grams; utilization of evaluation results. particular interests in substantive areas. Prereq: Soc Examination of case studies of evaluations of social 811. 4 cr. programs. Students are responsible for designing an evaluation study in their chosen substantive 813. SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY III area. Prereq: meth of soc res. 4 cr. A seminar of intensive study of topics in sociological theory. Sample topics include: exchange the- 795, 796. READING AND RESEARCH IN ory, functionalism, systems theory, theory SOCIOLOGY construction, pioneering theorists. Prereq: hist of A) Communications; B) Criminology; C) Culture soc theory; contemp soc theory; or their equiva- Change; D) Culture and Personality; E) Deviant lents. 4 cr. Behavior; F) Family; G) Population; H) Rural-Ur- ban; I) Social Control; J) Social Differentiation; 821. DEVIANT BEHAVIOR K) Social Movements; L) Social Psychology; Relationships among cultural, subcultural, and per- M) Social Research; N) Social Theory. Prereq: 12 sonality variables and deviant behavior; forms of credits of sociology or permission. 2-8 cr. deviant behavior: invention, crime, alcoholism, and emotional illness. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. 797. SPECIAL TOPICS IN SOCIOLOGY A) Criminal Justice Field Work; B) Sociology of 830. THE SMALL GROUP Crime and Justice; C) Sociology of Mental Health Sociological and social psychological perspectives and Illness; D) Illness and Society; E) The Holo- on interaction within small groups. Prereq: courses caust; F) Socio-Linguistics; G) Social Class and in sociology and social psychology, or permission. Family Patterns; H) Measurement in Sociology; 4 cr. (Not offered every year.)

I) Violence in the Family; J) Post-Industrial Soci- ety; K) Political Sociology; L) Bio-Sociology; 832. FAMILY INTERVENTION M) Social Evolution; N) Social Differentiation; Application of sociological and social psychological O) Modernization; P) Blacks in the Americas; theory and technique to clinical intervention in Q) Religious Movements; R) American States and families; principles of problem formulation and Regions. New or specialized courses presenting resolution in family intervention; therapy for dif- material not normally covered in regular course fering family units: individuals, relationships, offerings. May be repeated, but not in duplicate subgroups, and whole families; consideration of

106 Sociology

types of change that occur in family therapy, both methods, problems of translation and conceptual planned and spontaneous; strategies of interven- equivalence of behaviors and indexes, and field tion; and practical issues involved in family inter- techniques. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. vention. Selected attention to specific problems such as separation and loss, drug abuse and vio- 875. SOCIOLOGY OF THE FAMILY lence. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. Major approaches in the sociological study of families. Individuals in families, family relationships, 838. SOCIOLOGY OF EDUCATION: and families as groups and the interrelationships SOCIAL ORGANIZATION OF SCHOOLS among these levels. Interactional and systemic AND COMMUNITY properties of marriage, parent-child relations, and Schools in their sociocultural contexts and as part extended family relations. 4 cr. of the institutional network of society. Relation to stratification and social control. Teaching as a re- 880. SOCIAL DIFFERENTIATION ligious occupation and as an emergent profession. Seminar allowing intensive examination of selected 4cr. topics in differentiation and personnel allocation, with sections rotated among faculty members, in 842. SOCIOLOGY AND THE POLICY- 1) social stratification, 2) race and ethnic relations, MAKING PROCESS and 3) age and sex. Prereq: social stratification and Social policy and public policy defined: description either race and ethnic relations or female, male, of the policy-making process. The political soci- and society. 4 cr. ology of the policy-making process; who makes policy and who influences policy, under what con- 885. OCCUPATIONS AND ditions, and with what effect. Definition of social PROFESSIONS policy research and the various roles social scien- Professionalization as adult sociahzation, an acqui- tists can adopt for policy-relevant work. Students sition of a new identity. Professions as ideologies, are responsible for critiquing the readings and for markets, and extended families. Research perspec- preparing a substantial research paper. 4 cr. tive of the Chicago School of Sociology. 4 cr.

850. METHODS OF SOCIAL 888. SOCIOLOGY OF EDUCATION: THE PSYCHOLOGICAL ANALYSIS CULTURES OF POVERTY AND The logic, inferential strength, and potential bias AFFLUENCE of the various methodologies for studying social The schooling of "culturally deprived" and "cul- behavior. Experimental and nonexperimental de- turally endowed" pupils. Problems of social and signs, the social-psychological aspects of laboratory geographic mobility and immobility. Rise of the and field research, the nature of artifacts, etc. Em- counseling and healing trades. 4 cr. phasis is on research design rather than statistical analysis, but graduate-level sophistication in statis- 889. SOCIOLOGY OF EDUCATION: tics is assumed. (Also offered as Psyc 850.) 4 cr. RACE AND ETHNIC RELATIONS IN SCHOOLS AND SOCIETY 851. SEMINAR IN SOCIAL Ethnic stratification inside and outside the school. PSYCHOLOGY The schooling of whites and nonwhites. Issues of Some of the major themes in social-psychological bilingualism, culture, and identity. 4 cr. theory, including social structure and personality, socialization, small-group processes, and interac- 895, 896. READING AND RESEARCH IN tion analysis. Students will be expected to read and SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY evaluate selected empirical research. 4 cr. A) Communications; B) Criminology; C) Cultur- al/Social Anthropology; D) Culture Change; 852. SOCIALIZATION AND ABNORMAL E) Culture and Personality; F) Deviant Behavior; BEHAVIOR G) Prehistoric Archaeology; H) Family; I) Popula- Orientations that relate sociahzation to abnormal tion; J) Rural-Urban; K) Social Control; L) Social behavior; synthesizes the major concepts into cur- Differentiation; M) Social Movements; N) Social rent sociological and social psychological frame of Psychology; O) Social Research; P) Social Theory; reference. Prereq: at least one course in social psy- Q) Anthropological Linguistics; R) Social Welfare. chology or permission. 4 cr. A student prepared by training and experience to do independent work under the guidance of an 854. SOCIOLOGY OF RELIGION instructor may register for one or more of these The reciprocal relationship of religion and culture; sections. Prereq: 16 graduate hours of sociology the function of religion in society; the contributions and permission. Hours and credit to be arranged. of sociological research; the relationship between religion and other social institutions; religion and 897. SPECIAL TOPICS IN SOCIOLOGY social change; and the problem of church and state. A) Criminal Justice Field Work; B) Sociology of 4cr. Crime and Justice; C) Sociology of Mental Health and Illness; D) Illness and Society; E) The Holo- 861. DEMOGRAPHY caust; F) Socio-Linguistics; G) Social Class and Current problem areas in demography including Family Patterns; H) Measurement in Sociology; population theory, formal demography, social ep- I) Violence in the Family; J) Post-Industrial Soci- idemiology, social indicators, use of clemographic ety; K) Political Sociology; L) Bio-Sociology; sources and techniques in sociological investiga- M) Social Evolution; N) Social Differentiation; tion. Prereq: Soc 761 or permission. 4 cr. O) Modernization; P) Blacks in the Americas; Q) Religious Movements; R) American States and 870. COMPARATIVE INSTITUTIONAL Regions. New or specialized courses presenting ANALYSIS material not normally covered in regular course Theory and methods of cross-national approaches, including: history, variations in objectives and

107 Spanish

offerings. May be repeated, but not in duplicate of Spanish. Instruction in the use of audio-visual areas. Course descriptions and prerequisites on file aids including language laboratories. Readings, dis- in department office during registration. 4 cr. cussion, class observation. May be repeated for a

total of 3 cr. 1 cr. 899. MASTER'S THESIS Usually 6 cr. but up to 10 cr. when the problem 811. MEDIEVAL SPANISH LITERATURE warrants. Spanish literature including social and historical

backgrounds, 1 100-1500: Poema de mio Cid, Berceo, 999. DOCTORAL RESEARCH Mester de clerecia, Libra de huen amor, Cancionero poets, and La Celestina. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) Spanish (Span) 831. RIVER PLATE LITERATURE Sarmiento, Hernandez, Florencio Chairperson: F. William Forbes Jose Rodo, Sanchez, Mallea. Focus on the question of Argen- tinidad. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) PROFESSORS: Richard J. Callan; R. Alberto Casas; Charles H. Leighton 852. ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR; F. William Forbes DRAMA AND POETRY OF THE ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: Linda D. East; SIGLO DE ORO Bernadette Komonchak; Barbara H. Wing Social and historical background of Baroque period. Representative plays of Lope de Vega, Tirso Master of Arts de Molina, Calderon; lyric poetry of Lope, Gongora, and Quevedo; prose developments. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) To be admitted to graduate study for the Master of Arts degree in Spanish, a student must have 854. CERVANTES completed 30 credits in Spanish language and lit- Cervantes's literary art. Selections from the major erature beyond first year Spanish, including a sur- works. The Quijote, its originality and significance; vey of Spanish literature and two other literature its antecendents; its religious, philosophical, courses. To obtain the degree, the student must and sociological aspects; and its artistic structure. 3 cr. fulfill the course requirements, pass a comprehen- (Not offered every year.) sive examination based on a master's degree reading list, and submit an acceptable thesis if such an 855. LITERATURE OF 19TH option is chosen. THE To satisfy the course requirements, the student CENTURY Larra, Espronceda, Becquer, Perez Galdos, and must: a) successfully complete 10 graduate courses Blasco Ibafiez. Romanticism, realism, and natural- (of which eight should be from the Spanish offer- ism. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) ings); or, b) successfully complete at least eight courses in Spanish and submit a thesis (6 credits, 857. thus completing the minimum of 30 credits re- THEATER AND POETRY OF THE 20TH quired by the Graduate School). All advanced lit- CENTURY The Generation of 1898 and Modernismo: Lorca, erature courses are conducted in Spanish. Casona, Guillen, In addition, M.A. students are required to take Buero Vallejo, Sastre, Salinas, and Miguel Hernandez. 3 cr. (Not offered every 801. Teaching assistants must also take 803. No year.) student may register for a graduate course if he or she has already taken the corresponding under- 858. 20TH graduate course here or its equivalent elsewhere. SPANISH PROSE OF THE A comprehensive examination based on a mas- CENTURY Novels, short stories, and essays. Unamuno, Ba- ter's degree reading list will be given four times a roja, Pidal, Gasset, Julian year; in January, May, August, and September. Menendez Ortega y Marias, Perez Ayala, Gironella, The candidate will be permitted to take the ex- Aranguren, de and Cela; survey of contemporary prose. 3 cr. (Not amination only twice. Students failing their first offered every year.) attempt must wait at least three months before taking it again. The thesis option must embody the 860. UNAMUNO AND ORTEGA Y results of independent investigation and be written GASSET in a form acceptable to the Spanish section. It must Philosophical ideology and literary content of ma- be submitted to the thesis director six weeks before and expected time of degree conferral. jor contributions of Miguel de Unamuno Jose Ortega y Gasset. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) 801. BIBLIOGRAPHY AND METHODS OF RESEARCH 871. LATIN AMERICAN DRAMA From pre-Hispanic origins to the present; modern Required of all graduate students in their first year playwrights of Mexico and Puerto Rico. 3 cr. (Not of study. An introduction to standard bibliograph- offered every year.) ical techniques and to form and style in the preparation and writing of research finclings. 872. LATIN AMERICAN NOVEL Preparation of a research paper. 1 cr. Development from Romanticism to the present; 803. APPLIED LINGUISTICS contemporary trends and techniques. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) Required of all graduate assistants teaching in the departmental program, but open to all graduate 873. students in Spanish. Discussion of current meth- LATIN AMERICAN SHORT STORY Representative stress on 20th century. odology and linguistic approaches to the teaching authors; Principles of interpretation. 3 cr. (Not offered every year.)

308 Zoology

874. MAJOR LATIN AMERICAN ADJUNCT ASSISTANT PROFESSOR: John B. AUTHORS Heiser 3 cr. (Not offered every year.) GRADUATE PROGRAM COORDINATOR:

John J. Sasner, Jr. 890. ADVANCED SPANISH GRAMMAR Review of Spanish grammar and syntax. Prereq: The graduate program in zoology is intended for advanced composition and conversation. 3 cr. students who aspire to a professional career within or outside the area of college teaching and research. 891. METHODS OF FOREIGN Degrees can be earned with emphasis in behavior, LANGUAGE TEACHING—SPANISH development, ecology (freshwater and marine), en- Interdepartmental course. Objectives, methods, docrinology, fisheries, genetics, invertebrate zool- and tecnniques in teaching Spanish, French, Ger- ogy, mammalogy, neurobiology, parasitology, man, and Latin from elementary grades through and physiology. college. Discussion, demonstration, preparation of To be admitted to graduate study in zoology, instructional materials, microteaching of the lan- students ordinarily must have completed an un- guage skills. Prereq: permission. 3 cr. dergraduate major in biology or zoology. A basic array of courses including general biology, devel- 895. SPECIAL STUDIES IN SPANISH opment, general ecology, genetics, morphology, LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE and physiology is normally required. Additionally, A) The History of the Spanish Language; a background in chemistry through organic chem- B) Medieval Spanish Literature; C) Spanish Liter- istry and a semester each of calculus and physics is ature of the Renaissance; D) Spanish Literature of necessary. Students who are deficient in any of the Golden Age; E) Spanish Literature of the 18th these requirements may be admitted to graduate and 19th Centuries; F) Spanish Literature of the status but may be required to remedy their defi- 20th Century 1898-1936); G) Contemporary Span- ciencies by taking courses which do not give grad- ish Literature; H) Latin American Literature of the uate credit. Applicants are requested to submit 16th and 17th Centuries; I) Latin American Liter- aptitude and advanced biology scores for the Grad-

ature of the 18th and 19th Centuries; J) Latin uate Record Examination. American Literature of the 20th Century; Each newly accepted graduate student will be K) Contemporary Latin American Literature; interviewed during the second week of classes of L) Structural and Applied Linguistics; M) Spanish the first semester. This interview will be conducted Literary Criticism; N) Latin American Essay; at a specified time by a committee composed of the O) Latin America; P) Catalan; Q) Spanish Poetry; student's temporary academic adviser plus two ad- R) Latin American Poetry; S) Galaos; T) Arche- ditional faculty members. The purpose of this type Latin American Literature; U) Special Teach- committee is to advise the student in constructing ing Problems; V) Spanish Civilization and Culture; a program of study and to correct such academic W) Latin American Civilization and Culture; deficiencies as may exist. The committee will have X) Borges; Y) Spanish Theater; Z) Spanish for available transcripts, letters of recommendation, Graduates. Guided study with training in bibliog- and the results of the diagnostic exam described raphy and organization of material. Topics selected below. The committee will then enter its evalua- by instructor and student in conference. Prereq: tion and recommendations in the student's per-

permission of major supervisor. 1 or 3 cr. manent record. All incoming graduate students will take a di- 896. SPECIAL STUDIES IN SPANISH agnostic exam before classes begin. This will in- LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE clude questions from the areas of behavior, A) Hispanic Minorities of the United States; biochemistry and physiology, development, ecol- B) Portuguese; C) Introduction to Hispanic Lin- ogy, evolution and systematics, genetics, mor- guistics; D) Hispanic Dialectology. Guided study phology, parasitology, and general biology. No with training in bibliography ancl organization of student is expected to do uniformly well in all material. Topics selected by instructor and student areas, but a high level of competence is expected in conference. Prereq: permission of major super- in those areas relevant to the student's particular visor. 1-3 cr. program. Should the interview committee, on the basis of this exam, consider that a deficiency exists, 899. MASTER'S THESIS this may be remedied either by a formal course or 6 cr. by an oral examination upon recommendation of the committee. Such oral examinations will be given during the week immediately following the Zoology (Zool) spring vacation. Students who hold a teaching assistantship will given ample opportunity for practice teaching Chairperson: John E. Foret be unoer the supervision of the instructor. All other graduate students are also required to obtain PROFESSORS: Arthur C. Borror; Wilbur L. some teaching experience. Bullock; Robert A. Croker; Evelyn E. Handler; appropriate A candidate for the Master of Science degree in Frank K. Hoornbeek; John J. Sasner, Jr.; Philip zoology, in addition to the requirements men- J. Sawyer above, special ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS: John E. Foret; tioned will ordinarily complete a problem (Zool 895 or 896) of no more than 6 Edward N. Francq; James F. Haney; Larry G. credits or than 10 credits that Harris; Marcel E. Lavoie; Edward K. a thesis of no more Tillinghast; Charles W. Walker is acceptable to the guidance committee. Prior to ASSISTANT PROFESSORS: W. Huntting the receipt of the master's degree, all candidates Howell; James T. Taylor; Winsor H. Watson must pass a comprehensive examination, which will include questions covering general knowledge III in zoology in addition to specific questions relevant

109 —

Zoology

to the candidate's University of New Hampshire 719. FIELD LIMNOLOGY experience. Freshwater ecology examined through laboratory All doctoral students must pass a written ex- exercises with freshwater habitats. Methods to amination to certify their proficiency in one foreign study freshwater lakes; interpretation of data. Sem- language. Some fields of pursuit may require more inars and occasional Saturday field trips. Prereq: languages and this need will be determined by the present or prior enrollment in Bot 717, Zool 717, student's guidance committee. or equivalent; permission. 4 cr. After the successful completion of the language requirements and of all required courses, students 720. FIELD MARINE SCIENCE FOR who wish to be admitted to doctoral candidacy TEACHERS must demonstrate a broad basic knowledge of their Primarily for teachers grades 6 through 12, but major and minor fields in a qualifying examination, open to others. Overview of living marine organ- fishes, administered by the guidance committee. In addi- isms (algae, invertebrates, marine mam- j^ tion, students must convince their proposed major mals, and shore birds) in their natural professor and doctoral committee, in whatever environments. Also such topics as coastal zone way the committee finds acceptable, of their su- problems, marine fisheries, economics of marine perior capacity to carry out basic research in biol- organisms, and the educational resources of the ogy. Normally, the student may accomplish this marine environment. Field work. Offered at the by presenting to the committee a research proposal Shoals Marine Laboratory (Isles of Shoals) in coin which the soundness, originality, and feasibility operation with Cornell University. Three lectures of the investigative ideas are clearly revealed, and and two labs or field trips per day. Prereq: college- which—when approved—should serve as the basis level intro biol. 1 cr. (Summers only.) of the doctoral dissertation. 721. PARASITOLOGY 704. COMPARATIVE Introduction to the more important parasites caus- ENDOCRINOLOGY ing disease in humans and animals. Living materials Endocrine organs; relationship to control of the will be used as much as possible. Prereq: one year internal environment, growth, development, and of zoology. Lab. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) adaptation to external environment. Prereq: vertebrate anatomy; physiology; organic chemistry. 723. CELL PHYSIOLOGY 4cr. Principles of chemistry and physics applied to understanding cell structure and function. Metabolic 707. HUMAN GENETICS reactions and their control in relation to cell orga- Inheritance patterns; gene and chromosome mu- nization; genesis and function of specialized cells. tation rates and effects; linkage and gene frequency. Prereq: organic chemistry. Lab. 4 cr. Prereq: prin of genetics or equivalent; /or permission. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) 728. DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY OF THE INVERTEBRATES 711. NATURAL HISTORY OF COLD- Principles of animal development including a mod- BLOODED VERTEBRATES ern discussion of the cellular processing of devel- Classes of poikilothermic vertebrates; their habits, opmental information and a panoramic view of habitats, and life histories in eastern North Amer- reproduction and development in the invertebrates. ica. Prereq: general zoology; vert morph. Lab. 4 cr. Prereq: prin of zool or intro to invert zool. Lab. 4cr. 712. MAMMALOGY Origins, diversification, reproduction, ecology, 730. VERTEBRATE HISTOLOGY behavior of mammals. Identification of local Microscopic anatomy of vertebrate tissues and or- forms. Prereq: prin of zool; vert morph. Lab. 4 cr. gans at the light microscope level; emphasis mammalian histology; some comparative study of 713. ANIMAL BEHAVIOR lower vertebrates. Prereq: hum anat and phys, vert Individual and social behavior. The role of anat- morph, or equivalent. Lab. 4 cr. omy, physiology, ecology, and prior experience. Techniques and practical application. Prereq: one 732. SOIL ZOOLOGY year of zoology. Lab. 4 cr. Faunal communities of terrestrial soils, their ecology and natural history. Effects of animal activities 715. NATURAL HISTORY OF MARINE on soil processes and composition. Collection, ex- INVERTEBRATES traction, and study methods. Independent projects. Field and laboratory course; inshore marine inver- Prereq: gen ecol or equivalent; permission. 4 cr. tebrate metazoan animals of northern New Eng- (Not offered every year.) land. Identification, classification, habitat preferences, and behavior. Work (collection and 740. BIOLOGY OF ANIMAL observation) constitutes a major part of the course. REGENERATION Some travel expense. Prereq: general zoology. 6 cr. Principles of regeneration in various animal phyla. (Summer only; not offered every year.) Discussion of experimental studies supplemented by laboratory work with living animals. Prereq: 717. GENERAL LIMNOLOGY prin zool. Lab. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) Special relationships of freshwater organisms to the chemical, physical, and biological aspects of the 751. ADAPTATIONS OF MARINE aquatic environment. Factors regulating the distri- ORGANISMS bution of organisms and primary and secondary Ecological physiology of selected algae and inver- productivity of lake habitats. Prereq: gen ecol; /or tebrates from the Gulf of Maine. Offered at the equivalent. 4 cr. Shoals Marine Lab (Isles of Shoals) in cooperation with Cornell University. Prereq: field marine sci-

110 Zoology

ence, plant or animal physiology, physiological ing Practices; T) Underwater Research. Students ecology; understanding of chemical quantitative may elect one or more sections for advanced study. methods and analysis. 4 cr. (Summer Session Reading, laboratory work, organized seminars, only.) and/or conferences. Prereq: permission. (Limit of 12 cr. from the sections of this course.) 1-4 cr. 753. MARINE VERTEBRATES Lectures, laboratories, and field work on the sys- 803. MARINE ECOLOGY tematics, ecology, and physiology of fishes, marine Marine environment and its biota, emphasizing in- reptiles, marine birds, and marine mammals of the tertidal and estuarine habitats. Includes field, lab- Gulf of Maine. Offered at the Shoals Marine Lab oratory, and independent research project. Prereq: (Isles of Shoals) in cooperation with Cornell Uni- gen ecol; permission. Marine invert zool, oceanog, versity. Prereq: field marine science or vertebrate and statistics are desirable. 4 cr. (Not offered every biology. 4 cr. (Summer Session only.) year.)

772. FISHERIES BIOLOGY 808. STREAM ECOLOGY Information and techniques used by fisheries biol- Ecological relationships of organisms in flowing ogists. Emphasis on fish life history, ecology, and water. Lectures on physical and chemical features economics as related to management techniques. of streams, floral and faunal communities, and fac- Prereq: Zool 711 or equivalent; permission. Lab. tors controlling populations of benthic inverte- 4cr. brates. Streams as ecosystems. Laboratory exercises employ both field and laboratory exper- 774. SALMONID BIOLOGY AND imental techniques. Occasional Saturday field trips. CULTURE Weekly seminars on original research papers. 4 cr. Emphasis on the most important North American (Not offered every year.) species of salmonids; life histories, anatomy, physiology, stocks of fishes, hatcheries, water quality 811. FRESHWATER ZOOPLANKTON requirements, economics, and politics. Closed- ECOLOGY cycle culture techniques. Occasional Saturday field Methods of sampling populations; factors regulat- trips. Prereq: permission. 4 cr. ing temporal and spaciaf distribution; trophic interactions of communities, role in nutrient cycle of 775. INVERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY lakes. Experimental techniques employed in field Comparative study of reproduction and early de- trips to freshwater habitats. Seminars examine cur- velopment in selected invertebrates, providing a rent research. Prereq: gen ecol and limnology, Zool classical approach to morphology of gonads, fer- 717, or equivalent; permission. 4 cr. (Not offered tilization, cleavage, gastrulation, and formation of every year.) larvae. Prereq: field marine sci (UNH), Biol Sci. 364 (Cornell), or invertebrate zoology. Offered at 815. POPULATION ECOLOGY the Shoals Marine Lab (Isles of Shoals) in cooper- Dynamics of population growth; effects of age, ation with Cornell University. 4 cr. (Summer Ses- structure, predation, and competition; measures of sion only; not offered every year.) community interaction. Prereq: permission. Lab. 4 cr. 777. INTRODUCTION TO NEUROBIOLOGY 820, 821. ADVANCED INVERTEBRATE The nervous system, with emphasis on vertebrate ZOOLOGY and invertebrate preparations that most clearly Morphology, phylogeny, and natural history of demonstrate the basic concepts of neurobiology. the major invertebrate phyla. Prereq: intro to invert Topics include: structure and function of neurons, zool or equivalent. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) development, cellular basis of behavior (sensory and motor systems), neuropharmacology, and 822. PROTOZOOLOGY neural plasticity (learning). Prereq: prin zool or General biology of protozoa; morphology, physi- permission. 4 cr. ology, natural history, and economic importance. Prereq: Zool 721, 820, or permission. 4 cr. (Not 778. COMPARATIVE offered every year.) NEUROPHYSIOLOGY Designed for students of the behavioral and phys- 824. CONCEPTS AND TECHNIQUES IN iological sciences who wish to understand the basic REPRODUCTIVE BIOLOGY electrophysiological properties of neurons and how Investigations of the reproductive biology of in- they interact. Both invertebrate and vertebrate sys- vertebrate and vertebrate organisms, including tems will be called upon to illustrate principles of gonad and gamete structure and function; genera- synaptic transmission, integration, sensory infor- tion, maintenance, and modulation of gametoge- mation processing, and the control of movement. nesis by environmental and hormonal factors; Prereq: intro to neurobiology or permission. Lab. larval settlement and metamorphosis; and evolu- 4 cr. tionary significance and functional consequences of reproductive cycles in animals. Prereq: permission. 795, 796. SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN 4 cr. ZOOLOGY B) Ecology; C) Endocrinology; D) Evolution; 826. COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY E) Developmental Biology; F) Genetics; G) His- Nutrition, metabolism, neural function, reproduc- tology; H) History of Zoology; I) Invertebrate Zo- tion and homeostatic mechanisms of animals, es- ology; J) Physiology; K) Vertebrate Zoology; pecially invertebrates. Prereq: Zool 723; permis- L) Zoogeography; M) Zoological Techniques; sion. 4 cr. (Not offered every year.) N) Parasitology; O) Histochemistry; P) Protozool- ogy; Q) Systematics; R) Animal Behavior; S) Teach-

Ill Zoology

895, 896. ADVANCED STUDIES IN ZOOLOGY Course sections for advanced work, individual or group seminar. May include reading, laboratory work, organized seminars, and conferences. Prereq: permission of department chairperson and staff concerned. (Sections are the same as those hsted under Zool 795, 796.) (Limit of 12 cr. from sections of this course.) 1-4 cr.

897, 898. ZOOLOGY SEMINAR Reports on recent zoological literature. Subject fields are those listed under Zool 795, 796; not all areas available every semester. Required of graduate students in zoology. cr. Cr/F.

899. MASTER'S THESIS Prereq: permission of department chairperson and prospective supervisor. 6-10 cr.

999. DOCTORAL RESEARCH

112 Trustees and Principal Officers of the University

University System of Gretchen Taylor, A.B. Meriden, N.H. (1979-1985) New Hampshire Howard C. Townsend Commissioner of Agriculture Trustees Lebanon, N.H. (ex officio)

Officers of the Board Principal Officers of Richard A. Morse, J.D. Administration Chairman of the Board (1971-1985) Manchester, N.H. Evelyn E. Handler, Ph.D.

Paul J. Holloway, B.S. President Vice Chairman of the Board Gordon A. Haaland, Ph.D. Exeter, (1972-1984) N.H. Vice President for Academic Affairs Elisabeth McLane-Bradley, B.A. Frank J. Bachich, B.S. Secretary of the Board Vice President for Financial Affairs and Administration Hanover, N.H. (1979-1984) Raymond L. Erickson, Ph.D. L. Sanders, B.A., Wilfred Jr., J.D. Dean of the Graduate School; Associate Vice President Legal Adviser to the Board for Academic Affairs Hampton, N.H. (1979-1983) Kurt C. Feltner, Ph.D. Dean of the College of Life Sciences and Agriculture; Members of the Board Director of the Agricultural Experiment Station Stuart H. Palmer, Ph.D.

His Excellency Hugh J. Gallen, LL.D. Dean of the College of Liberal Arts Governor of New Hampshire Otis J. Sproul, Sc.D. Littleton, N.H. (ex officio) Dean of the College of Engineering and Physical Lillian K. Bailey, Ed.M. Sciences N.H. (1981-1985) Etna, Dwight R. Ladd, Ph.D. Marilyn A. Baldwin, Ph.D. Dean of the Whittemore School of Business and Hanover, N.H. (1980-1983) Economics

Robert L. Brunelle, Ed.D. Basil J. F. Mott, Ph.D. Commissioner ot Education Dean of the School of Health Studies Concord, N.H. (ex officio) J. Gregg Sanborn, M.Ed. Jere A. Chase, M.Ed., LL.D. Dean for Student Affairs Madbury, N.H. (1976-1984) Lennard A. Fisk, Jr. Jonathan M. Cohen Director of Research Student Member Stanwood C. Fish, M.A. University of New Hampshire Director of Admissions Peterborough, N.H. (1982-1983) Maynard C. Heckel, Ed.D. Stacey W. Cole Director of the Cooperative Extension Service Swanzey, N.H. (1974-1982) Edward J. Durnall, Ed.D. Joseph S. Gaziano Director of the Division of Continuing Education Epping, N.H. (1981-1985) Donald E. Vincent, Ph.D. Mary Louise Hancock, B.A. University Librarian Concord, N.H. (1979-1983) Stephanie M. Thomas, M.A. Evelyn E. Handler, Ph.D. Registrar President, University of New Hampshire Durham, N.H. (ex officio)

Richard J. Horan, B.S. Concord, N.H. (1977-1985) Marion C. Beckwith, M.Ed. Durham, N.H. (1982-1986) Kasper C. Marking, Ed.D. President, Plymouth State College Plymouth, N.H. (ex officio) Stanley C. Olsen, B.B.A., Bedford, N.H. (1980-84)

Newell J. Paire, M.Ed., L.H.D. Concord, N.H. (1979-1983)

J. Herman Pouliot, B.A. Nashua, N.H. (1979-1983)

Barbara J. Seelye, Ph.D. President, Keene State College Keene, N.H. (ex officio) Stuart N. Shaines, B.S., M.B.A. Dover, N.H. (1979-1983)

113 Faculty of the Graduate School

Aikins, Janet (1979) Baum, William M. (1977) Assistant Professor of English; Ph.D., University of Associate Professor of Psychology; Ph.D., Harvard Chicago, 1980. University, 1966.

Alexander, Lori A. (1981) Beasley, Wayne M. (1957) Assistant Professor of Physical Education; Ph.D., Ohio Associate Professor of Materials Science; S.M., State University, 1980. Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1965.

Allmendinger, E. Eugene (1958) Bechtell, Homer F., Jr. (1966) Associate Professor of Naval Architecture and Director Professor of Mathematics; Ph.D., University of of Marine Operations; M.S., University of New Wisconsin, 1963. Hampshire, 1950. Bennett, Albert B., Jr. (1967) Amell, Alexander R. (1955) Associate Professor of Mathematics; Ed.D., University Professor of Chemistry; Ph.D., University of of Michigan, 1966. 1950. Wisconsin, Bergeron, R. Daniel (1974) Amsden, Katherine (1967) Associate Professor of Computer Science; Ph.D., Associate Professor of Physical Education; Ph.D., Brown University, 1973. University California, 1967. of Southern Berndtson, William E. (1979) Andersen, Kenneth K. (1960) Assistant Professor of Animal Science; Ph.D., Cornell Professor of Chemistry; Ph.D., University of University, 1971. 1959. Minnesota, Birch, Francis S. (1972) Anderson, Franz E. (1967) Associate Professor of Earth Sciences; Ph.D., Princeton Professor of Geology; Ph.D., University of University, 1969. 1967.^ Washington, Bishop, Paul L. (1972) Andrew, Michael D. (1966) Professor of Civil Engineering; Ph.D., Purdue Associate Professor of Education; Ed.D., Harvard University, 1972. 1969. University, Blakemore, Richard P. (1977) Andrews, Richard A. (1959) Associate Professor of Microbiology; Ph.D., University Professor of Resource Economics; Ph.D., University of of Massachusetts, 1975. Minnesota, 1959. Blanchard, Fletcher, A., Jr. (1950) Annis, William H. (1962) Professor of Electrical Engineering; M.S., Lehigh Professor of Occupational Education; Ed.D., Cornell University, 1950. University, 1961. Blanchard, Robert O. (1972) Antonak, Richard F. (1975) Associate Professor of Plant Pathology; Ph.D., Associate Professor of Education; Ed.D., Temple University of Georgia, 1971. University, 1975. Bobick, Melvin T. (1958) Arnoldy, Roger L. (1967) Professor of Sociology; Ph.D., University of Illinois, Professor of Physics; Ph.D., University of Minnesota, 1958. 1962. Bogle, A. Linn (1970) Ashley, Charles H. (1969) Associate Professor of Botany; Ph.D., University of Associate Professor of Education; Ed.D., Boston Minnesota, 1968. University, 1969. Bolian, Charles (1971) Azzi, Victor D. (1979) Associate Professor of Anthropology; Ph.D., Adjunct Professor of Civil Engineering; D. Eng., Yale University of Illinois, 1975. University, 1961. Bonnice, William E. (1962) Baker, Alan L. (1972) Associate Professor of Mathematics; Ph.D., University Associate Professor of Botany; Ph.D., University of of Washington, 1962. Minnesota, 1973. Borror, Arthur C. (1961) Balling, L. Christian (1967) Professor of Zoology; Ph.D., Florida State University, Professor of Physics; Ph.D., Harvard University, 1965. 1961.

Balomenos, Richard H. (1961) Bothner, Wallace A. (1967) Professor of Mathematics Education; Ed.D., Harvard Professor of Geology; Ph.D., University of Wyoming, University, 1961. 1967.

Barber, Richard W. (1981) Bowman, James S. (1971) Assistant Professor of Business Administration; Ph.D., Associate Professor of Entomology and Extension Harvard University, 1975. Entomologist; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin, 1958.

Barlow, Robert F. (1962) Boy, Angelo V. (1965) Professor of Economics and Administration; Ph.D., Professor of Education; Ed.D., Boston University, Fletcher School of Law and Diplomacy, Tufts 1960. University, 1960. Boynton, Jason E. (1966) Barrett, James P. (1962) Associate Professor of Education; M.Ed., University of Professor of Forest Biometrics and Genetics; Ph.D., New Hampshire, 1952. Duke University, 1962. Braff, Allan J. (1965) Bauer, Christopher F. (1981) Associate Professor of Economics; Ph.D., University ot Assistant Professor of Chemistry; Ph.D., Colorado Wisconsin, 1959. State University, 1979. Broderick, Dale G. (1974) Associate Professor of Business Administration; Ph.D., Columbia University, 1973.

114 Brown, Warren R. (1972) Chu, Yen-hsi (1977) Associate Professor of Political Science; Ph.D., Assistant Professor of Civil Engineering; Sc.D., Claremont Graduate School, 1976. Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1972.

Brown, Wendell S. (1974) Chupp, Edward L. (1962) Associate Professor of Earth Sciences; Ph.D., Professor of Physics; Ph.D.. University of California at Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1971. Berkeley, 1954.

Bryce, Jennifer W. (1981) Cioffi, Grant L. (1980) Assistant Professor of Home Economics; Ed.D., Assistant Professor of Education; Ph.D., University of Columbia University, 1980. Minnesota, 1980.

Buckley, Walter F. (1971) Clark, Charles E. (1967) Professor of Sociology; Ph.D., University of Professor of History; Ph.D., Brown University, 1966. Wisconsin. 1958. Clark, Mary Morris (1978) Bullock, Wilbur L. (1948) Assistant Professor of English; Ph.D., University of Professor of Zoology; Ph.D., University of Illinois, Massachusetts, 1978. 1948. Clark, Ronald R. (1957) Burger, John F. (1977) Professor of Electrical Engineering; Ph.D., Syracuse Assistant Professor of Entomology; Ph.D., University University, 1963. of Arizona, 1971. Cohen, Allan R. (1967) Burt, John M., Jr. (1974) Professor of Organizational Behavior; D.B.A., Harvard Associate Professor of Administration; Ph.D., Graduate School of Business Administration, 1967. Carnegie-Mellon University, 1969. Cohn, Ellen S. (1978) Burton, David M. (1959) Assistant.Professor of Psychology; Ph.D., Temple Professor of Mathematics; Ph.D., University of University, 1978. Rochester, 1961. Collins, Walter M. (1951) Byers, Gordon L. (1956) Professor of Animal Science and Genetics; Ph.D.. Iowa Professor of Soil and Water Science; M.S. A., Ontario State University, 1960. Agricultural College, 1950. Condon, William C. (1976) Cady, Roger A. (1982) Associate Professor of Animal Science and Assistant Profesor of Animal Science; Ph.D., Cornell Reproductive Physiologist; Ph.D., University of University. 1980, Massachusetts, 1975.

Calarco,John R. (1981) Congdon, Robert G. (1952) Research Associate Professor of Physics; Ph.D., Adjunct Associate Professor of Psychology; Ed.D., University of Illinois, 1969. Harvard University, 1961.

Callan, Richard J. (1969) Constantine, Kenneth B. (1981) Professor of Spanish; Ph.D., St. Louis University, Assistant Professor of Mathematics; Ph.D., Purdue 1965. University, 1981.

Carney, John J. (1973) Conte, Michael A. (1978) Associate Professor of Education; Ph.D., Syracuse Assistant Professor of Economics; Ph.D., University of University, 1973. Michigan, 1979.

Carnicelli, Thomas A. (1967) Copeland, Arthur H., Jr. (1968) Professor of English; Ph.D., Harvard University, 1966. Professor of Mathematics; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1954. Carroll, John E. (1974) Associate Professor of Environmental Conservation; Corcoran, Ellen P. (1972) Ph.D., Michigan State University, 1974. Associate Professor of Education; Ph.D., New York University, 1972. Carter, Gavin H. (1965) Associate Professor of Physical Education; Ph.D., Corell, Robert W. (1957-60, 1964) University of Oregon, 1958. Director of UNH Marine Program, Director of Sea Grant Program, and Professor of Mechanical Casas, R. Alberto (1952) Engineering; Ph.D., Case Institute of Technology, Professor of Spanish; Ph.D., Columbia University, 1964. 1954. Craig, Robert E. (1966) Celikkol, Barbaros (1969) Associate Professor of Political Science; Ph.D.. Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering; Ph.D., University of North Carolina, 1971. University of New Hampshire, 1972. Croker, Robert A. (1966) Chaltas,John G. (1967) Professor of Zoology; Ph.D.. Emory University, 1966. Associate Professor of Education; Ed.D., Columbia University, 1957. Crow, Garrett E. (1975) Associate Professor of Botany; Ph.D., Michigan State Chandler, Donald S. (1981) University, 1974. Assistant Professor of Entomology and Curator; Ph.D., Ohio State University, 1976. Darr, Ginny W. (1978) Assistant Professor of Animal Science; Ph.D., Chasteen, N. Dennis (1972) University of Colorado, 1975. Professor of Chemistry; Ph.D., University of Illinois, 1969. Davis, James R. (1970) Associate Professor of Psychology; Ph.D., University Chesbro, William R. (1959) of Wisconsin, 1969. Professor of Microbiology; Ph.D., Illinois Institute of Technology, 1959.

115 ! Davis, Robert I. (1975) Engalichev, Nicolas (1963) Adjunct Professor of Geology; Ph.D., University of Professor of Resource Economics and Extension Michigan. 1954. Economist; M.S., State University of New York College of Forestry at Syracuse, 1960. Dawson, Carl (1970) Professor of English; Ph.D., Columbia University, England, Richard W. (1976) 1966. Associate Professor of Economics; Ph.D., University of Michigan, 1974. Dawson, John F. (1968) Professor ot Physics; Ph.D., Stanford University, 1963. Erickson, Raymond L. (1963) Dean of the Graduate School, Associate Vice President De Alba, Pedro A. (1977) for Affairs, and Professor Associate Professor of Civil Engineering; Ph.D., Academic of Psychology; Ph.D., University of California at Los Angeles, 1962. University of California at Berkeley, 1975. Estes, George O. (1969) Demeritt, Maurice E., Jr. (1981) Professor of Plant Adjunct Assistant Professor of Forest Genetics; Ph.D., Science; Ph.D., Oregon State University, 1969. Pennsylvania State University, 1972. Etebari, Ahmad (1980) DePorte, Michael V. (1972) Assistant Professor of Business Administration; Ph.D., Professor of English; Ph.D., Stanford University, 1966. North Texas State University, 1979. Diefendorf, Jeffry M. (1976) Fairchild, Associate Professor of History; Ph.D., University of Thomas P. (1969) Professor ot Animal Science and Genetics and California at Berkeley, 1975. Extension Dairyman; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin, Diller, L. Ann (1973) 1964. Associate Professor of Education; Ed.D., Harvard University, 1971. Fan, Stephen S. T. (1962) Professor of Chemical Engineering; Ph.D., Stanford Diller, Karl C. (1972) University, 1962. Professor of English; Ph.D., Harvard University, 1967. Farag, Ihab H. (1976) Dingman, S. Lawrence (1975) Associate Professor of Chemical Engineering; Sc.D., Associate Professor of Water Resources; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1976. Harvard University, 1970. Farber, Florence E. (1981) Dishman, Robert B. (1951) Assistant Professor of Microbiology and Genetics; Professor of Political Science; Ph.D., Princeton Ph.D., Columbia University, 1966. University, 1948. Federer, C. Anthony (1970) Peter Dodge, (1964) Adjunct Associate Professor of Micrometeorology; Associate Professor of Sociology; Ph.D., Harvard Ph.D., University of Wisconsin, 1964. University, 1961. Feltner, Kurt C. (1979) Dolan, Elizabeth M. (1980) Dean of the College of Life Sciences and Agriculture, Assistant Professor of Home Economics; Ph.D., Director of the Agricultural Experiment Station, and Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University, Professor of Plant Science; Ph.D., University of 1980. Arizona, 1962. Downs, Richard E. (1962) Fernald, Peter S. (1966) Associate Professor of Anthropology; Ph.D., Associate Professor of Psychology; Ph.D., Purdue University of Leiden, 1956. University, 1963. Draves, David D. (1964) Fink, Stephen L. (1969) Associate Professor of Education; Ph.D., University of Professor of Organizational Behavior; Ph.D., Case Wisconsin, 1957. Western Reserve University, 1959. Drew, William H. (1956) Fisher, G. Thomas (1969) Associate Dean of the Graduate School and Professor of Associate Professor of Entomology and Extension Resource Economics; Ph.D., Vanderbilt University, Entomologist; Ph.D., Rutgers University, 1954. 1961. Fisher, Lester A. (1968) Durgin, Owen B. (1951) Assistant Professor of English; Ph.D., Brown Professor of Resource University Economics; M.A., of University, 1976. New Hampshire, 1951. Fisk, Lennard A., Jr. (1977) Durnall, Edward J. (1966) Director ot Research and Professor of Physics; Ph.D., Director of the Division of Continuing Education and University of California at San Diego, 1969. Associate Professor of Education; Ed.D., Oregon State Forbes, F. University, 1953. William (1970) Associate Professor of Spanish; Ph.D., University of Durrell, Donald D. (1973) Arizona, 1971. Adjunct Professor of Education; Ed.D., Harvard E. University, 1930. Foret,John (1967)

Associate Professor of Zoology; Ph.D , Princeton East, Linda D. (1979) University, 1966 Assistant Professor of Spanish; M.A., Stanford Francq, N. University, 1975. Edward (1965) Associate Professor of Zoology; Ph.D., Pennsylvania Eckert, Robert T. (1978) State University, 1967. Assistant Professor of Forest Genetics; Ph.D., Ohio Franzosa, Susan D. State University, 1978. (1979) Assistant Professor of Education; Ph.D., State Edwards, Ruth S. (1966) University of New York at Buffalo, 1979. Associate Professor of Music; M.M., Northwestern University, 1950.

116 Freuder, Eugene C. (1977) Haaland, Gordon A. (1965-74, 1979) Associate Professor of Computer Science; Ph.D., Vice President for Academic Affairs and Professor of Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1975. Psychology; Ph.D., State University of New York at Buffalo, 1966. Frick, George E. (1957) Adjunct Professor of Resource Economics; M.S., Hadwin, Donald W. (1977) University of Connecticut, 1947. Associate Professor of Mathematics; Ph.D., Indiana University, 1975. Frost, Albert D. (1957) Professor of Electrical Engineering; Sc.D., Hageman, Elizabeth (1971) Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1952. Associate Professor of English; Ph.D., University of North Carolina, 1971. Fuld, Kenneth (1979) Assistant Professor of Psychology; Ph.D., Dartmouth Hagstrom, Earl C. (1965) College, 1976. Associate Professor of Psychology; Ph.D., Brown University, 1957. Galvin, Maryanne (1981) Assistant Professor of Education; Ed.D., University of Haley, Russell (1975) Massachusetts, 1980. Professor of Administration; Ph.D., Union Graduate School, 1974. Garrett, Peter W. (1970) Adjunct Assistant Professor of Forest Genetics; Ph.D., Hall, Francine S. (1980) University of Michigan, 1969. Assistant Professor of Business Administration; Ph.D., University of Toronto, 1975. Gaudard, Marie A. (1977) Assistant Professor of Mathematics; Ph.D., University Hall, Francis R. (1964) of Massachusetts, 1977. Professor of Hydrology; Ph.D., Stanford University, 1961. Gaudette, Henri E. (1965) Professor of Geology; Ph.D., University of Illinois, Hamilton, Lawrence C. (1977) 1963. Assistant Professor of Sociology; Ph.D., University of Colorado, 1978. Geeslin, William E. (1972) Associate Professor of Mathematics; Ph.D., Stanford Handler, Evelyn E. (1980) University, 1973. President and Professor of Zoology; Ph.D., New York University, 1963. Gerhard, Glen C. (1967) Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering; Ph.D., Haney, James F. (1972) Ohio State University, 1963. Associate Professor of Zoology; Ph.D., University of Toronto, 1970. Gill, Gregory D. (1977) Assistant Professor of Occupational Education; Ph.D., Hansen, Jane A. (1979) Colorado State University, 1977. Assistant Professor of Education; Ph.D., University of Minnesota, 1979. Gilmore, Robert C. (1952) Professor of History; Ph.D., Yale University, 1954. Hansen, Larry J. (1973) Associate Professor of Home Economics; Ph.D., Glanz, Filson H. (1965) Florida State University, 1973. Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering; Ph.D., Stanford University, 1965. Hapgood, Robert (1965) Professor of English; Ph.D., University of California, Goodman, Richard H. (1976) 1955. Adjunct Associate Professor of Education; Ed.D., Harvard University. 1961. Harel, Dov (1980) Assistant Professor of Computer Science; Ph.D., Goodspeed, Charles H. (1978) University ot California at Irvine, 1980. Associate Professor of Civil Engineering; Ph.D.,

University of Cincinnati, 1972. Harrington, Barry J. (1975) Associate Professor of Physics; Ph.D., Harvard Gordon, Bernard K. (1971) University, 1975. Professor of Political Science; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1959. Harris, Larry G. (1969) Associate Professor of Zoology; Ph.D., University of Grant, Clarence L. (1961) California, 1970. Professor of Chemistry; Ph.D., Rutgers University, 1960. Harter, Robert D. (1969) Associate Professor of Soil Chemistry; Ph.D., Purdue Graulich, Melody (1978) University, 1966. Assistant Professor of English; Ph.D., University of

Virginia, 1979. Hebert, David J. (1967) Associate Professor of Education; Ph.D., Kent State Graves, Donald H. (1973) University, 1967. Professor of Education; Ed.D., State University of New York at BufTalo, 1973. Heckel, Maynard C. (1971) Associate Dean of the College of Life Sciences and Green, Donald M. (1967) Agriculture, Director of Cooperative Extension, and Professor of Biochemistry and Genetics; Ph.D., Professor of Adult Education; Ed.D., Cornell University of Rochester, 1958. University, 1961. Greenwood, Peter H. (1977) Heilbronner, Hans (1954) Assistant Professor of Resource Economics; Ph.D., Professor of History; Ph.D., University of Michigan, Brown University, 1974. 1954. Grass, David L. (1974) Heisenberg, Jochen (1978) Associate Professor of Civil Engineering; Ph.D., Professor of Physics; Doctor, University of Hamburg, Purdue University, 1976. 1966.

117 Reiser, John B. (1980) Hylton, Walter E. (1976) Director of Shoals Marine Laboratory and Adjunct Associate Professor of Animal Science; V.M.D., Assistant Professor of Zoology; Ph.D., Cornell University of Pennsylvania, 1970. University. 1979. Ikawa, Miyoshi (1963) Henry, Robert M. (1980) Professor of Biochemistry; Ph.D., University of Assistant Professor of Civil Engineering; Ph.D., Wisconsin, 1948. University of Pennsylvania, 1980. Irish, James D. (1979) Associate Professor of Earth Sciences; Ph.D., Herbst, Edward J. (1962) Research Professor of Biochemistry; Ph.D., University of University of California at San Diego, 1971. Wisconsin, 1949. Irwin, Manley R. (1963) Herold, Marc W. (1975) Professor of Economics; Ph.D., Michigan State Associate Professor of Economics; Ph.D., University, 1963. 1977. University of California at Berkeley, Jacoby, A. Robb (1961) Hettinger, Stanley D. (1965) Professor of Mathematics; Ph.D., University of Associate Professor of Music and Band Director; Chicago. 1946. M.M.E., Vander-Cook College, 1966. Jahnke, Leland S. (1977) Hill, John L. (1964) Associate Professor of Botany;, Ph.D., University of Professor of Wood Science and Technology; D.F., Yale Minnesota, 1973. University, 1954. James, Marion E. (1955) Hochgraf, Frederick G. (1958) Associate Professor of History; Ph.D., Harvard Associate Professor of Materials Science; M.S., Cornell University, 1955. University, 1958. Jansen, Edmund F., Jr. (1969) Hocker, Harold W., Jr. (1955) Professor of Resource Economics; Ph.D., North Professor of Forest Resources and Genetics; D.F., Duke Carolina State University, 1966. University. 1955. Janson, Colette H. (1981) Hoff, Phyllis A. (1967) Assistant Professor of Home Economics; Ph.D., Associate Professor of Physical Education; Ph.D., University of New Hampshire, 1980. California, 1967. University of Southern Jaworski, Gary W. (1979) Hollweg, Joseph V. (1980) Assistant Professor of Civil Engineering; Ph.D., Research Associate Professor of Physics; Ph.D., University of California at Berkeley, 1979. Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1968. Jellison, Charles A., Jr. (1956) Holter, James B. (1963) Professor of History; Ph.D., University of Virginia, Professor of Animal Science; Ph.D., Pennsylvania State 1956. University, 1962. Johnson, Paul C. (1979) Hoornbeek, Frank K. (1964) Assistant Professor of Entomology; Ph.D., Cornell Professor of Zoology and Genetics; Ph.D.. Oregon University, 1974. State University. 1964. Jones, Galen E. (1966) Hornbeck, James W. (1979) Professor of Microbiology; Ph.D., Rutgers University, Adjunct Associate Professor of Forest Hydrology; 1956. University of York College of Ph.D.. State New Jones, Paul R. (1956) Syracuse. 1973. Environmental Science and Forestry at Professor of Chemistry; Ph.D., University of Illinois, Horrigan, James O. (1966) 1956. Administration; Ph.D., Forbes Professor of Business Jones, William R. (1962) University of Chicago, 1967. Professor of History; Ph.D., Harvard University, 1958.

Houston, Robert E., Jr. (1957) Kaen, Fred R. (1973) Professor of Physics; Ph.D., Pennsylvania State Associate Professor of Finance; Ph.D.. University of University, 1957. Michigan, 1972.

Howard, Cleveland L. (1969) Kalinowski, Michael F. (1980) Boston Associate Professor of Music; D.M.A., Assistant Professor of Home Economics; Ed.D., University, 1969. University of Massachusetts. 1976.

Howard, Theodore E. (1981) Kaufmann, Richard L. (1963) Ph.D., Assistant Professor of Forest Economics; Professor of Physics; Ph.D.. Yale University. 1960. Oregon State University, 1981. Kayser, John R. (1969) Howell, W. Huntting, (1980) Associate Professor of Political Science; Ph.D., Assistant Professor of Zoology; Ph.D., University of Claremont Graduate School and University Center. Rhode Island. 1980. 1969.

Hoyle, Merrill C. (1972) Kennard,Jean E. (1975) Adjunct Assistant Professor of Plant Science; Ph.D., Professor of English; Ph.D., University of California at University of New Hampshire, 1971. Berkeley, 1968.

Hubbard, Colin D. (1967) Kertzer, Robert (1965) Professor of Chemistry; Ph.D., University of Sheffield, Associate Professor of Physical Education; Ph.D., 1964. Michigan State University, 1965.

Hurd, Richard W. (1973) Khleif, Bud B. (1967) Associate Professor of Economics; Ph.D., Vanderbilt Professor of Sociology; Ph.D.. Johns Hopkins University, 1972. University. 1957.

118 Kiang, Yun-Tzu (1970) Lee, Thomas D. (1980) Associate Professor of Plant Science and Genetics; Assistant Professor of Botany; Ph.D., University of Ph.D., University of California at Berkeley, 1970. Ilhnois at Urbana, 1980.

Kimball, Roland B. (1963) Leighton, Charles H. (1956) Professor of Education; Ed.D.. Harvard University, Professor of Spanish; Ph.D., Harvard University, 1961. 1958. Lewis, Frederick, C. (1976) Klotz, Louis H. (1965) Associate Professor of Communication Disorders; Associate Professor of Civil Engineering; Ph.D., Ph.D., Ohio University, 1970.

Rutgers University, 1967. Lieber, Rochelle (1981) Koch, David W. (1971) Assistant Professor of English; Ph.D., Massachusetts Associate Professor of Plant Science; Ph.D., Colorado Institute of Technology, 1980. State University, 1971. Limber, John E. (1971) Kole, Michael (1977) Associate Professor of Psychology; Ph.D., University Assistant Professor of Business Administration; Ph.D., of Illinois at Urbana, 1969.

University of Massachusetts, 1978. Limbert, David E. (1969) Komonchak, Bernadette (1976) Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering; Ph.D., Assistant Professor of Spanish; Ph.D., University of Case Western Reserve University, 1969,

Arizona, 1974. Lindberg, Gary H. (1974) Korbel,JohnJ. (1966) Professor of English; Ph.D., Stanford University, 1967. Business Administration; Professor of Economics and Linden, Allen B. (1963) Ph.D., Harvard University, 1959. Associate Professor of History; Ph.D., Columbia Kraft, L. Gordon (1978) University, 1969. Engineering; Ph.D., Assistant Professor of Electrical Lindsay, Bruce E. (1976) University of Connecticut, 1977. Associate Professor of Resource Economics; Ph.D., Kuo, Shan S. (1964) University of Massachusetts, 1976. Yale Professor of Computer Science; D. Eng., Linsky, Arnold S. (1966) University, 1958. Professor of Sociology; Ph.D., University of LaBay, Duncan (1980) Washington, 1966. Administration; Ph.D., Assistant Professor of Business Lockwood, John A. (1948) University of Michigan, 1979. Professor of Physics; Ph.D., Yale University, 1948.

LaCourse, John R. (1980) Loder, Theodore C, III (1972) Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering; Ph.D., Associate Professor of Earth Sciences; Ph.D., University of Connecticut, 1981. University of Alaska, 1971.

Ladd, Dvtright R. (1964) Logan, Terence P. (1968) Dean of the Whittemore School of Business and Professor of English; Ph.D., Harvard University, 1966. Economics and Professor of Business Administration; Long, David F. (1948) DBA., Harvard University, 1956. Professor of History; Ph.D., Columbia University, Laird, Jo (1979) 1950. Assistant Professor of Geology; Ph.D., California Loy.J. Brent (1967) Institute of Technology, 1977. Professor of Plant Science and Genetics; Ph.D., Lamb, Richard (1980) Colorado State University, 1967. Assistant Professor of Business Administration; Luloff, Albert E. (1977) M.B.A., Suffolk University, 1971. Associate Professor of Community Development; Lambert, Robert H. (1955-56, 1961) Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University, 1977. Professor of Physics; Ph.D., Harvard University, 1963. Lyons, Harvey (1981) Larson, Barbara K. (1976) Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering; Ph.D., Assistant Professor of Anthropology; Ph.D., Columbia Ohio State University, 1978. University, 1975. Lyons, Wm. Berry (1980) Larson, David L. (1965) Assistant Professor of Earth Sciences; Ph.D., University Associate Professor of Political Science; Ph.D., Fletcher of Connecticut, 1979. School of Law and Diplomacy, Tufts University, 1963. MacHardy, William E. (1972) Latta, R. Michael (1978) Associate Professor of Plant Pathology and Extension Assistant Professor of Psychology; Ph.D., Iowa State Plant Pathologist; Ph.D., University of Rhode Island, University, 1976. 1970.

Lavoie, Marcel E. (1950-52, 1955) Mallory, Bruce L. (1979) Associate Professor of Zoology; Ph.D., Syracuse Assistant Professor of Education; Ph.D., George University, 1956. Peabody College, 1979.

LeRay, Nelson L., Jr. (1966) Martin, Charles W. (1978) Adjunct Professor of Resource Economics; Ed.D., Assistant Professor of Communication Disorders; Cornell University, 1965. Ph.D., Southern Illinois University, 1975.

Leak, William B. (1967) Martin-Diaz, Richard (1979) Adjunct Associate Professor of Forest Resources; M.F., Associate Professor of Administration; Ph.D. Syracuse Syracuse University, 1956. University, 1976. Leary, David E. (1976) Associate Professor of Psychology; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1977.

119 Mathieson, Arthur C. (1965) Mitchell, James R. (1963) Director of the Jackson Estuarine Laboratory and Associate Professor of Plant Science and Extension Professor of Botany; Ph.D.. University of British Agronomist. Forage Crops; Ph.D., Pennsylvania State Columbia, 1965. University. 1969.

Mathur, Virendra K. (1974) Moore, David W. (1972) Associate Professor of Chemical Engineering; Ph.D., Associate Professor of Political Science; Ph.D.. Ohio University of Missouri at Rolla, 1970. State University, 1970.

Mautz, William W. (1969) Morrison, James D. (1965) Professor of Wildlife Ecology; Ph.D., Michigan State Professor of Chemistry; Ph.D., Northwestern University, 1969. University, 1963.

Mayewski, Paul A. (1974) Mosberg, William (1958) Associate Professor of Earth Sciences; Ph.D., Ohio Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering; State University, 1973. M.Eng., Yale University, 1960.

Mazza, Karen A. (1980) Mott, Basil J. F. (1973) Assistant Professor of Education; Ed.D., Boston Dean of the School of Health Studies and Professor of University, 1980. Health Administration and Planning; Ph.D., Harvard University, 1967. McBride, Mekeel (1979) Assistant Professor of English; B.A., Mills College, Mower, Lyman (1957)

1972. Professor of Physics; PhD , Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1953. McCann, Francis D., Jr. (1971) Professor of History: Ph.D.. Indiana University. 1967. Mulhern, John E., Jr. (1954) Professor of Physics; Ph.D., Boston University, 1954. McKeough, D. Michael (1977) Assistant Professor of Physical Education; Ed.D.. Murdoch, Joseph B. (1952) Teachers College, Columbia University, 1977. Professor of Electrical Engineering; Ph.D., Case Institute of Technology, 1962. Mebert, Carolyn J. (1979) Assistant Professor of Psychology; Ph.D., Boston Murray, Donald M. (1963) University, 1979. Professor of English; B.A., University of New Hampshire, 1948. Meeker, Lorcn D. (1970) Professor of Mathematics; Ph.D., Stanford University, Murray, Frederick P. (1966) 1965. Associate Professor of Communication Disorders; Ph.D., University of Denver, 1966. Melvin, Donald W. (1957) Associate Dean of the College of Engineering and Nahin, PaulJ. (1975) Physical Sciences and Associate Professor of Electrical Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering; Ph.D., Engineering; Ph.D., Syracuse University, 1971. University of California at Irvine, 1972.

Menge, Carleton P. (1948) Nevin,John A. (1972) Professor of Education; Ph.D.. University of Chicago, Professor of Psychology; Ph.D., Columbia University. 1948. 1963.

Mennel, Robert M. (1969) Newkirk, Thomas R. (1977) Professor of History; Ph.D., Ohio State University, Assistant Professor of English; Ph.D.. University of 1969. Texas, 1977.

Merenda, Michael J. (1977) Nicoloff, Philip L. (1954) Assistant Professor of Administration; Ph.D., Professor of Enghsh; Ph.D., Columbia University, University of Massachusetts, 1978. 1959.

Merton, Andrew H. (1972) Nielson, Melville (1950) Associate Professor of English; B.A., University of Associate Dean of the College of Liberal Arts and New Hampshire, 1967. Associate Professor of Sociology; Ph.D.. Ohio State University, 1955. Messier, Victor R. (1970) Associate Professor of Home Economics; Ph.D., Nordgren, Eric A. (1964) Pennsylvania State University, 1973. Professor of Mathematics; Ph.D., University of Michigan, 1964. Miller, Donald R. (1977) Assistant Professor of Wildlife Ecology; Ph.D., O'Connell, Lawrence W. (1966) University of Idaho. 1976. Associate Professor of Political Science; Ph.D., Syracuse University, 1968. Miller, Edmund G. (1951) Professor of English; Ph.D.. Columbia University, Oja, Sharon N. (1977) 1955. Associate Professor of Education; Ph.D.. University of Minnesota. 1978. Miller, Walter T., Ill (1979) Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering; Ph.D.. Olson, David P. (1968) Pennsylvania State University. 1977. Professor of Wildlife Management; Ph.D., University of Minnesota, 1964. Mills, Richard L. (1967) Associate Professor of Economics and Business Ossenbruggen, PaulJ. (1975) Administration; Ph.D., Indiana University, 1967. Associate Professor of Civil Engineering; Ph.D.. Carnegie-Mellon University, 1970. Minocha, Subhash C. (1974) Associate Professor of Botany and Genetics; Ph.D., Owens, Charles W. (1963) University of Washington. 1974. Professor of Chemistry; Ph.D., University of Kansas, 1963.

120 Palmer, Stuart H. (1955) Roberts, Betty H. (1974) Dean of the College of Liberal Arts and Professor of Adjunct Associate Professor of Resource Economics; Sociology; Ph.D., Yale University, 1955. Ph.D., Brandeis University, 1975.

Parsons, Alan H. (1979) Roberts, John M. (1979) Assistant Professor of Animal Science; Ph.D., Cornell Assistant Professor of Plant Science and Extension University, 1980. Horticulturist, Turf; Ph.D., Purdue University. 1977.

Peirce, Lincoln C. (1964) Roberts, Lewis, Jr. (1972) Professor of Plant Science and Genetics; Ph.D., Director of Thompson School of Applied Science and University of iVlinnesota, 1958. Associate Professor of Occupational Education; Ed.D.. Auburn University, 1972. Peterson, Nobel K. (1957) Associate Professor of Soil and Water Science; Ph.D., Rogers, John E. (1967) Rutgers University, 1957. Associate Professor of Music; M.F.A., Princeton University, 1966. Pierce, Robert S. (1967) Adjunct Professor of Forestry and Soil and Water Rogers, Owen M. (1959) Science; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin, 1957. Professor of Plant Science and Genetics; Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University, 1959. Pilar, Frank L. (1957) Professor of Chemistry; Ph.D., University of Romoser, George K. (1961-62, 1967) Cincinnati, 1957. Professor of Political Science; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1958. Pilgrim, Sidney A. L. (1979) Adjunct Associate Professor of Soil Sciences; B.S., Rosen, Sam (1957) University of New Hampshire, 1955. Nashua Corporation Professor of Economics; Ph.D., Harvard University, 1952. Pistole, Thomas G. (1971) Associate Professor of Microbiology; Ph.D., University Ross, Shepley L. (1955) of Utah, 1969. Professor of Mathematics; Ph.D., Boston University, 1953. Pokoski,John L. (1967)

Professor of Electrical Engineering; Ph.D., Montana Rothwell, Kenneth J. (1963) State University, 1967. Professor of Economics; Ph.D., Harvard University, 1960. Potasky, Janet L. (1981) Assistant Professor of History; Ph.D., Stanford Routley, Douglas G. (1957) University, 1978. Professor of Plant Science; Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University, 1957. Polk, Keith (1964) Professor of Music; Ph.D., University of California at Rudd,Joel (1980) Berkeley, 1968. Assistant Professor of Home Economics; Ph.D., University of Iowa, 1979. Poll, Solomon (1964) Professor of Sociology; Ph.D., University of Russell, Robert D. (1975) Pennsylvania, 1960. Associate Professor of Computer Science; Ph.D., Stanford University, 1972. Pollard, James E. (1970) Associate Professor of Plant Science; Ph.D., University Rutman, Darrett B. (1968) of Florida, 1969. Professor of History; Ph.D., University of Virginia, 1959. Potter, Hugh M., Ill (1962) Associate Professor of English; Ph.D., University of SafTord, Lawrence O. (1981)

Minnesota, 1965. Adjunct Associate Professor of Forestry; PhD , University of Maine. 1980. Power, Marilyn B. (1979) Assistant Professor of Economics; Ph.D., University of Samuels, Fred (1966) California at Berkeley, 1977. Associate Professor of Sociology; Ph.D., University of Massachusetts, 1966. Puth, Robert C. (1967) Associate Professor of Economics; Ph.D., Sandler, Melvin (1970) Northwestern University, 1967. Associate Professor of Hotel Administration; M.A., Northwestern University, 1947; C.P.A. Radlow, James (1965) Professor of Applied Mathematics; Ph.D., New York Sasner,JohnJ.,Jr. (1965) University, 1957. Professor of Zoology; Ph.D., University of California at Los Angeles, 1965. Rasmussen, Mary H. (1968) Associate Professor of Music; MM., University of Savage, Godfrey H. (1965) Illinois, 1953. Professor of Mechanical Engineering; Ph.D., Stanford University, 1970. Reeves, R. Marcel (1964) Associate Professor of Entomology and Forest Sawyer, Albert K. (1949) Resources; Ph.D., State University of New York Professor of Chemistry; M.S., University of Maine, College of Environmental Science and Forestry at 1947. Syracuse, 1964. Sawyer, Philip J. (1952) Reyna, Stephen P. (1973) Professor of Zoology; Ph.D., University of Michigan, Associate Professor of Anthropology; Ph.D., Columbia 1956. University, 1972. SchibanofT, Susan (1971) Richardson, John C. (1946) Associate Professor of English; Ph.D., University of Professor of English; Ph.D., Boston University, 1959. California at Los Angeles, 1971.

121 I

Schlobohm, Starr (1975) Sitkoff, Harvard (1976) Associate Professor of Business Administration; Ph.D., Associate Professor of History; Ph.D., Columbia New York University, 1980. University, 1975.

Schneer, Cecil J. (1950, 1954) Sivaprasad, Kondagunta (1969) Professor of Geology and the History of Science; Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering; Ph.D., Ph.D., Cornell University, 1954. Harvard University, 1963.

Schreiber, Richard W. (1957) Smith, James A. (1972) Professor of Botany; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin, Associate Dean of the College of Liberal Arts and 1955. Adjunct Associate Professor of Economics; Ph.D., Washington State University, 1967. Schwab, Charles (1975) Associate Professor of Animal Science; Ph.D., Smith, M. Daniel (1967) University of Wisconsin, 1974. Associate Professor of Education; Ed D., Harvard University, 1961. Schwab, Richard L. (1980) Assistant Professor of Education; Ph.D., University of Smith, Mark R. (1966) Connecticut, 1980. Professor of English; B.A., Northwestern University, 1960. Schwarz, Marc L. (1967) Associate Professor of History; Ph.D., University of Smith, Samuel C. (1961) California at Los Angeles, 1965. Professor of Animal Science and Biochemistry; Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University, 1962. Schweickart, Patrocinio (1979) Assistant Professor of English; Ph.D., Ohio State Snell, Elizabeth A. (1971) University, 1979. Associate Professor of Home Economics; Ph.D., Cornell University, 1971. Seitz, W. Rudolf (1976) Associate Professor of Chemistry; Ph.D., Massachusetts Sprague, Linda G. (1969) Institute of Technology, 1970. Professor of Business Administration; D. B. A., Harvard University, 1973. Shapiro, Howard M. (1969)

Associate Professor of Sociology; Ph.D., University of Sproul, Otis J. (1982) Minnesota, 1969. Dean of the College of Engineering and Physical Sciences Professor Civil Engineering; Sc.D., Shar, Albert O. (1971) and of Executive Director of Computer Services and Professor Washington University, 1961. of Mathematics; Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania, Stewart, James A. (1968) 1970. Professor of Biochemistry; Ph.D., University of Connecticut, 1967. Shepard, Harvey K. (1969) Professor of Physics; Ph.D., California Institute of Stone, Deborah E. (1962) Technology, 1966. Associate Professor of Education; Ed.D., Boston University, 1971. Shigo, Alex L. (1966) Adjunct Professor of Plant Pathology; Ph.D., West Straus, Murray A. (1968) Virginia University, 1959. Professor of Sociology; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin, 1956. Shore, Barry (1974) Professor of Administration; Ph.D., University of Strout, Richard G. (1954) Wisconsin, 1968. Professor of Animal Science; Ph.D., University of New Hampshire, 1961. Shore, Samuel D. (1965) Associate Professor of Mathematics; Ph.D., Sundberg, Donald C. (1978) Pennsylvania State University, 1964. Associate Professor of Chemical Engineering; Ph.D., University of Delaware, 1970. Shortle, Walter C. (1976) Adjunct Assistant Professor of Botany; Ph.D., North Sung, Windsor (1980) Carolina State University, 1974. Assistant Professor of Civil Engineering; Ph.D., California Institute of Technology, 1980. Siddall, David V. (1965) Assistant Professor of English; Ph.D., Indiana Swift, M. Robinson (1976) University, 1970. Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering; Ph.D., University of New Hampshire, 1974. Silverman, Robert J. (1962) Professor of Mathematics; Ph.D., University of Illinois, Taft, Charles K. (1967) 1952. Professor of Mechanical Engineering; Ph.D., Case Institute of Technology, 1960. Simic, Charles D. (1973) Professor of English; B.A., New York University, Tagliaferro, Anthony R. (1978) 1967. Assistant Professor of Home Economics; Ph.D., Cornell University, 1978. Simos, Evangelos O. (1977) Assistant Professor of Economics; Ph.D., Northern Taylor, James T. (1977) Illinois University, 1977. Assistant Professor of Zoology; Ph.D., Oregon State University, 1976. Simpson, Robert E. (1963) Associate Professor of Physics; Ph.D., Harvard Thewke, Siegfried E. (1979) University, 1960. Adjunct Assistant Professor of Entomology and State Entomologist; Ph.D., University of Missouri, 1977. Sir, W. Niel (1970) Associate Professor of Music; M.A., University of Thompson, Allen R. (1974) California at Berkeley, 1962. Associate Professor of Economics; Ph.D., University of Texas at Austin, 1973.

122 Thompson, Henry J. (1979) Weathersby, Rita (1978) Associate Professor of Home Economics; Ph.D., Assistant Professor of Administration; Ed. D., Harvard Rutgers University, 1975. University, 1977.

Tillinghast, Edward K. (1967) Webb, Dwight (1967) Associate Professor of Zoology; Ph.D., Duke Associate Professor of Education; Ph.D., Stanford University, 1966. University, 1967.

Tischler, Herbert (1965) Webber, William R. (1969) Professor of Geology; Ph.D., University of Michigan, Professor of Physics; Ph.D., University of Iowa, 1957. 1961. Weber, James H. (1963) Tokay, F. Harry (1973) Professor of Chemistry; Ph.D., Ohio State University, Associate Professor of Communication Disorders; 1963. Ph.D., Michigan State University, 1967. Weiland, Walter E. (1964) Trout, B. Thomas (1969) Associate Professor of Physical Education; Ph.D., Associate Professor of Political Science; Ph.D., Indiana Pennsylvania State University, 1964. University, 1972. Weiner, James L. (1979) Tucker, Charles F. (1979) Assistant Professor of Computer Science; Ph.D., 1979. Adjunct Associate Professor of Law; J. D., Yale Law University of California at Los Angeles, School, 1966. Weisman, Gary R. (1977) Ulrich, Gail D. (1970) Assistant Professor of Chemistry; Ph.D., University of Professor of Chemical Engineering; Sc.D., Wisconsin, 1976. Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1964. Wells, Otho S. (1966) Urban, Willard E., Jr. (1963) Associate Professor of Plant Science and Extension Associate Professor of Biometrics and Genetics; Horticulturist, Vegetables; Ph.D., Rutgers University, Associate Director, Agricultural Experiment Station; 1966. Ph.D., Iowa State University, 1963. Wells, Roger £. (1981) Valentine, Russell L. (1953) Assistant Professor of Animal Science; D.V.M., Ohio Professor of Mechanical Engineering; M.S.M.E., State University, 1972. Purdue University, 1954. Wetiel, William E., Jr. (1967) Van Osdol, Donovan H. (1970) Professor of Business Administration; M.B.A., Professor of Mathematics; Ph.D., University of Illinois, University of Chicago, 1967. 1969. Weyrick, Richard R. (1970) Verrette, Paul F. (1962) Associate Professor of Forest Resources; Ph.D., Associate Professor of Music; M.A., Boston University of Minnesota, 1968. University, 1971. Wheeler, Charles M., Jr. (1950) Vincent, Donald E. (1962) Professor of Chemistry; Ph.D., West Virginia Professor and University Librarian; Ph.D., University University, 1951. of Michigan, 1974. Wheeler, Douglas L. (1965) Voll,JohnO. (1965) Professor of History; Ph.D., Boston University, 1963. Professor History; Harvard University, 1969. of Ph.D., White, Susan O. (1969) Walker, Charles W. (1976) Associate Professor of Political Science; Ph.D., Associate Professor of Zoology; Ph.D., Cornell University of Minnesota, 1970. University, 1976. Wicks, John D. (1956) Wang, Tung-Ming (1961) Professor of Music; Ph.D., Harvard University, 1959. Professor of Civil Engineering; Ph.D., Northwestern Wilcox, Donald J. (1970) University, 1960. Professor of History; Ph.D., Harvard University, 1967. Sally Ward, K. (1980) Williams, Daniel C. (1970) Assistant Professor of Sociology; Ph.D., Brown Associate Professor of Psychology; Ph.D., University University, 1977. of California at Santa Barbara, 1970. Warner, Rebecca M. (1981) Williams, Thomas A., Jr. (1958) Assistant Professor of Psychology; Ph.D., Harvard Professor of English; M.A., University of New University, 1978. Hampshire, 1958.

Warren, Jerry A. (1971) Willits, Robin D. (1965) Associate Professor of Plant Science; Ph.D., Cornell Professor of Administration and Organization; Ph.D., University, 1960. Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1965.

Waterfield, D. Allan (1970) Wilson, John A. (1960) Associate Professor of Physical Education; Ph.D., Ohio Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering; Ph.D., State University, 1976. Northeastern University, 1970.

Watson, Winsor H., Ill (1978) Wing, Barbara H. (1970) Assistant Professor of Zoology; Ph.D., University of Assistant Professor of Spanish; Ph.D., Ohio State Massachusetts, 1978. University, 1980. Watters, David H. (1978) Wing, Henry J., Jr. (1970) Assistant Professor of English; Ph.D., Brown Associate Professor of Music; Ph.D., Boston University, 1978. University, 1966.

Wear, Robert E. (1964) Winn, Alden L. (1948) Associate Professor of Physical Education; Ph.D., Professor of Electrical Engineering; S.M., University of Michigan, 1955. Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1948.

123 Winslow, Deborah (1978) Assistant Professor of Anthropology; Ph.D., Stanford University, 1982.

Winslow, Mary Bowes (1978) Assistant Professor of Education; Ed.D., Harvard University, 1974.

Winslow, Ronald A., Jr. (1978) Assistant Professor of English; B.A., University of New Hampshire, 1971.

Wirth, Clifford J. (1981) Assistant Professor of Political Science; Ph.D., Southern Illinois University at Carbondale, 1976.

Wong, Edward Hou Sen (1978) Assistant Professor of Chemistry; Ph.D., Harvard University, 1975.

Woodward, William R. (1975) Associate Professor of Psychology; Ph.D., Yale University, 1975.

Wright, John J. (1970) Professor of Physics; Ph.D., University of New Hampshire, 1969.

Wrightsman, Dwayne E. (1964) Professor of Business and Economics; Ph.D., Michigan State University, 1964.

Yildiz, Asim (1967) Professor of Mechanics; D. Eng., Yale University, 1959.

Yount, John A. (1962-64, 1965) Professor of English; M.F.A., University of Iowa, 1962.

Zsigray, Robert M. (1970) Associate Professor of Microbiology and Genetics; Ph.D., Georgetown University, 1969.

124 Committees of the Graduate School

Committees of the Graduate School Student Fellowship Selection Committee Graduate Council William H. Drew, Ph.D. Raymond L. Erickson, Ph.D. Associate Dean of the Graduate School Dean of the Graduate School, Chairperson Richard P. Blakemore, Ph.D. William H. Drew, Ph.D. Associate Professor ot Microbiology Associate Dean of the Graduate School Wallace A. Bothner, Ph.D.

Harry J. Richards, Ph.D. Professor of Geology Assistant Dean of the Graduate School, Richard W. England, Ph.D. Secretary Associate Professor of Economics Charles H. Ashley, Ed.D. Edmund F. Jansen, Jr., Ph.D. Associate Professor of Education Professor of Resource Economics Richard W. England, Ph.D. Gary H. Lindberg, Ph.D. Associate Professor of Economics Professor of English Albert D. Frost, Sc.D. Professor of Electrical Engineering Faculty Fellowship Selection Francis R. Hall, Ph.D. Committee Professor of Hydrology William H. Drew, Ph.D. Lyman Mower, Ph.D. Associate Dean of the Graduate School Professor of Physics Paul L. Bishop, Ph.D. Thomas G. Pistole, Ph.D. Professor of Civil Engineering Associate Professor of Microbiology Richard W. Hurd, Ph.D. Luke J. Rheaume Associate Professor of Economics Ph.D. Student, Mathematics Robert Kertzer, Ph.D. John E. Rogers, M.F.A. Associate Professor of Physical Education Associate Professor of Music John E. Limber, Ph.D. Rebecca M. Warner, Ph.D. Associate Professor of Psychology Assistant Professor of Psychology Lincoln C. Peirce, Ph.D. James H. Weber, Ph.D. Professor of Plant Science and Genetics Professor of Chemistry

Donald J. Wilcox, Ph.D. Tuition Scholarship Selection Professor of History Committee Two graduate students will be appointed to the council Harry J. Richards, Ph.D. in the fall. Assistant Dean of the Graduate School Lori A. Alexander, Ph.D. Research Council Assistant Professor of Physical Education Lennard A. Fisk, Ph.D. Robert C. Gilmore, Ph.D. Director ot Research Professor of History Raymond L. Erickson, Ph.D. Richard Martin-Diaz, Ph.D. Dean oi the Graduate School Associate Professor of Administration Roger L. Arnoldy, Ph.D. Donald R. Miller, Ph.D. Professor of Physics Assistant Protessor of Wildlife Ecology Ginny W. Darr, Ph.D. Samuel D. Shore, Ph.D. Assistant Professor of Animal Sciences Associate Professor of Mathematics George O. Estes, Ph.D. Professor ot Plant Science Robert Kertzer, Ph.D. Associate Professor of Physical Education David E. Leary, Ph.D. Associate Professor of Psychology Dean A. Morrow Senior, Business Administration Sharon N, Oja, Ph.D. Associate Professor of Education Charles K. Taft, Ph.D. Professor of Mechanical Engineering

Two faculty members from Liberal Arts and one from the Whitteniore School will be appointed in the fall.

One graduate student will be appointed in the fall.

125 — Campus Map and Key

1 1 I c" H rr K

Itom* «« rMtrictadI» 9

I K I B I C I E I G H J 45 Kingsbury Hallf* and Marine Programs 72 Rice House 13 Building G6 73 Richards House H3 46 Lewis Field D5 Richardson House (see 53) Liberal Arts, College of (see 55) 74 Ritzman Nutrition Laboratory E6 Life Sciences and Agriculture, 75 Robinson House 12 College of (see 88) 76 ROTC Building, Zais Hall F6t 47 Livestock Activities Center B3 Sackett House (see 53) 48 Lord Hall F2 77 Sawyer Hall G3 Marine Programs (see 45) 78 Schofield House H2 Marston House (see 53) 79 SCORE Building F6 49 McConnell Hall H6*t 80 Scott Hall G3 50 McLaughlin Hall F3 Service Building (see 24)t Mechanics Research Lab (see 45) 81 Smith Hall G3 51 Memorial Field E3 82 Snively Arena F2t 52 Memorial Union Building HSf* 83 Social Science Center, Horton H5*t 53 Mini Dorms (Eaton, Hall, Marston, 84 Spaulding Life Science Center GSf Richardson, Sackett, Woodruff) G8 85 Stillings Dining Hall G2 53a Moiles House (4-H) A4 86 Stoke Hall H2* 54 Morrill Hall F4*t Student Affairs (see 38) 55 Murkland Hall G4t 87 Swimming Pool, outdoor F2 Natural and Environmental Resources, 88 Taylor Hall F4t Institute of (see 41) Theaters (see 65) 56 Nesmith Hall E4 89 Thompson Hall G4*t New England Center: Thompson School of Applied 57 Adams Residential Tower G2* Science (see 5) 58 Administration Building G2 Tickets, athletic (see 23) 59 Kellogg Learning Center Gl*f Tickets, cultural events (see 52) 60 New Hampshire Hall F3t 90 Tirrell Classroom Building B3 61 Nursery School G3 91 Tirrell Light Horse Stable B3t 62 O'Connell House H3 92 Tumor Research Building E6 63 Palmer House 12 93 Verrette House HSf Parking lots—gray areas Water Resources Res. Cntr. (see 66) 64 Parsons Hall G6t* 93a Water Treatment Plant E8 65 Paul Creative Arts Center GSf WENH-TV (see 52) 66 Pettee Hall E4 Whittemore School of Business and Pettee House (see 40) Economics (see 49)t* 67 Philbrook Dining Hall H7t 94 Williamson Hall G8*t 68 Poultry Plant E6 95 Wolff House 13 69 President's House H3 Woodruff House (see 53) Public Administration Service (see 83) Zais Hall (see 76)t 70 Putnam Hall 03 • 70a Racing Commission Stables C3t building equipped with elevator t building accessible at ground level 71 Randall Hall H5 :t one apt. only is accessible Registrar (see 89) Residence Office, housing (see 40) Resources Development Center (see 95)

127 Graduate School Calendar 1982-83

Semester I

September 8, Wednesday 8 a.m. Classes begin

September 13, Monday Graduate student registration (day students)

September 13-16, Mon-Thurs Graduate student registration (evening students, 5-7 p.m.)

September 17, Friday Last day to drop courses without $10 late-drop fee Last day to request audit without dean's approval

September 20, Monday Last day to withdraw and qualify for ¥4 tuition refund

September 24, Friday Last day to file Intent to Graduate for December graduation Last day to add courses without dean's approval and $10 late-add fee

October 7, Thursday Last day to withdraw and qualify for Vi tuition refund

October 29, Friday Midsemester—Last day to drop courses or withdraw without academic liability; last day to carry more than 16 credits without surcharge

November 11, Thursday Veterans Day holiday—no classes

November 19, Friday Last day for Ph.D. dissertation defense (December graduation)

November 24, Wednesday Classes hold Thursday schedule

November 25-26, Thurs-Fri Thanksgiving holiday—no classes

November 29, Monday 8 a.m. Classes resume

December 1, Wednesday Last day for completing application for admission to graduate study, request for change in degree program, or application for readmission for Spring Semester, 1983

December 3, Friday Last day for presenting final copies of doctoral dissertation or master's thesis to the Graduate School for binding (December graduation) Last day to take final comprehensive examination for the master's degree

December 17, Friday Last day for resolving incompletes from Semester II 1981-82 and/or Summer 1982

December 18, Saturday Commencement Reading Day

December 20, Monday Semester I final exams begin

December 23, Thursday Final exams end

Semester II

January 26, Wednesday 8 a.m. Classes begin

January 31, Monday Graduate student registration (day students)

January 31-February 3, Graduate student registration (evening students, 5-7 p.m.) Mon-Thurs February 4, Friday Last day to drop courses without $10 late-drop fee Last day to register for audit without dean's approval

128 February 7, Monday Last day to withdraw and qualify for Va, tuition refund

February 11, Friday Last day to add courses without dean's approval and $10 late-add fee

February 15, Tuesday Last day for completing application for admission to graduate study for Fall Semester 1983, to insure consideration for financial assistance for the 1983-84 academic year

February 24, Thursday Last day to withdraw and qualify for '/2 tuition refund

February 25, Friday Last day to file Intent to Graduate for May graduation

March 21-25, Mon-Fri Spring Recess

March 28, Monday 8 a.m. Classes resume

April 1, Friday Midsemester—Last day to drop courses or withdraw without academic liability; last day to carry more than 16 credits without surcharge Last day for completing application for admission to graduate study, request for change in degree program, or application for readmission for Summer Session, 1983

April 29, Friday Last day for final Ph.D. dissertation defense (May graduation)

May 13, Friday Last day for presenting final copies of doctoral dissertation or master's thesis to the Graduate School for binding (May graduation) Last day to take final comprehensive examination for the master's degree

May 17, Tuesday Last day for resolving incompletes from Semester I 1982-83

May 18-19, Wed-Thurs Reading days

May 20, Friday Semester II final exams begin

May 26, Thursday Final exams end

May 28, Saturday Commencement

Summer Session 1983

June 3, Friday Last day to file Intent to Graduate for September graduation

July 1, Friday Last day for completing application for admission to graduate study, request for change in degree program, or application for readmission for Fall Semester, 1983.

July 22, Friday Last day for final Ph.D. dissertation defense (September graduation)

August 5, Friday Last day for presenting final copies of doctoral dissertation or master's thesis to the Graduate School for binding (September graduation)

The University reserves the right to modify the calendar subsequent to printing.

129 1 1 1

Index

Abbreviations 27 Forest Resources 73, 80 Academic regulations 21-25 Administrative withdrawal 16 Genetics 6, 71, 99 Admission 12-14 Genetics Program 6, 71 Agricultural Experiment Station 10 Geology 46 Alumni Association 9 Grades 21 Animal Sciences 28, 72 Graduate Council 6, 125 Application 12 Graduate School Office 6 Applied Music 92 Assistantships 19 Handicapped Student Services 9 Associates 20 Health services 8 History 73 Babcock House 7 Home Economics 76 Biochemistry 29 Honorary fellows 14 Biology 30 Hood House 8 Botany and Plant Pathology 31 Housing 7 Business Administration 33 Hydrology 81

Calendar 128 Incompletes 21 Campus 2, 5, 6, 126 Institute of Natural and Environmental Career Planning and Placement 8 Resources 6, 72, 78, 79 Certificate for Advanced Graduate Study 24, 54 Instrumentation Center 10 Chemical Engineering 6, 36 Insurance 8 Chemistry 37 Intercollege Biological Sciences Churches 9 Organization 6, 30 Civil Engineering 6, 40 Intercollege Course 82 Committees of the Graduate School 125 Interdisciplinary programs 6, 10, 64, 71, 78 Communication Disorders 43 Interlibrary loan 11 Computer Center 10 Computer Engineering 6, 60 Jackson Estuarine Laboratory 10, 11 Computer Science 44 Computer Services 1 Leave of absence 15 Conditional Admission 14 Library 11 Continuing education 9, 24 Loans 20 Counseling and Testing Center 38 Course charges 18 Map 2, 126 Course descriptions 27-112 Marine Program 10, 11 Credits 22-24 Marine science 10 Cultural activities 6 Married students' housing 7 Master of Business Administration 33 Deadlines 12 Master of Arts 3, 5 Degree candidacy 24 See also specific departments Degree programs 3 Master of Arts in Teaching 53 Departmental requirements 27-112 Master of Education 51, 53

Diamond Island Ocean Engineering Station 1 Master of Occupational Education 94 Dining 7 Master of Public Administration 100 Dissertation 25 Master of Science 3, 5 Division of Continuing Education 5, 15 See also specific departments Doctoral programs 3, 6, 24 Master of Science for Teachers 3, 5, 12 Doctor of Philosophy 3, 6, 24 See also specific departments See also specific aeparlmetits Master's programs 3, 5, 23 See also specific departments Earth Sciences 46 Master's requirements 23 Economics 49 Master's thesis 23 Ecumenical ministry 9 Mathematics 82 Education 51 Mechanical Engineering 6, 86 Electrical and Computer Engineering 6, 60 Media Services 1 Employees, University 14 Memorial LInion 6 Engineering Ph.D. Program 6, 64 Merit, Graduate Scholarships for 19 English 65 Merrimack Valley College 5 Entomology 70 Microbiology 73, 89 Environmental Resources, Institute of Natural Ministry 9 and 6. 72, 78, 79 Music 91 Examinations 23, 24 Music, applied 92 Music Education 91, 93 Facilities 10 Faculty 114-124 Natural and Environmental Family Research Laboratory 10 Resources 6, 72, 78, 79 Fees 17, 18 New England Regional Program 17 Fellowships 19 New England Center for Continuing Financial Aid 19 Education 9 Foreign students 12 Forest Park 7

130 Occupational Education 4 Ocean Engineering 10, 11 Oceanography 10, 46 Off-campus courses 22 Off-campus housing 7 Officers of administration 113

Ph.D. requirements 24 Physical Education 95 Physics 96 Placement service 8 Plant Science 73, 98 Political Science 100 Psychology 102

Recreation 6 Refund of course charges 18 Registration 14 Regulations, academic 21 Requirements, departmental 27-112 Requirements, doctor's degree 24 Requirements, master's degrees 23 Research 10 Research Computing Group 11 Research Council 6, 125 Residences 7 Resident, nonresident status 17 Resource Economics 81 Ritzman Animal Nutrition Laboratory 10

Scholarships 19 Sea Grant 10, 11 Senate, University 6 Senior, University 14 Service facilities 10 Shoals Marine Laboratory 10, 11 Social activities 6 Social Psychology 103 Sociology 104 Soil Science 82 Space Science Center 10 Spanish 108 Special students 14 Stipends 19-20 Student life 6-9 Student services 8, 9 Sub-Degree Exchange Program 17 Summer Assistantships and Fellovk'ships 19, 20 Summer Housing 7 Summer Session 15

Teaching and Learning Council 6 Testing 8 Thesis 23 Thesis fees 18 Transfer of credits 22 Trustees 113 Tuition 18

Union, student 6 University Instrumentation Center 10 University System of New Hampshire 5

Withdrawal 15 Work-Study 20 Writing, Master of Arts in 66

Zoology 7, 73, 109

131 The University of New Hampshire is a pubhc institution with a long-standing commitment to

equal opportunity for all. In accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, Title IX of the Educational Amendments of 1972, and Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, the University of New Hampshire does not discrimi- nate on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, age, national origin, veteran's status, or handicap in its admission or access to, or treatment or employ-

ment in, its programs or activities receiving federal financial assistance. Inquiries regarding sex discrimination should be made to Ms. Nancy Deane, University Director of Affirmative Action, Thompson Hall, (603) 862-1844, or the Director, Office for Civil Rights, Department of Education, Washington, D.C. 20201. Inquiries regarding handicap discrimination should be made to the University Section 504 Coordinator, Ms. Sharon Kraft-Lund, Huddleston Hall, Room 101, 862- 2607.

The University of New Hampshire has adopted a grievance procedure to provide tor the resolution of complaints under this policy. A copy of the grievance procedure may be obtained at the Dean for Student Affairs Office, Huddleston Hall.

The University is in compliance with federal guaranteed student loan regulations and will supply information about the employment of its graduates who have majored in specialized degree programs that normally lead to specific employment fields. This information may be obtained upon request from the University's Career Planning and Place-

ment Service, which is available to all students. The University does not guarantee employment to its graduates.

The University provides full information pertaining to the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 1974 (the "Buckley Amendment") in the annual student guide. Information also is available from the offices of the dean for student affairs and the vice-president for academic affairs.

The University assumes no liability for failure to provide or for delay in providing expected services and/or facilities when such failure arises from causes beyond the reasonable control of the Uni- versity. Similarly, because educational planning is ongoing rather than static, changes may be made between printings of the Bulletin, and courses may be canceled because of insufficient enrollment; therefore, the Bulletin cannot constitute a contract between UNH and students.

132 £.

Call 378.7^+2 N53J+5 1982/83 Bulletin of the University of New Hampshire Office of Communications Schofield House University of New Hampshire Durham, NH 03824